Lb ccmem malininciean AP A WPL NN SOA Ny ca An byt te ind SY Nndametient, be! aa to ctasha ee, gn At GP a Ne Le ; Se y = ans nape sali 8 - Ep rn ORE I eS EA PION AINE ESET EAE MED EEE BT! ea | cece pice eta ae ; ~ oe ee ; ask eeeatod ee Se ot akin: aaa WSN ee ee eS ates a eR ee > eae Fe a RE NR tn em ie aN "i (Pohe ral oF x B LIBRARY NEW YORE wh 3 % a = BOTANICAL VOI, yee | 7 GARDEN “BULLETIN OF THE — Southern California _ Academy of Sciences LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA VoL. 55 CONTENTS Pseudoscorpions, A Natural Control of Siphonaptera in ‘Neotoma Nests. Jens W. Knudsen... o.oo teescetesetceneecees 1 Four New Predaceous Mites. Philip Garman and E, A. McGregor 7 A Remarkable New Rhagovelia From the Dominican Republic. C. J. Drake and J. Maldonado-Capriles..2.c..00.e0.icciccb sek teceoeee cee A New Gantacaderid From Brasil. Carl J: Drake and F. Plaumann.. 17 Notes on Metamorphoses of the Giant Skippers (Megathyminae) and the Life History of an Arizona Species. omar AOIIS, COMSTOCK; fan er a Sah eg eal ce oa 19 A New Species of Stegocephalus (Amphipoda). From California. D. E. Hurley..... Two Rare Amphipods From. California With Notes on the Genus IS OTS TAGUTONS i PAINGTO nj ea Le ey BRE Tee A New Species of Amnicolid Snail From Chihuahua, Mexico. UCT bs SOTGRCA ae Rin hae bt ee ae eo ves be Fish Records From the Pleistocene of Southern California. SA eee wien n en en et Seaweed enn eH dan Re naar awnNadehiess¥asasusascessenassasaseaseene: BECO fT OG Pied is UN ay i EN Ee 47 MRT DOL ATO sas ch i hibaced nse ctbast a! Aoaed.vatoes upton sates 50 eT Ba UST EARS Gases A BM OIC Os ge La NR ED 51 ERRRICIYY PEOCECOIR OSE ee oe cccoebusal basen ae 54 Issued May 8, 1956 1964-6 Southern California Academy of Sciences _ OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS i Fi es eee OE ee - Ma; Kesrinethy Th. Gta io oso. ches sasesascshecpeseiceroconsshpoerascosspinnciv oeasel Gc ED aD President Dr. Hildegarde Howard... rea ...First Vice-President Be BOC Ses TL Bde strecebisocbetbcattaedancguss op tadetecteaduabeiveleghicecise salad ul cae Second Vice-President Mihew Grrobehiets, SiMe y icc. pik h.2 seen scasasscdachpnevs ontopasidow aaa] gheceressesceeu ee enenan mine Secretary Mr La Mi BA GEUI , tsbedath es coteh cuseite tae taderesduacegar Govdcedendonvenevs sh aaa Assistant to Secretary Dee We Wig ah PUR eh is hinted rhana bie vicinwt db ed aad cecdape ee Nk Mie eaoente Treasurer DE EGTB. Bs STIR OOEN, pre hs. wieesaten put bie Paeoshagitekoies Uleptatduss costar dspahee a 2 Editor Dr. A. Weir Bell Miss Gretchen Sibley | Dr. John A. Comstock Miss Ruth D, Simpson Dr. Theodore Downs Mr. Kenneth E, Stager Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Fred S. Truxal Dr. W. Dwight Pierce Dr. Louis C. Wheeler Dr. Sherwin F. Wood ADVISORY BOARD J. Stanley Brode Dr. Carroll L. Lang De ea Clements Mr. Lloyd M. Martin Dr. Howard R. Hill Mr, Theodore Payne Dr. Homer P. King Dr. R. H. Swift Miss Bonnie Templeton SCIENCE SECTIONS Section of Agricultural Sciences Section of Earth Sciences Mr. Lloyd M. Martin, Chairman Dr. William H. Easton, Chairman Anthropological Section Section of Health and Sanitation Miss Ruth D. Simpson, Chairman Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman Botanical Section Section of Junior Scientists } Dr. Lyman Benson, Chairman Miss Bess Reed Peacock, Chairman Section of Conservation Section of Physical Sciences Dr. Sherwin F. Wood, Chairman Dr. Julius Sumner Miller, Chairman Section of Zoological Sciences Dr. William V. Mayer, Chairman STANDING COMMITTEES Finance - Publication Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman Dr. John A. Comstock, Chairman Mr. Allen Steuart, Auditor Dr. A. W. Bell Dr. John A. Comstock Dr. William H. Easton Mr. John R. Pemberton . Dr. Hildegarde Howard Mr. Russell S. Woglum Dr. George R. Johnstone Program Membership Mr. Kenneth E. Stager, Chairman Dr. William V. Mayer Hospitality Library Mr. Donald Drake Mrs. Lloyd M. Martin, Chairman OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, California Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences VOLUME 55 Ei er - = - - Parr 1, 1956 PSEUDOSCORPIONS, A NATURAL CONTROL OF SIPHONAPTERA IN NEOTOMA NESTS* By Jens W. KNUDSEN Reasearch Fellow, Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California INTRODUCTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT With the exception of Alphonsus’ (1922) brief and unfinished work with pseudoscorpions in beehives, an investigation of pseu- doscorpion feeding habits with respect to possible economic value has not been made. Upon finding large numbers of pseudo- scorpions in Neotoma nests (Neotoma, Citellus, and Cynomys are the important plague reservoirs in the United States, Eskey, 1940) the writer conducted research from June 1953, to Feb. 1954, to determine (1) if pseudoscorpions feed on plague fleas, thus controlling them, (2) the extent of the control, and (3) the per cent of Neotoma nests with pseudoscorpions, as well as (4) the range within which pseudoscorpions occur in rodent nests. At this time the writer wishes to express his thanks to Dr. Clayton C. Hoff of the University of New Mexico for identifying the pseudoscorpions concerned in this problem. FIELD OBSERVATIONS. Wood rats are shown to be abundant in the south-west United States (Burt and Grossenheider 1952). A census taken in Lopez Canyon, which revealed a total of 151 wood rat nests along three-tenths of a mile of canyon road, gives an idea as to the possible magnitude of the Neotoma populations for this area. The wood rat, Neotoma fuscipes Baird, builds its nest in the low foothill regions, generally near an old creek bed where the vegetation offers a maximum of food and protection. * Allan Hancock Foundation Contribution No. 174. 1 BuLLetiIn, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 The huts are large structures made of sticks and bark and are three to four feet high. Each hut has many tunnels and rooms which contain stored food, a toilet area, feeding chamber, and nest cups in which adult fleas, developing larval fleas, and pseu- doscorpions ere found. For field data nest cups with surrounding and underlying material were collected in one-gallon bottles, processed in Berlese funnels, and the Siphonaptera and pseudo- scorpions counted. Pseudoscorpions were found to occur in Neotoma nests from Oregon to Baja California, eastward to Texas, and southward to Sonora, Mexico. Of 153 Neotoma nests collected in the San Ga- briel Meuntains, Los Angeles County, seventy-one per cent con- tained pseudoscorpions (mostly Dinocheirus sicarius J. C, Cham- berlin and a possible new species of Hesperochernes) ranging from one to forty-four per hut. During the summer months an average of eighteen adult fleas (Anomiopsyllus nudatus (Baker), Anomiopsyllus falsicalifornicus C. Fox, Diamanus montanus (Baker), Hoplopsyllus anomalus (Baker), and Orchopeas s. sexdentatus Baker, in order of great- est abundance) was found in nests without pseudoscorpions while nests with pseudoscorpions averaged twelve fleas, a re- duction of one-third. A ratio of five adult fleas to three pseudo- scorpions was also found. Favorable temperatures and humidi- ties allow great increases in the flea population during the winter and spring months in Southern California (over 1400 fleas were found on a single occasion); however, the pseudoscorpion pop- ulation within the rat nests also shows a marked increase at these times. FEEDING TEST OBSERVATIONS. The examination of flea and pseudoscorpion populations in nature, though significant to this study, was not an accurate measurement of the pseudoscorpion’s feeding habits. It was necessary, therefore, to determine by feeding tests what items of food would be eaten by the pseudo- scorpion, to measure its preference, if any, and to obtain some idea of the volume of food it would eat at a given time. For these experiments hundreds of pseudoscorpions were isolated in separate one-and-one-half dram, cotton-stoppered vials, and fed selected items of food. One feeding test consisted of one three- hour feeding period for one pseudoscorpion with recorded obser- vations every five minutes for one-half hour, and then every ten minutes for two and one-half hours. Of one hundred pseudoscorpions offered adult fleas, eighty- eight were observed to feed; in contrast to this ninety-four of one hundred pseudoscorpions fed when they were offered flea larvae; and again ninety of one hundred pseudoscorpions fed on mites offered to them. Pseudoscorpions also fed upon Collem- 2 BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PIC ANE A pseudoscorpion starting to feed upon an adult flea during a feeding experiment. bola, beetle larvae, and small spiders but displayed little prefer- ence for these. When one hundred pseudoscorpions were offered adult and larval fleas simultaneously, sixty-six per cent chose larval fleas and thirty-four per cent chose adults. When offered adult fleas and mites simultaneously sixty-nine per cent chose the fleas and thirty-one per cent chose mites. In preference tests where larval fleas and mites were offered to the pseudoscorpions simultaneously, seventy per cent chose flea larvae while only thirty per cent chose mites. Compiled data of all preference tests show that 45.3 per cent of all pseudoscorpions chose larval fleas, 34.3 per cent chose adult fleas, and only 20.3 per cent chose mites. Ten pseudoscorpions were fed continuously until they would no longer take any food. Fifty-three flea larvae were consumed by the ten in a matter of three-and-one-half hours. During an- other experiment twenty-four adult fleas were eaten by five pseudoscorpions. The results demonstrate that an average of about five adult or larval fleas can be eaten at one feeding time by a single pseudoscorpion. After twenty-four hours these same pseudoscorpions fed in only a languorous manner, indicating that they were not in any great need of food. 3 BuLLetTin, So. Carre. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 2 \ young pseudoscorpion has captured a flea larva prior to feeding. The larva is coiled around the pseudoscorpion’s chelae. Since pseudoscorpions feed by sucking body fluids from their prey it is the opinion of the writer that the preference displayed by them is based on the quantity of body fluids of one food type as compared to another. There is a direct correlation between the amount of body fluid of the food items and the preference displayed. The sizes of the mites, fleas, and flea larvae were as closely alike as possible to make these tests fair. The walking speed of the mite or flea as compared to the flea larva was a hindrance to the individual in that it walked into or around the pseudoscorpion more frequently than did the slower forms. In spite of speed or slowness the pseudoscorpion displayed prefer- ence in that it picked up and set aside, numerous times, any food item that it did not prefer until a suitable type was located, at which time feeding was begun. All other known forms of possible error or chance reaction were ruled out by the high number of feeding tests conducted. BULLETIN, So. CauiF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 CONTROLLED HUT OBSERVATIONS. The controlled rat nests, de- signed to simulate natural nests, were used in the laboratory to check the results obtained in the field; in this way a strict con- trol of the number of insects and pseudoscorpions was possible. The nests were constructed in large, flea-proofed battery jars that were furnished with straw and stocked with set numbers of fleas, pseudoscorpions, mites, Collembola, Thysanura, and other insects, and maintained for thirty-eight days, which gave ample time for the completion of an adult-to-adult life cycle of the flea. Fourteen controlled huts were set up, of which ten were carried to completion, the other four being eliminated when neighborhood boys released the wood rats. Results were based on the number of adult fleas present at the time of termi- nation of the controlled experiments. At termination, huts con- taining pseudoscorpions averaged 19.4 fleas while huts without pseudoscorpions averaged 34.7 fleas. This reduction of fleas is roughly one third and closely matches the reduction found in nature. OTHER OBSERVATIONS. During the months of May and Sep- tember it was common to find that the wood rat had removed its current nest cups, either intact or in part, and discarded them near the hut. It is possible that flea larvae may also be removed with the nest and left exposed to the killing rays of the sun. Discussion. Locally pseudoscorpions were demonstrated in seventy-one per cent of the Neotoma nests, and were found to occur in rodent nests from Oregon to Baja California, eastward to Texas, and southward to Sonora, Mexico, which, according to the U. S. Public Health survey (Eskey) of 1935 is the same critical desert region in which the wood rat serves as the most important reservoir of sylvatic plague. It was demonstrated that pseudoscorpions will and do eat adult and larval fleas as well as mites and other arthropods, and that they display a strong preference for the larvae, due perhaps to the higher body fluid content of this stage. The reduction of the flea population in nature by roughly one-third in the nests containing pseudoscorpions, as compared to nests without pseu- doscorpions, would tend to substantiate this. Little doubt was left that pseudoscorpions do control Siphonaptera when test huts in the laboratory also demonstrated a one-third reduction as compared to control huts without pseudoscorpions. It is not the belief of the investigator that pseudoscorpions enter the nests for the sole purpose of obtaining Siphonaptera, but rather to obtain food in general. Once in the Neotoma nest pseudoscor- pions are in a situation where it is possible for them to elminate tremendous numbers of Siphonaptera. Thus the pseudoscorpion may be considered important as a natural control for fleas and 5 Butcetin, So. Cate. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 thereby a controlling factor of the sylvatic plague. The informa- tion brought out in this investigation in general gives a greater understanding of the sylvatic plague problem, and when all data are considered, evidence warrants the recognition of the pseudo- scorpion as a form of natural control of the plague flea in Neotoma nests. SUMMARY 1. Pseudoscorpions are present in wood rat nests from Oregon to Baja California, and eastward to Texas and Sonora, Mexico. In this range the wood rat is the important plague reservoir animal. 2. Pseudoscorpions are present in over seventy per cent of the Neotoma nests in numbers ranging from one to forty-four. There is a reduction in the flea population of about one- third in nests with pseudoscorpions as compared to nests without them. The number of fleas is inversely proportional to the num- ber of pseudoscorpions. 4. Pseudoscorpions enter the Neotoma nests to obtain all forms of food, and not solely for Siphonaptera. 5. Feeding experiments proved that pseudoscorpions will eat adult and larval fleas as well as other anthropods, and that they prefer flea larvae to other forms of food. 6. The controlled hut experiments demonstrated a one-third re- duction of the flea population identical with that found in nature. Such domestic habits of the wood rat as nest rebuilding may be a minor controlling factor. 8. Pseudoscorpions in the Neotoma nests are reducing the Hea population which in turn retards plague transmission. 9. Evidence warrants the recognition of pseudoscorpions as a form of natural control of plague fleas in Neotoma nests. LITERATURE CITED Alfonsus, A. 1922. “An Enemy of the Mites in the Bee Hive,” Bee World, 4:2-3 Burt, W. H., and Grossenheider, R. P. 1952. “A field guide to the Mammals,” Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston. Eskey, C. R., and Haas, V. H. 1940. “Plague in the Western Part of the United States,” U. S. Public Health Bulletin No. 245. Hubbard, Clarence Andresen 1947. leas of Western North America, lowa State College Press, Ames, OWad Knudsen, Jens W. 1954. Pseudoscorpions, a Natural Control of Siphonaptera in Neotoma Nests, University of Southern California Library, Masters Thesis, Zoology. BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 FOUR NEW PREDACEOUS MITES (ACARINA, PHYTOSEIIDAE) By Puitie GARMAN AND E. A. McGrecor In a study by McGregor of the mites found to occur on citrus in southern California, four species received special attention by Garman in the matter of identification. Accordingly the present paper has been prepared to appear in advance of the principal publication, so that established species names may be had for reference. These phytoseiid mites are predaceous, and many of them are important enemies of the phytophagous tetranychid mites, or “spider mites,’ and hence are of economic importance. Garmania lewisi new species Plate ness lean 3 Mate.—Dorsal setae in number and arrangement that of Garmania bulbicola (Oudemans ), as figured by Nesbitt for the female, but the length of these setae is distinctly longer in the present species. The outline of the sterni-genital scutum is rather ill-defined in our species, but it has 5 pairs of setae and 4 anglu- lations each side. The posterior boundary of the genital portion of this scutum is somewhat indistinct. The anal plate is expan- _ sive, occupying most of the area behind coxae IV; it is sub- cordate in outline, and distinctly sculptured; it bears 14 longish setae, 3 transverse rows of 4 each, and one each side marginally opposite anterior face of anus; one pair of setee on anus. An- terior appendages of hypostome with each external mala basally bearing internally two somewhat separated spines. The median hypostomal structure, between the malae, bearing laterally along its midregion a fringe of fine setae. Anterior pair of ventral hypostomal setae not stronger than others. Hypostomal teeth either lacking or extremely minute. cd ( BuLLetin, So. Cauur. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part l, 1956 PLATE 3 Garmania lewisi n. sp.: fig. 1, ventral view of hypostome; fig. 2, sternal- genital plate and coxal bases; fig. 3, posterior venter and associated setae. Ho.otype MALE.—No. 8-21-54, on orange, Irvine, Calif., Aug. 16, 1954, collected by H. Lewis. Deposited in the collection of the Los Angeles County Museum. Also on slide 9-8-54, on orange, Irvine, Calif., Aug. 24, 1954, collected by Lewis. Typhlodromus citri new species Plate Aishigs) 157263. 4; 5716 FEeMALE.—Resembling T. conspicuus (Garman), but differing in several particulars, as confirmed by E. W. Baker. With 8 pairs of marginal setae on dorsal shied, mostly short; seta M-2 and L-8 the longest; seta M-2 not paired with any other seta, nearly equidistant from D-5 and L-8. An interscutal seta laterad of seta 8 BuLLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 coy PLATE 4 Typhlodromus citri n. sp.: fig. 1, dorsum showing setal details; fig. 2, peritremal plate; fig. 3, setae on base of tarsus IV; fig. 4, sternal plate; fig. 5, genital and metapodal plates; fig. 6, ventrianal plate. L-4, and one well behind L-6. Sternal scutum roughly rectangu- lar, with 2 pairs of setae, and with humeral angles prominently pointed. Two pairs of metapodal plates, each with a seta. Genital plate thimble-shaped, gently convex behind, with a pair of setae. Anal plate sagittate, broadest anteriorly, somewhat wider than genital scutum, with 4 pairs of pre-anal setae; a fine pore behind each second inner seta. Peritreme reaching anteriorly to seta D-1, recurved posteriorly like the head and neck of a bird. Tarsus [V with a rather long seta. BuLvtetin, So. Cartier. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 | 6 PLATE 5 Amblyseius limonicus n. sp.: fig. 1, dorsum showing setal details; fig. 2, palpus; fig. 3, tritosternum; fig. 4, posterior venter, showing ventrianal scutum and associated setae and parapodal plates; fig. 5, sternal scutum and metapodal plates; fig. 6, hypostome. 10 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 HOLOTYE FEMALE No. 4-18-52, on lemon, N. Whittier Heights, Calif., April 18, 1952, collected by F. Munger. Deposited in the collection of the Los Angeles County Museum. Also No. 9-27-53, on lemon, Whittier, Calif., Sept. 27, 1953, collected by Munger; also No. 54-2-1, on lemon, Camarillo, Calif., Dec. 17, 1953, col- lected by H. Lewis; and No. 4-23-54, lemon, N. Whittier Heights, Calif., May 1953, collected by F. Munger. Amblyseius limonicus new species lateroy nese.) One OmG: FEMALE. Dorsum with lateral setae 1, 4 and 9 longer than others, though not as long as in other members of the genus. Dorsals very minute, two small scapulars; pores as in figure 1. Integument smooth. Chelicerae with 7 to 9 teeth on fixed arm. Palpi each with a spatulate seta on the inside of segment 3. Epi- stome of usual form—the cornicles slender, somewhat approxi- mate. Leg IV with longer setae on genual, tibia and first tarsal segment. Anal plate (fig. 4) expanded anteriorly, with forward setae grouped somewhat as in T. finlandicus, but the spacing be- tween the setae more unequal and the middle pair nearer the anterior margin. Two lunate pores as in fig. 4. Sternal plate with two setae each side and en almost circular metapodal plate be- hind caudo-lateral angle on each side. Parapodal plates consist- ing of a slender, almost needle-like pair each side, the smaller about 1/5 as long as the larger. Peritreme plate blunt at posterior end, but not as squarely truncate as in some members of the genus. Tracheae each side extending forward to coxa I or almost in line with seta D*. Genital armature semicircular in appearance, with lines radiating from the anterior margin. MALE not available. FEMALE, Measurements. Length .198-.240 mm., width .135 mm., leg IV .255-.285 mm., seta L’ .048-.056 mm. Hasirat. Found on orange and lemon, California, presum- ably feeding on Tetranychidae. Santa Ana, Sept. 20, 1940, Mc- Burnie Coll.; Carpinteria, Nov. 11, 1954, Lewis Coll.; Goleta, Oct. 4, 1953, Hall Coll.; Chula Vista, Aug. 5, 1935, Jones Coll. Hotorypre Santa Ana slide; Garman Lot 40-21386. Deposited in the Connecticut Agricultural Experiment Station collection. Also a slide, McGregor Lot 11-9-54. Notes. The anal plate of this species strongly resembles that of Typhlodromus finlandicus, but there is a noticeable difference in the spacing of the setae in relation to one another. There is also an importance difference in the length of the tracheae, which extend much farther forward than those of finlandicus. In addi- ll Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Buttery, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AAAS VL PLATE 6 Ameroseius californicus n. sp.: fig. 1, seta D®, fig. 2, ventral view of right side of hypostome; fig. 3, forked seta on palp-tarsus; fig. 4, dorsal view of mite; fig. 5, sternal plate; fig. 6, one of the leaflike setae at front apex of body; fig. 7, posterior venter, showing ventrianal scutum, parapodal plates, and associated setae. BULLETIN, So. CauirF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 tion, the chelicerae bear a conspicuous row of teeth, not seen in finlandicus. The greater length of the lateral setae, as men- tioned above, and the small size of the dorsals, places it in Amblyseius. Ameroseius californicus new species RlatesGy hgse dl, 25°35 405. Go 7: The senior author examined this mite and concluded that it probably belongs in the genus Ameroseius, and is probably un- described. FEMALE.—Dorsum evidently with 11 pairs of lateral setae; L* and L® are shorter than L'®. There appear to be 7 pairs of interscutal (?) setae anterior to setae L*. The median dorsal setae (or spines) increase gradually in length from front to rear. Most of the body setae are thick-lanceolate, with weak secondary pectinations. A pair of plumate setae borne at front tip of body. Dorsal integument mosaic. Sternal scutum sub-rectangular, bear- ing 2 pairs of setae, with humeral engles rather prominent. Meta- podal plates ovate, rather acutely pointed mesad. Parapodal plates one each side, banana-shaped. Ventri-anal scutum ovate, much wider than long, posterior margin scalloped, bearing one pair of paraanal setae, and a post-anal seta. A row of 4 setae immediately in front of anterior margin of ventri-anal scutum. One seta mesad of each parapodal plate. Forked sensory seta of pedipalp with a small secondary spur on inner spine. Cheli- cera with 3 rounded teeth on the fixed arm. All legs with only short setae. Peritreme extending anteriorly to seta D'. This species differs from Berlese’s hirsutus in the chaetotaxy of the posterior venter, outline of the anal plate, shape of the metapodal and parapodal plates, and in the length of the various dorsal and lateral setae. HOLOTYPE FEMALE No. 3-31-55, citrus, near Stanton, Calif., March 31, 1955, Collected McGregor. Deposited in the collection of the Los Angeles County Museum. Four mites (Typhlodromus sp.) also on this slide. 13 BuLLetin, So. Cane. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 A REMARKABLE NEW RHAGOVELIA FROM THE DOMINICAN REPUBLIC ( Hemiptera: Veliidae ) By C. J. Drake’ ann J. MALDONADO-CAPRILES” During the latter part of last December (1955), the junior author spent ten days collecting Hemiptera in the Dominican Republic of the West Indies. Among the aquatic Hemiptera netted, there are several specimens of an undescribed ripple- strider belonging to the genus Rhagovelia Mayr. This peculiar water-treader differs from all its congeners of the Americas in having the third segment of the antennae in the male very strongly dorso-ventrally compressed so as to make it very broad, thin, nearly flat and nearly elongate-ovate in outline. In female specimens this segment is not modified, is cylindical and similar in general aspect to that found in other members of the genus. As almost all of described species of Rhagovelia are represented in the collection of the authors, we feel that the strongly modified third antennal segment should be treated as a specific character peculiar to the male sex of the new species characterized below. Rhagovelia secluda, n. sp. Plate 7 figs. 1-4 APTEROUS FORM: Moderately large, black, with the transverse, subapical, orange band divided at the middle; anterior third of pronotum and entire body beneath heavily coated with bluish pruinose; all acetabula stramineous. Head with median longitu- dinal line and V-shaped basal mark impressed, black, shining; beset with the usual long bristly hairs; anterior part of frons brown, lightly frosted; rostrum testaceous, with terminal seg- ment and inferior side blackish; eyes blackish; width across eyes, 0.80 mm. Antennae blackish fuscous with base of proximal seg- ment testaceous or stramineous, clothed with short dark brown pubescence, the first two segments with the usual long bristly hairs; segment III (male; fig. 1) very strongly dorso-ventrally flattened, thin, elongate-ovate, or (female) cylindrical and not modified, measurements—( male) I, 90; IT, 30; III, 55; IV, 45 and (female) I, 86; II, 30; III, 55; IV, 18. 1 Towa State College, Ames, Iowa 2 University of Puerto Rico, Mayagues, P. R. 14 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 7 Rhagovelia secluda, n. sp. (male). Fig. 1. Antenna. Fig. 2. Left fore leg (inferior side). Fig. 3. Right hind leg (anterior side showing ventral spines. Fig. 4. Right male paramere. Pronotum produced posteriorly, covering about two-fifths of mesonotum in both male and female, broadly rounded behind, the width across orange band less than twice median length (90:50); mesonotum with uncovered part shorter than pronotum (38:50), sharply obliquely narrowed posteriorly on both sides, with apex fairly wide and feebly rounded, the width across apex much narrower than its width just behind pronotum (54:105); metanotum not visible behind mesonotum but uncovered on each side of posteriorly narrowed sides of mesonotum. Legs (male; figs. 2 & 3) black-fuscous, with basal part of anterior femora, all coxae and all trochanters stramineous or testaceous, pubescent, with the usual long, black, bristly hairs. Anterior legs (fig. 2) with femora subcylindrical, with a thin row of long black hairs on median line of inferior surface, subequal to tibiae in length (98:97); tibiae strongly dilated beyond the basal two-fifths, widest in front of middle, with superior surface 15 BuLLetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 slightly convex, with inferior side broadly longitudinally scooped out on the apical three-fifths (fig. 2), the anterior edge beset with a long brush of moderately long, dense, stiff, brownish hairs; tarsi with first two segments very short, the third moderately long; measurements—femora, 98; tibiae, 96; tarsi I, 4; II, 3; III, 24. Middle legs very long, slender; tarsi III with a deep apical cleft (about five-sevenths of the length of the segment), with the usual fanlike, plumose hairs arising from the bottom of the cleft; measurements—femora, 180; tibiae, 150; tarsi I, 3; II, 80; Ill, 70. Hind legs (fig. 3) with femora moderately swollen, thickest at basal two-fifths, there provided with a long, stout spines (all spines slightly bent outward), which is preceded by four or five very short spines and then followed by nine or ten short spines (each decreasing in size apically), also provided with another row of five to seven spines in front of and parallel to median row (first spine placed opposite long spines—spines short and a little difficult to find); tibiae straight, feebly tapered apically, without a distinct spur at apex, armed beneath with a median longitudinal row of fifteen to eighteen, short, stout spines;—tarsi I, 5; II, 16; III, 31. Male parameres as in fig. 4. Legs (female): Color and bristly hairs as in male; anterior tibiae scarcely widened apically; hind femora very little swollen, sometimes with a short spine near apical fifth of inferior surface. All coxae and trochanters unarmed in both sexes. Measurements (middle legs )—femora 160; tibiae, 140; tarsi I, 4; II, 80; III, 70 and (hind legs)—femora, 140; tibiae, 160;—tarsi I, 5; IJ, 16; IIT, 30. Abdomen (male) slightly tapered posteriorly, with last ter- gite nearly one-half longer than preceding segment; connexiva reflexed obliquely upwards, slowly narrowed posteriorly, not produced at apex, terminating at end of last tergite in a narrow, acute angle. Male parameres fairly large, shaped as in fig. 4. Abdomen in female more tapering posteriorly than in male; last tergite much longer than preceding segment, the last ven- trite deeply roundly excavated on hind margin (slightly more so at middle); connexiva strongly reflexed, with last three seg- ments resting on surface of abdomen but with outer margins not meeting within; last tergite and ends of connexiva provided with dense patches of long black hairs; exposed basal tergites (not concealed by reflexed connexiva ) provided with pubescence, the other tergites almost nude. Macropterous form of both sexes unknown. Length, 3.90 mm. (male) and 4.15 mm. (female); width, 1.35 mm. Type (male) and aLLorype (female), on the road from Con- tanza to Valle Nuevo, Province de la Vega, Dominican Republic, 16 BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Violin pb osebartaly 1956 altitude 6,000 feet, along the margin of a small stream, Dec. 27, 1955. Paratypes; 7 specimens, taken in same school as type, also 3 nymphs. Type in Drake Collection. The antennal and leg characters distinguish this insect at once from other members of the genus; it belongs to the group of Rhagovelia, which have the pronotum (apterous form) pro- duced posteriorly so as to cover around half of the mesonotum. The flattened third antennal segment of the male is peculiar to this species. A NEW CANTACADERID FROM BRASIL (Hemiptera: Tingidae ) By Cari J. Drake’ anp F. PLAUMANN® Up to the present time, the genus Zetekella Drake (1938) has been known only from the genotype (Z. zeteki Drake) collected in Panama. The present paper describes a second species of the genus from southern Brasil. The following notes are intended to supplement the original generic description;— Head moderately long to long, subquadrate, armed with five stout spines—three anterior spines and a pair between these and eyes; no spines between or behind eyes. Bucculae long, parallel- sided, open in front, the ends slightly surpassing apex of head. Rostrum extremely long, extending on venter. Antennae moder- ately long( slender, pubescent; segments I and II very short, with tip of latter barely surpassing apex of head; III longest, straight, very little thinner than others; IV moderately long, pro- vided with longer pubescence. Macropterous form unknown. In size, form and general aspect, the two described species of Zatekella resemble members of the genus Acalypta Westwood (1840). However, the subfamily characters of Cantacaderinae Stal (1873) separate at once Zetekella from Acalypta and other genera of Tinginae. Zetekella pulla, n. sp. BRACHYPTEROUS FORM: Small, ovate, brown with head and pronotum black and collar white, slightly shining, especially pronotum. Female broader than male. Long-winged form un- known. Length, 1.75-2.00 mm.; width, 1.00 mm. 1Towa State College, Ames, Iowa. 2Santa Catarina, Novateutonia, Brasil. 1L7/ BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 ead rugulose, fairly long, considerably produced in front of eyes, with apex extending slightly beyond tip of second antennal segment, armed with five, rather short, stout spines (all spines in front of eyes; median directed forward, the two pairs suberect). Antennae brown, rather short, fairly slender, rather densely pu- bescent, measurements—I, 5; II, 4; III, 31; IV, 16. Antennal tubercles short, stout, rounded at apex, black-fuscous. Rostrum very stout, white-testaceous, very long, with tip reaching second ventrite; laminae black-fuscous, areolate, open behind. Pronotum nearly flat, obliquely narrowed on sides anteriorly, almost trapezoidal in outline, with front margin truncate, uni- carinate, the median carina distinctly elevated, uniseriate, with a few extra areolae near middle; collar biseriate, mostly whitish; paranota not very wide, slightly reflexed, biseriate, the areolae small; calli small, impressed, impunctate; posterior margins sub- truncate (slightly obtusely angulate at middle). Scutellum small, black, exposed... Areolae of collar, paranota and pronotum nearly equal in size, slightly smaller in median carina. Outer margins of pronotum and superior margin of median carina beset with numerous, very short, pale spinulae. Ostiolar orifice with a cir- cular opening. Dorsal surface of pronotum sparsely provided with erect, pale, seta-like pubescence. Legs rather short, moder- ately slender, brown, clothed with short, pale pubescence. Elytra rounded, much wider than pronotum, widest near basal fourth, there distinctly wider than widest part of pronotum (90:55), with inner margins meeting in a straight line down the middle of the abdomen, with outer margins beset with numerous, short, setalike hairs; boundary veins separating subcostal, dis- coidal and sutural ares provided with erect, setalike hairs; dorsal surface with setalike hairs more numerous than on pronotum; costal area moderately wide, the areolae moderately large, hya- line and arranged in regular rows; subcostal area wider than costal, quadriseriate, the areolae nearly as large as in costal area; clavus fused and not distinctly set-off; discoidal area elongate-ovate with apex extending beyond middle of elytra, four areolae deep at middle; sutural area small (short-winged form). Abdomen beneath brown, the sternum black. Length, 1.85-2.00 mm.; width, 0.90-1.05 mm. Type (male) and aLLotyPe (female), Nova Teutonia, Brasil, June, 1955. ParatypEs: 2 specimens, same data as type. Type in Drake Collection. Separated from Z. zeteki Drake by cephalic spines and ely- tral areas as discussed above. 18 BULLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Woll, i5,, IPawtt IL, al)si6) NOTES ON METAMORPHOSES OF THE GIANT SKIPPERS (LEPIDOPTERA; MEGATHYMINAE) AND THE LIFE HISTORY OF AN ARIZONA SPECIES By Joun Apams Comstock The “Giant Skippers,” or “Yucca Borers” are a group of butter- flies that occur in the southern states, particularly in areas where yuccas and agaves are abundant. They are also found in Mexico. Two genera are represented in the subfamily. The first is the genus Aegiale, with a single species,—hesperiaris Walker, occurring in Mexico. The larvae of this species feed within the fleshy leaves of certain century plants (Agaves ), called Maguey by the natives, particularly the species from which pulque and tequila are made. These large, fat ‘grubs’ are highly prized as food by the natives. The choicest bottle of tequila, put up for home consumption, con- tains one of these delicious caterpillars, floating directly under the cork. The second genus of the group is Megathymus, with numerous species recorded from California, Arizona, Texas, Florida and adjacent states, with a few from Mexico. The first species to receive a name was Megathymus yuceae (Boisduval & LeConte ). This was published in 1833 as Eudamus yuccae, and with it appeared the first life history record.' One hundred years later the number of new species or varie- ties in this genus which had been described for boreal America stood at only 13, and the references to early stages and foodplants totaled only 17. In a group that is as intriguing as this, it seems strange that forty-three years had to pass (1833 to 1876) before any addi- tional information was published on life histories. It was not until 1876 that C. V. Riley published his first two papers on Megathymus yuccae,? and laid the groundwork for an under- standing of the developmental phenomena of that large group within the genus which are yucca borers. The past twenty-one years have added 10 or more species or races, and the references in the literature to life histories, food- 1 Lep. Am. Sept. pl. 70. 1833 2Trans, Acad. Sci. St. Louis. pp. 323-344. 1876, and Highth Missouri Rep. pp. 168-183. 1876. 19 BuLLeTIn, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 plants and habits have totaled 27, as may be noted in the bibli- ography supplementing this paper. Possibly this list may be in- creased by some obscure references that have escaped our notice. There was another segment of this genus, feeders in the fleshy leaves of agaves, that had to wait a much longer time before the secrets of their childhood were disclosed. A hint had been given in 1912, when Henry Skinner published Megathymus stephensi,' and quoted Ricksecker that “it feeds on Agave deserti. However, no actual account of the life cycle of any agave feeder saw the light of day until the writer, in association with Commander Charles M. Dammers of Riverside, California, pub- lished and illustrated the metamorphosis of M. stephensi in 1934," just one hundred and one years after the first megathymid was described. The circumstances associated with the first finding of the larva of stephensi may be of some interest to California lepidopterists. It had long been surmised by local collectors that some inti- mate association must exist between Agave deserti and Mega- thymus stephensi, since the two were always found in the same territory. Early in October of 1932 I decided to make an attempt to solve the problem, and, taking advantage of a short vacation period, my wife and I left for the desert on October 8. Our planned destination was “La Puerta” in the lower end of Mason Valley, San Diego County, a region that had been named by the veteran naturalist, Frank Stephens, who had made it famous in zoological circles by the many records of mammals, birds, reptiles and insects which he had collected there. Our route led by way of Julian, down the Banner grade to the San Felipe junction of the old: Butterfield stage road leading toward Box Canyon. On reaching Julian we ran into rain, which increased to the point where the Banner grade, then unsurfaced, became a mud toboggan. About a third of the way down we skidded into an upcoming car, which ripped off our left fender and upset our equanimity. Then back to Julian for an analysis of damage, which proved to be slight in comparison with the jolt to our nervous systems. Our ardor was not unduly damaged. We were urged on by the tradition that “it never really rains in Mason Valley.” 3Ent. News. XXIII: (3) pp. 126-127. 1912. 4 Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 33: (2) pp. 79-86. 1934. 20 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Down the grade our progress was smooth, as would be ex- pected on a mud toboggan. In the lower altitude of the junction we expected a let-up in the downpour, but no; still came the rain, and the old Butterfield wagon tracks looked the consistency of liquid butter. There was no turning back here. The vision of a sunny Mason Valley lured us on. The windshield-wiper groaned along in its effort to maintain visibility. After topping the ridge at the south- eastern end of San Felipe Valley, we noted a small dry lake bed, with surrounding hills that were well covered with agave. Here was a good place to begin operations, rather than risk the Box Canyon. Rain or no rain, we must make a dissection of an agave, from crown to root. That is no easy task, with water trickling and tickling down one’s back, and serrated century-plant leaves saw- ing at one’s knees. The stalk took time, with no results. The fleshy leaves were tough, and hard to remove,—but what was that dark stain at the base of one of them! A cavity within, and — Eureka! at last, a plump and luscious grub; a chamber, and an antechamber with an opaque window. Now we knew how to search for the hidden treasure. The elemental forces now opened a bombardment of thunder and lightning, and research was over for the day. A soaked and sloshing return was made to camp, and it became evident that we would have to make the best of it that night, holed up in cramped positions in the car. But, what mattered the deluge! I had what was presumably the larva of stephensi, and soon its secrets could be published — the story poured forth for the benefit of the many thirsty lepi- dopterists, so eager to soak up information, and so desirous of seeing their cabinets brimming over with beautiful reared series of megathymids. It takes a lot to dampen the enthusiasm of an entomologist, but that lot fell that night, to the accompaniment of vivid flashes, and the almost continuous roll of thunder. Seven inches of rain poured down on one of the most arid spots in California. We bedded down in a car, located on the edge of a dry lake bed. The morning light found us, an island in an inland sea, with waters lapping at the running boards. We waded ashore to cut creosote bush, and crammed it under the wheels, in an effort to obtain traction, but to no avail. Start- ing the car succeeded only in grinding deeper into the mud. “The rain was over and gone.” The only thing to do was walk back over the way we came. Normal California desert sunshine mak BULLETIN, So. CAuurF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 had returned, the “time of the singing of birds had come,” and the six or seven-mile walk along the wash that had been a road was not a hardship. In the first ranch house we encountered, a hospitable elderly gentleman helped to raise the morale of Mrs. Comstock, while I trudged on to a not very distant telephone. A call to Julian brought a well equipped truck, with power winch and steel cable, which pulled us out of the mud instanter. Thus ended the adventure phase of our expedition. All that remained to complete the picture was for our team, (Comstock and Dammers ) to work out the details, take the neces- sary photographs, make the paintings, develop certain refine- ments in collecting and rearing methods, and finally to publish the account which I have previously cited. Q ° % Q Bea This past summer, with the help of Dr. Francis X. Williams, [ had the opportunity of adding another chapter to the life cycle story of the agave feeders. We two were camped in Miller Canyon, one of three well- known collecting spots at the eastern end of the Huachuca Mountains of southern Arizona, not far from the old townsite of Palmerlee. A short distance to the north was Carr Canyon, and beyond it, Ramsay Canyon. These are historic sites to the lepidopterist, for there, in the early days, worked Poling, Biedermann, and others gathering specimens which were destined to find their way into important collections, many of them to be recorded as types, or in type series. On July 26, while I was polishing up field notes and making sketches, Dr. Williams scouted the nearby terrain. With his trained eye, and keen insight into the ways of insects, he turned up several larvae of various genera, that were new to us. Some of these will later be recorded in life history papers. One, how- ever, was the larva of an agave feeding megathymid. This ‘find’ resulted in an agave reconnaissance, from which we returned with a good series of larvae, and much valuable data. The specimens thus secured were finally carried to maturity and a good series of imagos were ready for determination. They proved to be Megathymus evansi Freeman, a species described in 1950,°, the type locality being Ramsay Canyon. The name has been considerably knocked about of late, a veritable shuttle-cock of the battledorean systematists. > Field & Laboratory. XVIII: (4) p. 144. 1950. De BULLETIN, So. CALiF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Bell and dosPassos maintain’, as does also Freeman, that evansi is a valid species. Stallings and Turner hold that it is a synonym of aryxna Dyar,’ and there is rumor that a ruling may be asked of the International Commission to settle the matter. It would take pages to review all the aspects of this contro- versy. For the present, we feel that Ernest L. Bell et al have a little better logic in their contention, and we will continue to call Freeman's Ramsay Canyon species Megathymus evansi. % Seg % co od Lire History Notes on Megathymus evansi Freeman The author of this species, published (1951), an interesting note on the method of oviposition of M. evansi, and recorded the foodplant as Agave Parryi Engelmann.* He reported seeing a female “flip two eggs into one of the plants.” We had previously recorded much the same action by a female M. stephensi while in captivity, in our published record of that species. Apparently this practice is common to most, if not all of the agave feeders. The young larvae crawl to the tip of a leaf, and burrow in. They then gradually tunnel down to a final position near the base of the leaf, excavate a roomy chamber, and construct a minute opening, which is kept sealed most of the time. In the case of evansi, this opening or window is usually on the upper surface of the leaf, but a few were found on the under surfaces. The opening is not as easily observed with this species as is the case with M. stephensi. Mature Larva oF M. evansi Length, fully extended, 38 mm. Greatest width, 8 mm. Cylindrical, and grub like in appearance. It is widest through the sixth to ninth segments, thence tapering gradually towards the head, and more acutely to the cauda. Head: rugose, small, (width 3 mm. ), reddish brown, with the front slightly darker. Ocelli concolorous with the face. Mandibles, black. The entire head is covered with short, light yellow pile. Body: ground color, light plum-olive, but appearing almost ®Am. Mus. Novitat. No. 1700. pp. 1-5. 19 7 Lepidopt. News. 8: (3 & 4), pp. 77-87. 1 8 Wield & Lab. 19: (1), p. 28. 1951. 23 Buntvetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 8 Larva and pupa of Megathymus evansi Freeman. Enlarged approximately X. approximately 2%. A. Larva, dorsal aspect. B. Pupa, dorsal aspect. C. Pupa, ventral aspect. Reproduced from painting by the author white because of the powdery covering. There is a black scutel- lum on the first cervical segment. This is cleft on the mid-dorsal line, dividing it into two elements. A narrow mid-dorsal pulsating dull green line is present, which becomes more conspicuous caudally. The caudal tip is blackish brown. Spiracles narrowly rimmed with black. Legs small, and slightly yellower than body, but with darker tips. Prolegs and anal prolegs concolorous with body. Crochets very light olive-brown. Minute yellowish hairs are thickly scattered over the body. The larval burrow and hinged opening are the same as we recorded for Megathymus stephensi, and the chamber is lined with the same type of flocculent white powder shortly before pupation. BULLETIN, So. Cautir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PUPA. Length, 33 mm, Greatest width, 8 mm. The pupa is similar in general appearance, and has the same habits as that of M. stephensi. The essential differences are that it lacks the mid-dorsal dull green line, and the head is relatively narrower and more rounded. When the white powder is removed the segmental lines are distinguishable, and the body ground color is revealed to be a light brown or tan, with a still lighter shade on the wing cases. Spiracles concolorous with the body. Cremaster, dark brown at the tip, ending in a triangular plate, devoid of hooks. On superficial examination, the body appears to be entirely devoid of pile, but magnification brings out the presence of a sparse covering of minute white hairs. The larva and pupa of M. evansi are illustrated on Plate 8. A comparison of this plate with the photographs of the larva of M. stephensi demonstrates the very considerable difference between the two species. The robust larva of stephensi, with its acute tapering at the last caudal segments will alone put it in a different category. In my opinion, Megathymus stephensi is a distinct species, with no close relationship to neumoegeni. M. evansi, on the other hand, may be a branch in the neumoegeni family tree. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am particularly indebted to Dr. H. Avery Freeman, of Gar- land, Texas, and Don B. Stallings, of Caldwell, Kansas, for their generosity in supplying reprints of their papers and other cour- tesies. Without the skilled assistance of Dr. Francis X. Williams, of La Mesa, California, I would not have been able to obtain the Miller Canyon material which prompted this study. Dr. Hilde- garde Howard has kindly checked the manuscript, and suggested certain helpful alterations. A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF LIFE HISTORY AND FOODPLANT RECORDS IN THE GENUS MEGATHYMUS Megathymus yuccae ( Boisduval & LeConte ) 1833 1833. Larva; pupa. Boisduval & LeConte. Hist. Lepid. N. A., pl. 70. colored figures. 1876. Larva; pupa. Riley, C. V., Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, pp. 323- 344. figures. 1876. Egg; larva; pupa; habits; foodpl. Riley. 8th Missouri Rep., pp. 168- 183. figures. 1877. Life history notes. Riley. 9th Missouri Rep. p. 129. 25 ButLetin, So. Cate. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol, SpybanteleeooG 1886. Life history notes. French. (Quotes Riley) Butterfl: East U. S., p. 389. figures. 1898. Egg: larva; pupa; foodpl. Holland, W. J. (after Riley) Butterfl. - Book. (1) fig. 182. 1912. Egg; larva; pupa; habits; foodpl. Barnes & McDunnough. Cont. 1916. Pupa. Mosher, Edna. Bull. Sta. Lab. Nat. Hist. Ill. XII: (2) 80. 1917. Notes. Bonniwell, J. G. “Lepidoptera.” 2: pp. 108-109. 1931. Egg; larva; pupa. Holland. Butterfl. Book, rev. figs. 196-198. 1952. Foodpl. Freeman, H. A. Field & Laborat. XX: (1) p. 31. Yucca smalliana Fern. Yucca flaccida Haw. M. yuccae, California race Pnavajo Skinner. 1911 1934. Ege: larva; pupa; habits; foodpl. Comstock, John A. & Charles M. Dammers. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 33: (2) pp. 87-92. pls. 31-35, Yucca brevifolia Engelm,. Yucca mohavensis Sarg. M. yuccae stallingsi Freeman, 1951 1951. Habits; foodpl. Freeman. So. Method. Univ. Studies. No. 6. Ecol. & Syst. S. of the Hesperioidea of Texas. pp. 61-62. Yucca arkansana Trel. M. yuccae buchholzi Freeman. 1952 1952. Foodpl. Freeman. Field & Lab. So. Method. Univ. XX: (1) p. 31. Yucca gloriosa Linn. M. yuccae arizonae Tinkham. 1954 1954. Egg: larva; pupa: habits; foodpl. Tinkham, E. R. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 53: (2) pp. 75-87. pls. 15-20. Yucca elata Engelm. Yucca Thornberi McKelvey. M. cofaqui (Strecker) 1876 1876. Larva. Strecker, H. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. p. 148. 1917. Larval habits; “tent.” Bonniwell. “Lepidoptera” 2: pp. 108-109. 1917. Pupal case. Skinner. Ent. News XXVIII: (5) p. 2 1954. Habits; “tent.” Harris, Lucien Jr. Lepid. News. 8: p. Q B25 (6) pp. 153-162. 1955. Foodpl. Freeman. Am. Mus. Novit. No. 1711. 4, Yucca oloifolia Linn M. harrisi Freeman. 1955 1954. Egg; larva; pupa; habits; foodpl. (as M. cofaqui) Harris. Lep. News. 8: (6) pp. 153-162. 1955. Foodpl. Freeman. Am. Mus. .Novit. No. 1711. p. 4. Yucca filamentosa Linn. Mf. streckeri (Skinner) 1895 1900. Oviposition. Oslar, E. J. Ent. News. XI: (6) p. 495. 1930. Egg; young larva; habits. Leussler, R. A. Ent. News. 41: (1) pp. 7-9. Yucca sp. M. texana (texanus) Barnes & McDunnough. 1912 1951. Foodpl. Freeman. So. Method. Univ. Studies. No. 6. Ecol. & Syst. S. of the Hesper. of Texas. p. 62. Yucca glauca Nutt. M. smithi Druce. 1951. Foodpl. Freeman. Field & Lab. 19: p. 32. This and other records of smithi for the U. S. are based on misidentification of specimens, later determined as M. maculosus. 26 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 M. maculosus Freeman. 1955 1955. Egg; larva; pupa; habits; foodpl. Freeman. Am. Mus. Novit. No. 1711. March. pp. 12-14. Manfreda maculosa Hooker M. neumoegeni Edwards. 1882 1951. Oviposition; larva; pupa; foodpl. Freeman. Field & Lab. 19: (1) pp. 26-28. 1954. Foodpl. Stallings, Don B., & J. R. Turner. Lep. News. 8: (3 & 4) p. 79. Agave Couesii Engelm. Agave Palmeri Engelm. Agave chrysantha Peebles. M. stephensi Skinner. 1912 1905. Egg; foodpl. (as neumoegeni) erroneous statements. Wright. W. G. Butt. W. Coast. p. 255. 1912. Foodpl. Skinner (crediting Ricksecker) Ent. News. XXIII: (3) 1D Re 1934. Egg; larva; pupa; foodpl. Comstock & Dammers. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 33: (2) pp. 79-86. pls. 26-30. 1951. Brief note. Freeman. Field & Lab. 19: p. 30. 1954. Brief note. Tinkham. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 53: (2) p. 79. Agave Deserti Engelm. M. evansi Freeman. 1950 1951. Oviposition; foodpl. Freeman. Field & Lab. 19: (1) p. 28. Agave Parryi Engelm. M. baueri Stallings & Turner. 1954 1954. Larval habits; foodpl. Stallings & Turner. Lep. News. 8: (3 & 4) p. 80. Agave Parryi Engelm. M. chisosensis Freeman. 1952 1952. Pupa; habits; foodpl. Freeman. Am. Mus. Novit. No. 1598. Oct. pp. 1-4. ; 1955. Foodpl. Freeman. (a correction). Am. Mus. Novit. No. 1711. p. 8. Agave scabra LamDyck. M. mcalpinei Freeman. 1955 1955. Habits; larva; pupa; foodpl. Freeman. Am. Mus. Novit. No. 1711. March. pp. 8-9. Agave sp. M. polingi Skinner. 1905 1951. Foodpl; notes. Freeman. Field & Lab. 19: p. 29. Agave Palmeri Engelm. M. polingi mariae Barnes & Benjamin. 1924 1931. Metamorphosis. Bonniwell. Ann. Carn. Mus. 20: (2) pp. 264-265. 1944. Brief note; foodpl. Tinkham. Can. Ent. 76: (1) p. 18. 1951. Habits; foodpl. Freeman. So. Method. Studies, No. 6. p. 63. 1954. Brief note. Tinkham. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 53: (2) p. 75 and p. 86. Agave lechuguilla Torrey. IVA. BuLLETIN, So. CaAuir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 A NEW SPECIES OF STEGOCEPHALUS (Amphipoda Gammaridea) FROM CALIFORNIA By D. E. Hurry Allan Hancock Foundation University of Southern California® The species here described was taken amongst collections made by the research vessel VeLERO ILI. The Family Stegocepha- lidae has not been recorded previously from the West Coast of America south of Kyska Harbor and Point Barrow, Alaska (Shoemaker, 1930). I am greatly indebted to Captain Allan Hancock and the Han- cock Foundation for the opportunity to work on this material. This study has been carried out during the tenure of a Research Fellowship from the Hancock Foundation and a Fulbright Re- search Scholarship. Stegocephalus hancocki, new species. (Plates 9-11) DESCRIPTION OF FEMALE: Body tumid, head small, eyes absent, rostrum not strongly developed. First body segment twice length of head, as long as 2nd and 3rd segments combined. ANTENNA |: Slightly shorter than 2nd; 2nd and 3rd peduncle segments % length Ist; flagellum slightly longer than peduncle, of 6 long segments, the Ist as long as last 2 peduncle segments; accessory flagellum of 1 cylindrical segment which is more than % length Ist flagellar segment. ANTENNA 2: Flagellum of 7 segments, shorter than peduncle; 4th and 5th peduncle segments subequal, much longer than 3rd. Upper Lip: Asymmetrically bilobed. EpistoMeE: Distinguished from upper lip only by very shallow groove. Lower Lip: Inner lobes absent, outer lobes produced on inner margin distally in distinct short toothed process. MaAnpIsBLeEs: Left finely denticulate, as is accessory article; right strongly denticulate, lacks accessory. *Allen Hancock Foundation Contribution No. 168 28 BuLLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 9 Stegocephalus hancocki, n. sp. Female. A.—Adult female. B.—Head with antennae removed to show small shal- low groove separating epistome and upper lip. C.—Antenna 1. D.—Antenna 2. E.—Upper lip. F.—Maxilliped (slightly distorted). G.—Maxilliped outer plate, inner distal angle. H.—Maxilliped inner plate. I.—Mazxilliped dactylos. J.—Lower lip. K.—Lower lip, distal angle. L.—Maxilla 1. M.—Maxilla 2. N.—Left mandible. O.—Right mandible. 29 Butcerin, So. Cau. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Maxitta 1: Inner plate much shorter and broader than outer, distally truncate margin has 11 plumose setae. Outer plate has 9 spines; palp is barely shorter, is of one segment, has 4 plumose setae distally, narrows a little towards end. Maxiiia 2: Inner plate short, broad, has double row of finely plumose setae; outer apart, narrow, with about 7 spine-setae on end. \Maxituirep: Inner plate much shorter than outer, subrect- angular, has about 6 fine setae distally, 7-8 long setae on inner margin. Outer plate large, somewhat subrectangular, reaches along palp dactylos, has several very fine setae on inner margin distally, 4 together on angle. Last 3 segments of palp subequal; dactylos long and sharp, with fine setae about %. GnatHorop 1: Simple, sideplate subtriangular and distally acute, slightly shorter than sideplate of Gn. 2. Second segment slightly longer than next 3, 3rd and 4th subequal, 5th slightly longer, 6th still longer, 7th 4 length 6th. All strongly setose, some of setae plumose. GnatHopop 2: Simple. Sideplate very long and narrow, great- est width & length, anterodistally rounded. Basos proximally nar- rowed and slightly angled, as long as next 3 segments; 3rd 2/5 basos length; 4th and 5th subequal and % basos; 6th % basos and distally narrowing; 7th not 2 length 6th. All strongly setose pos- teriorly. Preraropop |: Sideplate narrow, like 2nd. Third segment % length 2nd; 4th % 2nd and slightly produced down over 5th anterodistally; 5th narrower, # 2nd; 6th as long as 4th, narrower; 7th not 2 as long as 6th; all have fine spines or setae posteriorly, a few setae anteriorly; 6th has 3 setae posteriorly. Prrareopop 2: Similar except for sideplate which is more or less subtriangular, shallowly excavate posteriorly. Margins of all sideplates somewhat imbricated. PeraEopop 3: Very long, longer than 4 and 5, like them except for sideplate and basos. Sideplate subsquare, fits into excava- tion of 2nd which partially covers it. Basos more than % as long again, not expanded, longer than next 3 segments; 3rd segment only about 1/6 length 2nd; 4th little more than ¥ as long, antero- distally produced downwards a little over 5th; 5th slightly shorter than 4th, narrower; 6th almost % basos length, slender; dactylos 6th, also slender. Segments have a few setae anteriorly, 2nd and 3rd have a few spines and setae posterodistally, 4th to 6th more strongly armed with spines and setae, some of spines having finely-combed margins. 30 BULLETIN, So. CALirF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 10 PLATE 2. Stegocephalus hancocki, n. sp. A.—Gnathopod 1. B.—Gnathopod 1, propod and dactylos. C.—Spine from Gnathopod 1, propod inner margin. D.—Gnathopod 2. E.—Peraeopod 1. F.—Peraeopod 2, sideplate only. G.—Peraeopod 3, with enlarged propod spine. H.—Telson. BuLLeTIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Perarorop 4: Sideplate subrectangular, width % length; length % basos; basos ovate-rectangular, lateral margins more or less parallel and almost naked, width little more than 4 length. Other- wise like pr. 3. Preraropop 5: Sideplate subrectangular, not quite as wide as long; % basos length; basos expanded ovately, width approaching * length, much longer than sideplate, anterior margin has a few short spines; posterior is finely serrate with very fine setae; pos- terodistally produced more than !% along 4th segment in rounded lobe with only slightest suggestion of an acute angle. More strongly spined and setose anteriorly than pr. 3. PLEON SEGMENTS: Dorsally normal; keel absent. First epim- eral plate subtriangular with about 4 short spines anteriorly. Second subrectangular, anterior angle rounded, about 6 spine- setae anteroventrally. Third subrectangular, wider than deep; ventral margin has several spine-setae anteriorly; posterior mar- gin is oblique and widest distally; posterodistal angle rounded with about 9 serrations on rounded angle, a minute seta to each serration. Uropops: Successively shorter. First, rami subequal, about % peduncle length, about 2 and 7 spines on dorsal margins which are finely denticulate; peduncle is strongly spined on ventral margin and both dorsal margins. Second, rami slightly longer than peduncle, inner slightly longer than outer; 3 and 2 spines on one, about 6 on other, the margins finely denticulate; the peduncle margins with 14 and 3 spines. Third, rami lanceolate, inner longer than outer, outer longer than peduncle; 1 and 3 spines, possibly more, on rami; none on peduncle; rami margins finely denticulate. TELSON: Cleft between ” and %, subtriangular, 2 fine setae on surface of each lobe just above end of cleft. Reaches % along uropod 3 peduncle. Mae: Unknown. Tyre: Holotype slide, AHF No. 4113, female, length 5% mm., depth 2% mm., width 1% mm. TypE Locauiry: Station 1223-41, San Pedro Channel, 12 mi. SW of Newport, in area 33° 27’ 00” — 33° 27’ 20”N, 118° 02’ 20” — 118° 02’ 35” W, depth 225 to 250 fathoms, bottom green sand and mud. Jan. 25, 1941. MATERIAL EXAMINED: The type. 32 BULLETIN, So. Cautir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 | PLATE 11 Stegocephalus hancocki, n. sp. A.—Peraeopod 4, anterior segments. B.—Peraeopod 5. C.—Epimeral plates with enlargement of distal angle of 3rd. D.—Uropod 1. E.—Uropod 2. F.—Uropod 3. Remarks: Although close to Stegocephalus inflatus Kroyer, the following differences may be noted. The third epimeral plate in S. inflatus is ventrally serrate with the posterodistal angle sharp and even slightly produced posteriorly; here it is rounded and serrate. S. inflatus is more strongly spined on the inner plate of 33 BuLLeTIN, So. CAuie,. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 the Ist maxillae and the maxilliped palps. There are fewer and longer flagellar segments to the antennae of S. hancocki; the 2nd peraeopod sideplate is distinct in shape; and the 2nd segments of the 4th and 5th peraeopods round posterodistally. The spination of the uropods, especially that of the 3rd, differs from S. inflatus as figured by Sars. Whilst most of these points could possibly fall within the normal range of variation in S. inflatus, the shape of the 3rd epimeral plate and, to a lesser extent, that of the 4th and 5th peraeopods adequately distinguish this species. It gives me considerable pleasure to name this species for Captain Allan Hancock. LITERATURE CITED Shoemaker, C. R. 1930. The Amphipoda of the Cheticamp Expedition of 1917. Contr. Canadian Biol., n.s. 5( 10) :219-359, text figs. 1-54. Sars, G. O. 1895. An account of the Crustacea of Norway. ( Plates.) Christiania and Copenhagen. 34 BuLuLeTiIn, So. CatirF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 TWO RARE AMPHIPODS FROM CALIFORNIA Wi NOTES ON THE CENUS ATYLUS* By J. LAuRENS BARNARD Dept. of Biology, University of Southern California A small collection of gammaridean amphipods made by Mr. W. K. Emerson and the writer at Albion, California, during the summer of 1949, revealed the presence of a species new to science and a rare species, not reported on since 1871. The writer is indebted to the staff of the Allan Hancock Foundation for support and equipment and to Mr. H. W. Clark of Pacific Union College for use of facilities at the Mendocino Biological Field Station, Albion, California. Family PLEUSTIDAE Parapleustes bairdi ( Boeck ) (Plate 12) Paramphitoé Bairdi Boeck 1871, pp. 45-46, 50, pl. 1, fig. 3. Neopleustes bairdi, Stebbing 1906, vol. 21, pp. 314-315. DESCRIPTION OF MALE.—Lateral lobes of head asymmetrically produced, rostrum blunt, short. Eyes nearly round, large. Antenna | longer than 2, almost three-fifths the length of the animal, articles of peduncle successively shorter, flagellum with about 36 articles, alternately armed with aesthetascs. Accessory flagellum rudimentary. Antenna 2: article 5 of peduncle longer than 4, flagellum with about 28 articles. Mandible: molar weak, rather narrow, spine row with about 15 spines, accessory plate well developed in left mandible, ab- sent in right; article 3 of palp slightly longer than 2. Maxilla 1: inner plate with a single, apical seta, outer plate with 9 spines, article 2 of palp apex armed with 7 spinules and several setae. Maxilla 2: inner edge of inner plate with a strong seta, apices of both lobes setose. Maxilliped: inner plate reaching to base of palp article 1, apex broadly truncated, armed medially with 4 or 5 short, peg- shaped spinules, laterally with 2 setae, outer plate reaching be- yond end of palp article 1, armed on inner edge and apex with * Contribution no. 106 from the Allan Hancock Foundation. 35 BuLLeTin, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 short setae. Palp typical, stout, lacking any coniform projection on article 3 Gnathopod 1: lower posterior corner of coxa with a small tooth, posterior edge with a single spine, anterodistal end of article 2 produced downward, article 3 produced anteriorly, article 4 as long as 5, distal posterior end with a tooth, article 5 produced into a posterior setose lobe; article 6 large, palm oblique, convex, with an ill-defined, narrow tooth about one third of the distance from the finger hinge, palm lined with spinules, defined posteriorly by 2 groups of spines and a fascicle of setae; article 7 long, curved, fitting palm. Gnathopod 2 slightly larger than 1, identical except for the shape of the coxa and the presence of 3 spines on its posterior edge. Peraeopod | longer than 2, coxa 3 with a tooth and 3 spines, coxa 4 without tooth or spines. Peraeopods 3-5 successively slightly longer, similar, posterior edges of second articles minutely serrated. Pleopods with 2 cleft spines on first article of inner ramus. Uropods extending the same distance posteriorward, rami strongly spinulated, apices of rami of first 2 pairs armed with spines. Uropod 1: inner ramus shorter than peduncle, outer ramus slightly shorter than inner. Uropod 2: inner ramus much longer than peduncle, outer ramus three fourths as long as inner. Uropod 3: inner ramus twice as long as peduncle, outer ramus two thirds es long as inner, apices of rami unarmed. Telson linguiform. Body segments smooth, not carinated. Pleon segment 3: pos- terior edge of epimera slightly convex, lower posterior corner quadrate, slightly produced. MATERIAL EXAMINED.—A single male, 5.5 mm. in length, Em- erson-Barnard Station No. 26, Cormorant Cove, Albion Bay, algae at water level, minus 0.9 tide, June 30, 1949. Remarks.—This is the second record of this species, Boeck recording it from San Francisco, California, in 1871. It differs from Parapleustes assimilis (Sars) by the strongly developed hands of the gnathopods. From Parapleustes gracilis Buchholz it differs by the shape of the telson and the larger gnathopods. Sexton (1909, pp. 852-855, pl. 80, figs. 1-7) redescribed one of 36 BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 12 Parapleustes bairdi (Boeck). Male, 5.5 mm. Fig. a, gnathopod 1; b, lower lip; c, accessory flagellum; d, coxa 2; e, head; f, maxilla 2; g, spine row and molar of mandible; h, coxa 4; i, maxilla 1; j, peraeopod 1; k, peraeo- pod 4; 1, telson; m, maxilliped; n, uropod 1; 0, uropod 2; p, uropod 3; q, mandible; r, pleon segment 3. ButLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Buchholz type specimens of P. gracilis and also had the type specimens of “Paramphithoé brevicornis Sars.” She compared them and found they were alike except for the fact that in Sars’ material the first antennae were shorter and the second article of the peduncle of antenna 1 was as long as article 1. Sexton attributed these differences to age. The present single specimen differs from Sexton's description of P. gracilis by the short second article of antenna 1 peduncle, by the more numerous articles of the antennal flagella, by the greater number of spines in the spine row of the mandible (more than double the number) and by the apical armature of the inner plate of the maxilliped (which in Sexton’s figures had 2 small teeth and 2 setae). From Paramphitoé brevicornis Sars the present specimen differs by the larger gnathopods, by the shape of the telson and by the longer antennae. Sexton stated that the telson of P. gracilis was similar to that figured by Sars for P. brevicornis (in which the lateral apical edges are beveled ) Because the present specimen is a male (while all observa- tions on P. gracilis have been on females) it is possible that it might belong to that species. However, the mouthpart armature is better developed than in Sexton’s material and the flagellar articles are more numerous, indicating the specimen is more mature. If so, the short second peduncular article of antenna 1 is unlike adult P. gracilis and this would be a valid difference. Neopleustes derzhavini Gurjanova (1938, p. 317) is very close to P. bairdi, a particular point of resemblance being the small conical processes on the palms of the gnathopods. However, the sixth articles are smaller than the respective coxae while in P. bairdi they are as large or larger. In gnathopod size, N. derz- havini resembles P. pugettensis (Dana), see Bamard, 1952, p 12. It is possible that Parapleustes gracilis is a synonym of P. pugettensis but comparative materials will be needed to decide this question. Family ATYLIDAE Genus ATYLUS Leach, new synonymy Atylus Leach 1815, Zool. Misc., vol. 2, p. 21. Nototropis Costa 1853, Rend. Soc! Reale Borbonica, n. s., vol. 2, pp. 170, 178. Atylus levidensus new species (Plates 13-14) DESCRIPTION OF MALE.—Head about as long as first 3 body segments (including rostrum ), rostrum well developed, subacute, lateral lobes of head subacutely produced, eyes small, oval. 38 BuxLueTin, So. Carir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 13 Atylus levidensus, n. sp. Male, 6.5 mm. Fig. a, head; b, peraeopod 4, part; c, uropod 1; d, peraeopod 5; e, gnathopod 1; f, coxa 2; g, coxa 5; h, coxa 3; i, pleon segments 2-6, telson not shown; j, peraeopod 2. 39 BuLLetin, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Both pairs of antennae reaching about the same length, short, article 1 slightly longer than 2, article 3 short, not longer than 2 basal segments of flagellum. Flagellum about as long as ped- uncle, composed of 12 articles and a small apical rudiment, accessory flagellum rudimentary. Antenna 2: article 5 longer than 4, flagellum about as long as article 5, composed of 6 articles and a small apical rudiment. Upper lip evenly rounded below. Mandible: molar moderately well developed, accessory plate strong, spine row with 9 echinulate spines; palp slender, article 3 longer than 2, with 3 setae at apex of article 3, otherwise with- out setae. Lower lip without inner lobes. Maxilla 1: inner plate with oblique apex, armed with 3 setae, outer plate with 10 spines, article 2 of palp apex armed with 5 spines, the spines stout on right palp, slender on left palp, apex of palp produced into acute tooth at outer edge, medial to the outermost spine. Maxilla 2 with a strong, plumose seta on inner edge of inner plate; outer plate much broader than inner. Maxilliped: apex of inner plate truncated, armed with 3 stout spines and 5-6 setae; outer plate reaching to end of palp article 2, inner edge and apex lined with stout spines; palp slender, article 4 produced into a spine apically. Gnathopod 1: article 6 longer than 5, not tumid, palm oblique, defined by a pair of spines, article 7 fitting palm. Gnathopod 2 slightly longer than 1, article 6 longer than 5, longer and more slender than in gnathopod 1. Peraeopods | and 2 equal in size. Peraeopod 1, coxa produced anteriorly and downward into an acute lobe, articles 3 and 5 short, subequal in length, articles 4 and 6 long, equal in length. Peraeopod 2: coxa trapezoidal in outline. Peraeopods 3 and 5 similar in structure except that peraeopod 3 is shorter and article 2 is not expanded as in peraeopod 5. Per- aeopod 4 longer than 5, article 4 elongated, as long as articles 4 and 5 of peraeopod 5 combined. All gills simple, not pleated. Uropod 1 reaching beyond uropods 2 end 3, inner ramus longer than outer, nearly as long as peduncle. Uropod 2: inner ramus longer than peduncle, longer than outer ramus. 40 BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 PLATE 14 Atylus levidensus, n. sp. Male, 6.5 mm. Fig. a, maxilla 2; b, end of gnatho- pod 2; c, accessory flagellum; d, lower lip; e, inner plate, maxilla 1, part; f, maxilla 1; g, upper lip; h, telson; i, maxilliped; j, uropod 2; k, uropod 3; 1, mandible. 4] BuLLeTIN, So. CaLtirF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Uropod 3: rami short, stout, lanceolate. Telson slender, deeply cleft, apices obliquely truncated, each armed with a stout spine and a setule. All pleon segments carinate middorsally, each ending acutely above the following segment, segments 5-6 (fused) with a strong, upturned tooth. Pleon segment 3: inferoposterior angle of epi- mera slightly produced, armed with a spine, the anterior part of the lower edge produced downward strongly, rounded, armed with spinules. Peraeon segments slightly carinate middorsally, not ending acutely above following segments. FemMALE.—Not known. Ho.torype.—AHF No. 4916, 7.5 mm. in length, male. Type LocaLiry.—Puget Sound, August 9, 1949, coll. Dr. J. L. Mohr. MATERIAL EXAMINED.—The type and one male specimen, 6.5 mm. long from Emerson-Barnard Station No. 11, Salmon Point, California, south of Albion Bay, tide pool, minus 1.3 tide, June 13, 1949. Remarks.—This species differs in several respects from the type species of the genus, Atylus carinatus (Fabricius): (1), the slender and poorly setose third palp article of the mandible; (2), the poorly setose inner plate of maxilla 1; (3), the short rami of uropod 3. Easily visible differences of the new species are the following: (4), lack of well defined carinae on the per- aeon segments; (5), the sharp tooth or carina on pleon segments 5-6; (6), the shape of pleon segment 3, epimera; (7), shape of third coxa. This species appears to be rather rare in the California, Ore- gon and Washington intertidal. The writer has examined several score samples from these areas with a yield of only 2 specimens. REMARKS ON THE GENERA ATYLUS AND NOTOTROPIS It would appear that the new species described herein is more closely related to Nototropis collingi Gurjanova (1938, p. 328) by virtue of its short third uropods and slight mandibular palp than to Atylus carinatus. Stebbing (1906, p. 328) distin- guished the two genera by the strong mandibular palp and dor- sally unnotched fourth pleonal segment of Atylus. Nototropis collingi has a poorly notched fourth pleonal segment compared to other species of Nototropis and Atylus levidensus n. sp. lacks this notch. Gurjanova (1951, p. 678) distinguished Atylus from Nototropis additionally by the simple, unpleated gills on all seg- 42 BULLETIN, So. CALiF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 ments while in the latter some gills are strongly pleated. The new species herein combines a slight mandibular palp, an un- notched fourth pleonal segment and unpleated gills, thus trans- cending criteria used to separte the two genera. The close rela- tionship of the new atylid with N. collingi, a Nototropis by defi- nition, as well as the monotypic condition of the genus Atylus leads the writer to believe that the two genera should be fused. Although the notching of pleonal segment 4 still might be used for separation, the writer believes that ornamentation of this type has no value for generic distinction. One need only compare the various expressions of dorsal ornamentation in the genus Noto- tropis, or in Parapleustes the previously discussed genus, to see that such a minor character as the presence or absence of a notch is valueless. The same statement applies to the variation in the gills which may be regarded as adaptive features which rarely indicate broadly diverging lines of evolution. The writer favors the fusion of the genera Atylus and Noto- tropis with the former having priority. LITERATURE CITED Barnard, J. L. 1952. Some Amphipoda from Central California. Wasmann Jour. Biol., 10 (1): 9-36, 9 pls. Boeck, A. 1871. Bidrag til Californiens Amphipodefauna. Vid. Selsk. Forhand., 1871: Sols Ts Ipl. Gurjanova, E. ; 1938. Amphipoda Gammaroidea of Siaukhu Bay and Sudzukhe Bay (Japan Sea). Rept. Japan Sea Hydroboil. Exped., Zool. Inst. Acad. Sci. USSR, 1934, pt. 1, 241-404, 59 figs. (in Russian, Eng. summ. ). 1951. Bokoplavy Morej SSSR i Sopredel’njkh Vod (Amphipoda-Gam- maridea). Akad. Nauk. SSSR, Opred. Faune SSSR, 41: 1-1029. 704 figs. Sexton, E. W. 1909. Notes on some Amphipoda from the north side of the Bay of Biscay. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1909 (2): 848-876, pls. 80-81, figs. 278, 279. Stebbing, T. R. R. 1906. pea npoda. I. Gammaridea. Das Tierreich, 21: i-xxxix and 1-806, 127 figs. 43 BuLLetin, So. Cauie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 A NEW SPECIES OF AMNICOLID SNAIL FROM CHIHUAHUA, MEXICO By Ropserr J. Drake Department of Zoology, University of Arizona (Some results of research with inland mollusks of Northwest Mexico financed by the Penrose Fund of The American Philosophical Society ) The desert region in the northern part of the Mexican states of Chihuahua and Sonora south of New Mexico and Arizona in the United States has a small number of forms of the Amnicolidae living in isolated springs and temporary pond habitats. Undoubt- edly these very small snails represent part of a relict aquatic fauna formerly more extensive and populous (see Pilsbry 1895, 1928, 1935; Pilsbry and Ferriss 1906, 1909; Smith 1953). Discussion of the region where the present new species was discovered and circumstances of its collection has been given previously (Drake 1953). Drs. Harald A. Rehder and Joseph P. E. Morrison of the U. S. National Museum, Dr. Leo G. Hertlein and Mr. Allyn G. Smith of the California Academy of Sciences, and Dr. Wendell O. Gregg of Los Angeles, California, were very helpful to study of the undescribed form which is named in honor of an advisor and associate of nineteen years. Mrs. Margaret M. Hanna kindly made the drawing of the holotype. Lyrodes hertleini, new species (Plate 15) Diacnosis: An amnicolid species that seems most nearly re- lated conchologically to those forms described as Paludestrina diaboli Pilsbry and Ferriss (1906: 170, fig. 36) from New Mexico Pleistocene or Recent alluvium and Potamopyrgus cheatumi Pilsbry (1935: 91, fig. 4) living in Texas. Cheatumi has 5% whorls and is near 1.75 mm. high and diaboli has 4% whorls and is small- er than L. hertleini being around 1.30 mm. high. The 4% whorls of hertleini are not as convex as those of diaboli. Another amni- colid living in 1949 with Lyrodes hertleini at the type locality, Amnicola brandi Drake (1953), is far more globose and has nearly one whorl less than hertleini. Ho.otyre: Length, 2.48 mm.; major diameter, 1.96 mm.; height of aperture, 1.02 mm.; width of aperture, 0.83 mm. Aperture ovate, slightly rimmed, a bit oblique, contained in the 4 BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 1 mn. PLATE 15 Lyrodes hertleini Drake Holotype total shell about 2% times for height and less than half for width, generally adnate. Color, yellowish chalky-white with an olive stain. Protoconch slightly eroded, almost flat, not depressed. Whorls, 4%, quite convex, deep suture, no sculpture other than faint growth lines; body whorl projects at bottom and on the right when viewed from the front. Umbilicus narrow, barely visible through chink in callus. Columella slender, has no pro- cesses. Shell shape: not acutely pointed, not globose, not slender. No. 9982 in the Department of Paleontology Type Collection, California Academy of Sciences (Golden Gate Park, San Fran- cisco, California). Type material collected by Dr. C. Clayton Hoff and R. J. Drake, 15 April 1949, from springs at Las Palomas, Chi- huahua, Mexico. ParatyPes: California Academy of Sciences Department of Paleontology Type Collection, Nos. 9983-9987; British Museum (Natural History), Nos. 1955.9.22.10-13; U. S. National Museum Division of Mollusks, No. 600498; Chicago Natural History Mu- seum, No. 53877; Museum of Comparative Zoology, No. 186777; San Diego Museum of Natural History, No. 138218; University of California Museum of Paleontology, Nos. 34813a-d; University of Arizona Invertebrate Museum, No. 101; Wendell O. Gregg Collection, No. 7218. 45 BuLLetin, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Nores: Placement of hertleini in the genus followed the help- ful suggestion of Dr. Joseph P. E. Morrison who examined re- productive anatomy in preserved animals of paratypes deposited in the U. S. National Museum. The operculum was not later available for inclusion in the description. Still another amnicolid, of which two dead shells were col- lected by Maj. Mearns in 1892 (Drake 1953: 26) from the gen- eral area of the type localities of L. hertleini and A. brandi, and described as Bythinella palomasensis Pilsbry (1895: 68-69) per- haps may be either a Durangonella or a Lyrodes—as to be deter- mined sometime by malacological investigation and if fresh specimens are eventually available. Malacological comparison of Potamopyrgus Stimpson and Ly- rodes Doering after examination of dried-in animals was given by Morrison (1939). LITERATURE CITED Drake, R. J. 1953. Amnicola brandi, a new species of snail from northwestern Chihau- hua. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences, 43: 26-28, figs. 1-6. Morrison, J. P. E. 1939 Notes on the genera Potamopyrgus and Lyrodes. The Nautilus, 52: 87-88. Pilsbry, H. A. 1895. A new Mexican Bythinella. The Nautilus, 9: 68-69. 1928. Mexican mollusks. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 80: 115-117, text-figs. 1-8. 1935. Western and southwestern Amnicolidae and a new Humboldtiana. The Nautilus, 48: 91-94, figs. 1-4. Pilsbry, H. A., and Ferriss, J. H. 1906. Mollusca of the southwestern states. II. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 58: 123-175, pls. 5-9, text- igs. 1-37. 1909. Mollusca of the southwestern states. III. The Huachuca Mountains, Arizona. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia, 61: 495-516, pls. 19-23, figs. 1-11. Smith, Allyn G. 1953. Some land and fresh-water shells from the Montezuma National Monument, Yavapai County, Arizona. Conchological Club of Southern California, Minutes No. 126: 7-9. BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 FISH RECORDS FROM THE PLEISTOCENE OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA In the Collections of the Los Angeles County Museum By GeorcEe P. KANAKOFF The following species of fish were kindly determined for the Los Angeles County Museum by Mr. John E. Fitch, Assistant Director of California State Fisheries Laboratory, Terminal Island, from Pleistocene fossils recovered in Los Angeles and Orange Counties, California. Comparisons were made with skele- tal remains of living forms. No extinct forms were found. Local- ity numbers refer to the museum’s fossil localities in Invertebrate Paleontology, as follows: LACMIP 58 Lower Pleistocene (San Pedro sand) stratum, 150 feet above sea level, about 10 feet thick, in the real estate subdivision of the Capistrano Beach Palisades, Orange County, California. LACMIP 59 Known locally as “Lincoln Avenue deposit”; see Willett, George, 1937, “An Upper Pleistocene Fauna from Baldwin Hills, Los Angeles County, California,” San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., v. 8, No. 30, pp. 379-406, 2 pls. LACMIP 66-2 An exposure of Upper Pleistocene (Palos Verdes sand) 100 feet above the present high tide level, and about % mile back from water's edge, at the east end of the Newport Bay Estuary, % of a mile SW from the salt-reducing plant of the Irvine Estate, New- port Bay Mesa, Orange County, California. LACMIP 68-B An exposure of Upper Pleistocene (Palos Verdes sand), about 90 feet above the present high tide level in the vertical cliff on the west bank of the Newport Bay Estuary, Costa Mesa, Orange County, California. LACMIP 131 Lower Pleistocene (San Pedro sand) exposure in the 500 block of North Pacific Blvd., San Pedro, Los Angeles County, Cali- fornia. The species are enumerated in biological order, with their common names, families, and the present range of geographical distribution. AT ButLetin, So, CAuir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 CODE: | (1 Otolith) 1-Os_ (1 opercular spine ) 1-D (1 piece of dentition ) 1-St (1 sting ) 1-Sp. (1 dorsal spine ) Species: F . ea an Lacmip Lower Pleistocene Upper Pleistocene _ Localities 58 i31 59 66-2 68-R Heterodontus francisci (Girard)...... eA EI 4-Sp “Horn Shark’’ f. Heterodontidae (Monterey Bay, Callf. to Guaymas, Mex.) ; Notorynchus maculatum Ayres....... 3-D = 8-D “Sevengill Shark’ f. Hexanchidae (Northern British Columbia to San Diego) Lamna ditropis Hubbs and Follett.... ke “Salmon Shark’’ f. Lamnidae (Japan and Alaska to Southern Calif.) Isurus glaucus (Miller and Henle)... “Bonito Shark’’ f. Lamnidae (Japan; Pacific to Magdalena Bay, Baja Calif., West Mexico) Carcharodon carcharias (L)........... ““Man-eater’’ f. Lamnidae (Temperate and tropical water of Atlantic and Pacific) (San Diego to Monterey Bay) Cetorhinus maximus (Gunner)....... “Basking Shark’’ f. Cetorhinidae in Atlantic and Pacific (Baja Calif. to Alaska) Triakis semifasciata Girard........... “Leopard Shark’’ f. Triakidae (Oregon to Magdalena Bay, Baja Calif.) Carcharhinus lamiella ............... 23-D 57-D 12-D (Jordan & Gilbert) ‘‘Bay Shark’”’ f. Carcharhinidae (Southern Calif. to Mazatlan) 1-D 1-D seas of the world (North to Southern Calif.) : Urobatis halleri (Cooper)............. 3-St_ | 188-St | 35-St 1-D 3-D 1-D 7-D 1-D Prionace glauca (L.) ...........eeeee- 8-D “Blue Shark’”’ f. Carcharhinidae Tropical and temperate waters of the world. Pelagic (British Columbia to Gulf of Calif.) Sphyrna zygaena (I..)..............-5 £2) “Hammerhead Shark”’ f. Sphyrnidae Tropical and warm temperate “Round Stingray’’ f. Dasyatidae (Pt. Conception to Panama) Myliobatis californicus (Gill)......... 160-D a-St “Bat ray’’ f. Myliobatidae (Oregon to San Felipe and Gulf of Calif.) | Merluccius productus (Ayres)........ AW) _| “Californian Hake” f. Merlucciidae | Alaska to Magdalena Bay Paralichthys californicus (Ayres)..... 1-0 “Calif. Halibut’’ f. Bothidae Bodega Bay, Calif. to Magdalena Bay, Baja Calif. Anisotremus davidsoni (Steindachner) . 1-0 “Sargo’’ f. Haemulidae Pt. Conception to Guaymas, Mex. Cynoscion nobilis (Ayres) .......... 4-0 “White Seabass’”’ f. Sciaenidae | Alaska to Gulf of Calif. (San Felipe) 48 BuLuLeTiIn, So. Cautir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 BRECiES: Laemip Lower Pleistocene Upper Pleistocene Localities 58 131 59 66-2 68-B Seriphus politus Ayres ............... 81-0 3-0 “Queenfish”’ f. Sciaenidae Monterey Bay to San Juanico Bay, Baja Calif. Micropogon ectenes Jordan & Gilbert. 2-0 f. Sciaenidae Berrugato, Magdalena Bay, Baja Calif. to Mazatlan, W. Mexico Genyonemus lineatus (Ayres)......... 1-0 61-0 “Kingfish’’ or ‘‘White Croaker’’ f. Sciaenidae Vancouver Island to San Juanico Bay, Baja Calif. Roncador stearnsi (Steindachner).... 5-0 “Spotfin Croaker’’ f. Sciaenidae Pt. Conception to San Juanico Bay, Baja Calif. Umbrina roncador Jordan & Gilbert.. 1-0 “Yellowfin Croaker’’ f. Sciaenidae Pt. Conception to Magdalena Bay, Baja Calif. Pimelometopon pulchrum (Ayres) “Calif. Sheephead”’ f. Labridae 1 Monterey Bay to Gulf of Calif. (La Paz) Sebastodes sp. (3 species undeter- 4-0 |} 2-0 mined) ‘‘Rockfish’’ f. Scorpaenidae Alaska (Japan) to Gulf of Calif. Leptocottus armatus Girard ......... 1-0s “Staghorn Sculpin’’ f. Cottidae Alaska to San Quentin Bay, Baja Calif. 1-0 Parichthys myriaster Hubbs & Schultz “Slim Midshipman,” f. Batrachoidi- dae Morro Bay to Cedros Is. Otophidium scrippsae Hubbs ......... 16-0 1-0 “Calif. Cusk-eel”’ f. Ophidiidae Point Arguello, Calif. to Cerros Id., Baja Calif. Otophidium taylori Girard ........... 5-0 1-0 “Spotted Cusk-eel”’ f. Ophidiidae San Francisco into Baja Calif. eT) Of the above species of fish, three are considered strictly northern in dis- tribution today: Notorynchus maculatum, Lamna ditropis, and Cetorhinus maximum; and three are of the Panamic fauna: Carcharhinus lamiella, Sphyrna zygaena, and Micropogon ectenes. Footnote: Since the above list was submitted for publication three speci- mens of fish (one of which represents an additional species), from two ad- ditional localities, have been found among molluscan remains in old collec- tions: Dasyatis dipterurus (Jordan & Gilbert), f. Dasyatidae, present dis- tribution British Columbia to Magdalena Bay; 2-St from LACMIP locality no. 77, a 30-ft deep trench dug for installation of outfall sewer at Main and Lomita, Wilmington, Calif., and exposed for only two days; Upper Pleistocene. Lamna ditropis Hubbs & Follett, f. Lamnidae, present distribution Japan and Alaska to southern California, 1-D; LACMIP locality no. 130-7, a 30-ft bluff exposed at the type locality for the Timms Point formation, opposite ‘‘Fisher- man’s Slip’ in San Pedro harbor, testhole no. 7 at extreme south of bluff; Lower Pleistocene. SWFA. AQ BuLLeTin, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 LAURENA MOORE ALLIOT 1869 - 1955 Laurena Moore Alliot, a life member of the Southern Cali- fornia Academy of Sciences, passed away in Los Angeles on May 4, 1955. Mrs. Alliot was the widow of Hector Alliot, a former Trustee, and President of this Academy. She was born in Barnesville, County of Belmont, Ohio, January 12, 1869, daughter of Eli Moore and Laura Alverda Dove (Moore). Although Mrs. Alliot did not take an active part in the af- fairs of our Academy to the extent that she did in the Ruskin Art Club, she was always ready to lend her influence, and to cooperate in every possible manner. A fitting tribute to her, and a record of her activities as a Ruskin Art Club member was pub- lished in the Southwest Museum's “Masterkey” of July-August, 1955, which mentions the fact that she was listed at the time of her death as the only Honorary Member of that Club, and the author of its history, under the title of “Sixty Years in Retrospect.” Among her other activities, it has been determined that she was a member of the Daughters of the American Revolution. The Board of Trustees of the Southern California Academy of Sciences voted to establish a memorial fund in the name of Laurena Moore Alliot, and has transferred an initial sum to its endowment accounts for that purpose. This furnishes the medi- um through which her name can be kept on record in the annals of science, through the cooperation of her many friends, much as is the case with the memorial to her husband, namely, the Hector Alliot Memorial Lilet established in 1919 by the Rus- kin Art. Club. NC. 50 BULLETIN, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF f SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 SCIENTIFIC NOTES A SECOND RECORD OF TADARIDA MOLOSSA FROM ARIZONA (Chiroptera, Molossidae ) The occurrence of the large free-tail bat, Tadarida molossa (Pallas), in Arizona has only been reported on one previous occasion (Shamel, H Heseroe Us Ss. Nat. Mus. 78 (19), 1931:1-27). A second specimen of this bat was obtained in Arizona on August 29. 1946. Because of the paucity of Arizona records and the circumstances surrounding the capture of this specimen it is felt that it is worthy of record. On the above date, Mr. Arthur F. Sylvester of Tucson, Arizona, and Mr. Lloyd Martin, entomologist on the staff of the Los Angeles Museum, were collecting insect material in Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, Pima County. Mr. Sylvester observed a live bat entangled in the thorns of a mesquite bush (Prosopis glandulosa), near the mouth of the canyon at an elevation of 4400 feet. The bat was approximately five feet above ground level. Mr. Martin collected the specimen and returned with it e camp, where it died the following day. The specimen was preserv ed and is now number 8342 in the mammal collection of the Los Angeles County Museum. Measurements of the specimen are as follows: total length 127 m., tail 52.0 mm., hind foot 11.0 mm., ear 21.5 mm., radius 59.0 mm., and tibia 17.0 mm. Instances of bats becoming impaled or trapped by thorny bushes while in flight have been reported previously (Stager, K. E., Jour. Mamm., 24 (3) 1943, p. 396), but are uncommon enough to warrant recording. —KENNETH E. STAGER, Los Angeles County Museum, Los Angeles, California. IS THIS A NEW, AND GIANT CLOTHES MOTH? It has recently been called to our attention by Mr. Fred Thorne, of the San Diego County Department of Agriculture, that larvae of Litoprosopus coachella Hill have been taken in buildings, feeding on fabrics and paper. If the occurrence represents a newly acquired feeding habit of this caterpillar, it might pose a serious threat to the American wardrobe. This larva normally feeds on the reticulated or crosshatched fibers at the base of stems of the California Fan Palm (Washingtonia filifera Wendl.). The moth was at one time considered to be one of the rarest phalaenid species in California, and was regarded as being limited in range to the Coachella Valley. It was first described by Charles A. Hill, then of Glendale, from two examples captured by “H. Place,” (Enrico Piazza ) at Palm Springs, Cali- fornia, and was published in the Entomological News, Vol. 32, p. 105, 1921, without an illustration. The first picture of it appeared in the Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences, Vol. 23, p. 182, fig. 10, 1924. The writer first reported its occurrence in Los Angeles in 1933, de- scribed its life cycle, and illustrated the egg, larva, and pupa, in the Bul- emus@wA S., Vol. 32, pp. 117-120: 51 BuLLeETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 The moth measures about 1 inches from tip to tip of the forewings, and the larva, when fully grown averages 1's inches long. It is therefore a giant as compared to the common varieties of clothes moths. The palm fibers on which the larva normally feeds are, of course, dead vegetable tissue, as is also cotton, flax, and wood fiber from which many papers are made. These types of fiber are not eaten by clothes moths, unless they happen to have grease spilled on them, Their regular diet is wool, which contains lanolin, a type of fat essential to their digestive mechanism. It would be interesting to learn from entomologists in the field, the exact types of fabric that are eaten by the larva of Litoprosopus coachella. Mr. Thorne reports that in all cases of this type thus far investigated, there were California Fan Palms growing in close proximity to the buildings. With this fact in mind, it may be presumed that a transitory population increase has caused a larval migration, which would not occur under normal conditions. It would be well, however, to keep the situation under surveillance. Subsequent to the receipt of the above data, Mr. Thorne secured additional information from George T. Okumura, Systematic Entomologist of the Bureau of Entomology, State Department of Agriculture, Sacramento, California, which sheds new light on the range, and larval habits of Lito- prosopus coachella. Liberal quotation from this letter is worthy of record. “According to our records this pest has been found in the following locations: Bakersfield, Kern County; San Bernardino, San Bernardino County; Los Angeles, Los Angeles County; Riverside, Riverside County; and Palm Springs, Riverside County. These larvae were collected in the months of June, July, August and September.” “The following excerpt from an article by Mr. D. J. Ott may be of interest to you:” “Fan Palm Caterpillar — The second instance of damage by an incidental fabric pest was encountered recently when a coat was received from Palo Alto, California. The damage was limited to the cuff of the sleeve where the nap was removed on several large areas (#% to % inch dia.), and in one case a hole was apparent through the base yarns. A chemical analysis with fibers from the sleeve revealed an adequate Mitin application.” “Fortunately, the damage had been discovered by a drycleaner who then removed and saved the “moth nest” (matted cut fibers and insect refuse) before cleaning the coat. Part of this material was sent in an envelope along with the coat.” “Microscopic examination of the cut fibers did not reveal any evidence of fabric insect damage, such as typical webbing and mandible imprints. However, three small pieces of an insect larva were found: two pieces from the side of the larva and a small portion of a thoracic leg complete with tarsal claw. The appearance of these insect parts and the presence of some strands of silk in the entangled mass of cut fibers indicated the possibility of a lepidopterous larva being involved, but the insect parts in no way resembled any of the various species of clothes moths. Hence it was assumed that this was another instance of damage by an incidental fabric pest. A search through the literature revealed a description of a species that fitted this case in all respects.” “According to Flock, larvae of Litoprosopus coachella Hill (fan palm caterpillars) feed in the flowers and fruits of the fan palm in California, and they normally make their cocoons of the tough fibers at the base of the trees. However, they occasionally enter houses and remove the pile in large patches from rugs, draperies and other household fabrics in the process of making cocoons. Flock states further that “since the feeding and moving 52 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 about usually occur at night, the caterpillars are rarely observed. They commonly enter buildings when large numbers of mature individuals are blown from trees by wind, but a certain number fall or travel to the ground regardless of wind conditions. When on the ground the caterpillars appear to be attracted to lights so that they are likely to enter buildings before finding a suitable place to pupate.” “The above report describes caterpillars observed at Riverside, California, but Armitage et al state that, although this caterpillar is a native of southern and Lower California, it has followed the plantings of these common ornamental palms up into the Sacramento Valley. Subsequent to our exam- ination of the damaged coat, an investigation in Palo Alto proved that this palm was prevalent in that area. Furthermore, the insect parts — particularly the tarsal claw — agree with the illustrations by Peterson of similar parts from other members of this same family (Phalaenidae ).” John A. Comstock 50th ANNIVERSARY OF RANCHO LA BREA FOSSIL EXCAVATIONS March, 1956, marked the 50th anniversary of the first scientific exca- vations at Rancho La Brea. In March, 1906 the University of California, under the direction of Dr. John C. Merriam, sent its first field party to the site and began removing the fossil bones. Commemorating this outstanding paleontological event, a ceremony was held on the afternoon of Sunday, March 11, at Hancock Park (the site of the Rancho La Brea fossil beds). Supervisor John Anson Ford officiated as Master of Ceremonies and Dr. Hildegarde Howard, Chief Curator of Science of the Los Angeles County Museum, presented an historical sketch of the work at the famous site in which she introduced a purer of honored guests who had had contact with the early scientific work. Representing the Southern California Academy of Sciences among these guests was Mr. Theodore Payne, member of the Academy since 1895, who has long been interested in the La Brea work. The Academy was honored for its contribution of the first skeletons of the Rancho La ees aaaoals to be exhibited in Los Angeles County Museum at its opening in ; Special guided tours of the Park were conducted through the week of March 12-18, culminating with a talk by Dr. Theodore Downs, Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology of the Museum, following the tour on Sunday afternoon, March 18. H. H. LOS ANGELES MUSEUM BRAZILIAN EXPEDITION Under the sponsorship of Mr. and Mrs. Maurice A. Machris, the Los Angeles County Museum is sending an expedition to the interior of Brazil for a 3% month survey of the biologically unexplored headwaters of the Tocantins River. The survey will include extensive collecting of scientific specimens of birds, mammals, insects, fish, reptiles, and plants native to the region. The entire operation will be documented with color motion pictures. 53 BuLLeTIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Four custom built trucks with four-wheel drive, and two trailers equipped with electric power plant, refrigerators, and water purification units will be used to transport the expedition northwestward from the coast at Sao Paulo to the headwaters of the Tocantins. The Tocantins is one of the main tributaries of the Amazon and forms the most easterly river of the Amazon network. The fully equipped trucks, heavy-laden with 3 months’ supply of food, insect proof tents, scientific collecting equipment, etc., were shipped to Brazil trom Los Angeles Harbor aboard the “S. S$, Trader” of the Pope- Talbot steamship lines on Feb. 6, 1956. Expedition personnel left for Brazil by plane on March 14, 1956. Departure for the interior from SAo Paulo was March 28. Personnel from Los Angeles includes Mr. and Mrs. Maurice A. Machris, Jean Delacour (Director of the Los Angeles County Museum), Harry F. Burrell (motion picture photographer), E. Yale Dawson (Botan- ist), Kenneth E. Stager (Ornithologist-Mammalogist), and Fred S. Truxal (Entomologist). In Rio de Janeiro, the party was joined by Antenor Car- valho (Ichthyologist- Herpetologist) from the Museu Nacional of Brazil, shich is the sponsoring institution of the expedition in Brazil. ols de ACADEMY PROCEEDINGS ABSTRACT OF LECTURE ENTITLED “RIVERS OF ICE” DELIVERED BEFORE THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ON JANUARY 20, 1956 BY DR. ROBERT P. SHARP Most investigations of glaciers in Alaska have been made on the lower parts of these ice bodies. Obviously the behavior of a glacier is controlled in large degree by what happens in its upper part where the substance accumulates. Fortunately, a series of expeditions (from 1948 through 1951) sponsored by the Arctic Institute of North America to the heart of the St. Elias Range, provided an opportunity for study in both the upper and lower reaches of the Seward-Malaspina Glacier system. Any glacier consists of two principal parts, an accumulation area where it is nourished, and a wastage area in which its substance is dissipated, principally by melting. The glacier transports excess material from the accumulation area to the Wastige area and, if everything is nicely in balance, the total accumulation is just equal to the total wastage. During the process of being transported from one part of the glacier to the other, the ice experiences solid flowage and its crystalline texture and structure are greatly altered. This modification is roughly the same as that experienced by a sedimentary rock metamorphosed by solid flowage. Studies of the Seward-Malaspina system show that Malaspina Glacier has experienced a strong deficit in its material balance sheet in at least 6 out of the 9 recent budget years. This means that it is wasting away rapidly, and indeed the marginal zone of this great piedmont ice sheet is stagnant, heavily covered by ablation debris, and in places supports a luxurious spruce forest with trees up to 100 years old growing in the debris on the surface of the ice. Complete melting of the ice in two localities of limited extent has exposed remains of interglacial forests overridden by this glacier at the time of its last advance. A sample of wood from one of these localities was too young to be dated by Carbon-14 analysis and is estimated to be less than 300 years old. This relation and the age of the trees now growing on the ice fix the time of the last advance of the Malaspina Glacier at about 200 + 25 years ago. 54 BULLETIN, So. CAaLtir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Seismic reflections show that Malaspina Glacier lies in a basin the floor of which is at least 700 feet and possibly as much as 1000 feet below sea level. The maximum thickness of ice in this basin exceeds 2000 feet. Since the margin of the glacier is everywhere above sea level, the ice must move up hill in its outer part, and the mechanism by which this occurs is something of a puzzle to glaciologists. Deformation of a pipe in a nearly vertical 1000-foot bore hole near the center of Malaspina Glacier indicates that this up-hill flow is not due to the extrusion of an underlying plastic layer. Some other mechanism, perhaps one of surfaceward movement along inclined slip planes in the glacier, may be involved. It has been learned from the deformation of the pipe in this bore hole that ice will flow under extremely small shear stresses amounting in some instances to not more than 100th of a kilogram per square centimeter. Investigations have also been made of the crystal relations within these glaciers, and it is most impressive to realize that ice crystals the size of a man’s head, now found near the outer edge of Malaspina Glacier, have been formed by the welding together of almost countless snowflakes. As: the glacier flows, the ice recrystallizes and larger crystals ultimately develop as aresult. These crystals have a definite optical or crystallographic orientation, and striking orientation patterns have been discovered in the ice of Malaspina and other glaciers. These patterns, however, as they now appear, do not seem to represent something that was formed during the original process of flowage but rather have developed subsequently by recrystallization after flow ceased. The most impressive structural features of the Malaspina Glacier are huge folds involving the individual ice streams and medial moraines com- posing this ice sheet. These folds look like normal anticlines and synclines, but actually they represent deformation of nearly vertical elements rather than nearly horizontal strata. The structures are thought to have been created within the ice sheet as it spread out on the nearly flat foreland, but details of the process involved remain a puzzling enigma. ABSTRACT OF LECTURE ENTITLED “HOW AN OIL FIELD WORKS,” DELIVERED BEFORE THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ON FEBRUARY 17, 1956 By Max J. TaveEs of the Richfield Oil Corporation Californians are walking around on top of more than $15 billion that may never be used. This is an estimate of the value of crude oil that may be forever wasted in our underground reservoirs if modern oil conservation practices are continually ignored. The state’s proven oil reserves are estimated at approximately 4 billion barrels. By use of presently known conservation measures that make maxi- mum use of underground energies, reserves can be increased by at least five billion barrels. Thus, priced at $3.00 per barrel, the oil that California owns but may never recover is worth at least $15 billion. 55 Butuetin, So. Cau. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 Oil production was demonstrated by means of a working model of an oil field. The model showed how tremendous pressures existing underground are used to recover oil and how more oil can be recovered when these pressures are placed under single control fhroweh “unitization” of an oil field. The cutaway model displayed a porous-rock reservoir containing separate layers of water, oil and gas which are trapped in “loose” rock surrounded by impermeable stone. When the high-pressure reservoir is pierced by a well, a low-pressure area is created at the well. Oil, lacking the energy to move through the rock’s pores, is pushed ahead by the compressed gas and water which expand toward the low-pressure well bottom like air rushing out of a balloon. Though it is impossible to recover 100% of the oil in a reservoir, the model showed that by proper use of the natural pressure system recovery of as high as 70% of the oil can be effected. In California today as much as 75% of the oil in a reservoir is left there because of wasteful methods encouraged by an antiquated law called the “rule of capture.” Under this law producers sometimes find themselves in a race to drill as many wells as possible in order to protect their interests. In the race between the many individuals, the energy of compressed gas is used so rapidly and carelessly that much of it comes to the surface before it can perform its natural function of pushing the oil ahead of it. Therefore, the only way to effect maximum economic recovery from a reservoir is to treat it for what it is, “a single unit of energy.’ This “unitization” method of conservation means that rather than fight a battle in which everyone loses, owners and operators cooperate to with- draw oil uniformly, and to maintain and even replenish the gas and water energies that make oil recovery possible. California, which is the only important oil producing state without an effectual conservation law, should have a majority-rule “unitization” law now. Under such a law, a reservoir would be produced by “unitization” methods if an overwhelming majority of the interests voluntarily agreed to such operation. Minority ‘rights would be protected by all due process of law, including the courts, and all interest would share in recovery of a greatly increased amount of oil. Instead of a voluntary majority rule now, a small minority can compel a great majority to waste oil that is the lifeblood of our economy. 56 BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY of SCIENCES Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California Subscription—$3.50 per year Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00) Publications of the Southern California Academy of Sciences The Academy has published to date the following: PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6. MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri- cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers. All issues of the above are now out of print. Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 — one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) in 1920. The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August, Vol. XX, No. 3, December. The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September. The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July. The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March- April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October; No. 6, November-December. From 1925 to 1955, including volumes XXIV to 54, three numbers were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2, May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume. MEMOIRS Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1, 1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949. 57 BULLETIN, So. BULLETIN Publications of the Southern California Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 3, No. 7 7(. M9QOAY he Maes ae ie en Oo elQ05 ees een eee eee aL OO aptiaee ee ceaetct a hk ety ee eee LE ML OO. * ee ea ee pam OO9) kite Ae re ee Se LO enya a ee ae eee Fe LOS icy Sates Brea kok 7k Ce ir MLO UGS eee an eee a eee lee SD) ALONG Ye eee UR ee ea ee oe ee on OG tees ts A he pel ODO Ges eh ok Ae Le FiO D (ieee Sa tae RED an ee Se red DO) eet = Alba ee de Le OO 4 GeO 245 (ea Chil ees sea seneeeeees LOR Se OI 5a (each) pee eye ee eee 5 BL 1926 ip ek yma erie Oat She Tl eR Sara TERA a ICG A (4216) a) Neer tar meme erro te ET agin RO Are 1928 (each) 2255 22> anle 2. 1929 (each) de Ser. 2 ae ele 2, Sea OST (Gach) 3 a: SO se O32) 5 (hed Ch) seca es eee ee lOO 193835 (Keach). eee sos. ae ea ae 72 sO34s(each))ios Sea aan pee SN 9 353 ((each\) cre. jee ee cle Wesel O8Gn¢eachi)\a 2... el O81 OSe(each) 22. Se ee ee lee Se 1 O88aleach)) bee tee eee yl LORS 39 (each): EO PL OAQ CS: se o2 cee 2o eek ead 4 soak Ue 2, 3 OAT i Ceach) 2080 a ee ‘Wage Se 949 (each) .6. 30 2e ee = ML, GR 3, 1943A(each)) 2. se lego HL OA44 each?) 9 sc. ee ee eee eee eo 945m (each) eee Hie ee! SL GA Bh IICANG) (GROIN) ) eee ae, le ONS SOA a (each)).1 pre mOR Oo OASE (each) i. ee Se leo 8t 1949 (teach) a eee aes G5 ON (eachiis ete sO (Oe LO aieach,) asus. 2 ene Sen 95 Da (each) ite..ca eee Se Ob Su (each) sess aee ee Al 3, NG 54a Ceachy) see coe lon O38 so Ob ou (each) bs we eee Academy of Sciences For Sale at the Appended Prices ( Continued on next page) 5& Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 To To Non- Members Members $ .50 1.00 50 1.00 50 1.00 1.50 3.00 1.00 2.00 ATs) 1.50 1.50 3.00 2.00 4,00 she 1.50 1.50 3.00 0 1.00 50 1.00 1.00 2.00 .OD site, .35 se .35 75 35 Sih) 35 she .30 oth) 39 75 35 75 OD) sth Bo {3) eo .30 75 35 75 35 alt B30 .75 35 75 3D (ho) 00) Ho Keto) le 35 Ue) 10D 75 2OD) .75 39 .75 15 Ae) 315) Ste 35 Ue 35 75 .60 1.25 .60 1.25 .60 1.25 .60 1.25 .60 1,25 BuLLetTiIn, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Voli obs sharte ll 956 PUBLICATIONS (continued) To To Non- MEMOIRS Members Members Woll, 1; HORS poms COWS secrete arc eee $2.00 $4.00 mk: printed on one side of paper.................. 3.00 5.00 W/o Now lesl'939— paper (COVE .22 eee DE 2.50 OH iii tara printed on one side of page.......... ES 3.50 D2 NOA4— paper COVER 22... <.------c---ecee--eeeaeee =e ol) 1.50 B, SN, Oey pont oveie CON ee ee 1.00 2.00 SQA G — WaperiCOVele see 1.00 2.00 Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or Co-operating Organizations Woxrquimia—Volss le) 2) (allpublished)-.-. 22 unbound $1.00 Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published), ehictvermtomologicals Icolor plates... 22 ee 1.00 Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall................ 1.00 Reprints: Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfamilies Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed on one side of page only, to allow of additional notes), Wm. Barnes ancl Iosiwere II, leyeroyeranvbo, ACPA ee a3 5X0) The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County, New Mexico Siem, Mosbergs 25 00 a te ee ee D5 Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United State of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on white bristol board, one side of page (without index) suitable for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-members.... A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes of their habits and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis.............. 50 A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA, 32 pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm. M. we) S cS NUTT CATV Nm ee oes e ee er ene ne Che nee We en cele Wan ea eal 00 Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum — CHANNEL ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33...:............. 3.00 Fauna and Flora of El Segundo Sand Dunes. Papers 1-16_.......... 1.50 ADDRESS ALL INQUIRIES TO SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, Calif., U.S. A. a9 BuLLetiIn, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 1, 1956 The work of the Southern California Academy of Sciences is carried on entirely through the generosity of private citizens, who are suf- ficiently interested in the advancement of education and cultural endeavor to donate funds or make bequests to the Academy. As a guide, in the matter of bequests, for those who plan to further this program, the following forms are suggested: Form of Legacy To be used when it is desired to leave the Academy any personal property, such as money, stocks, bonds, works of art, or other objects of value. I give and bequeath unto “Southern California Academy of Sciences,” of the City of Los Angeles, the sum of......0.22220 22 Dollars: To have and possess the same unto the said “Southern Cali- fornia Academy of Sciences,” its successors and assigns, to the uses, dispositions and benefits thereof forever. Form of Devise To be used when it is desired to leave real estate to the Academy. I give and devise to “Southern California Academy of Sciences” of the City: of ios Angeles). (.2.02226.2 ee hereidescribe the property or sround ent ee ), together with the appurtenances, in fee simple, and all policies of insurance covering said premises, whether fire, title or otherwise, free from all taxes: To have and to hold the same unto the said “Southern California Academy of Sciences,” its successors or assigns forever. 60 | 1e Editor ; at the D iclowing ong, Street, Los a) PRE , Parr 2 ay Westen: American Prehistory. th DeEtte LC se LEP EEE REE ONS Mins os Dee here ae 61 1 of Elsinore Lake Basin. John F. Mann, Jr.............-... 72 ‘0 Anomuran Crustaceans New to California Waters. : SAUER ANCES WIE) SER n eete MOLE GRRE REIB ERR aS 9 ms on ‘Pulothrix sumichrasti (Cresson) and sy of Emphorine Bees. E. G. Linsley, wain a Gy BSI econ ee 83 Life History of a Rare Arizona Sphinx Moth, phanes falco Walker. John Adams Comstock............... 102 morlini, a New Species of Echinoid from the Pliocene erial County, California, U. 8, Grant IV and . 1 PE SES LILI TROIS a 107 Species of Nassarius from the Pliocene of Los Angeles > California George P. 053 (74 0) | RROD Seb Rae eS a 110 1956 — Issued August 31, *_. Southern California Academy of Sciences OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS Mr. Kuniterss Ei STACHRG. hn AR Rc are lea President Da.. Hrpecanon HOWARD. oo i aie First Vice-President eS We RMETD SS, Raa es ob ack ta dca cl evatrca ede bolic’ aonaaged Second Vice-President Mise Gre recitiene SUE Wo iso nada cen code Sees cot en anacdathasescsnciaeaten peepee ae Secretary NER ATED IVE AIA BRAINS 2s hs cactpecscttee tna gS nein oho thotce dase Assistant to Secretary DRS Wis DIG PIRAGE: Piss lh setesdeetscsiceidne tana csndenicentaesis cia Eee Treasurer Dar, Joes As }COMSBOCR. si chia ccss dla secs hape lk nese oeudinerbopbopi asa ae Editor Dr. A. Wem BELL Dr. W. Dwicut Prerce Dr. Joun A. Comstock Miss GRETCHEN SIBLEY Dr. THEODORE Downs Miss Ruta DrEtTrEe Simpson Dr. HitpEcARE Howarp Mr. KENNETH E. STAGER Mr. Litoyp M. Martin Dr. Frep S, Truxau Dr. SHERWIN F. Woop ADVISORY BOARD Pror. J. STANLEY BRODE Dr. WiLuiAM V. MAYER © Dr. THomas CLEMENTS Mr. THEODORE PAYNE Dr. Howarp R. Him. Dr. Ricwarp H. Swirr Dr. CARROLL L. LANG Miss BoNNIE C, TEMPLETON Dr. Louis C. WHEELER SCIENCE SECTIONS Section on Entomology Section on Health ” Dr. Water Esetinc, Chairman Dr. THomMas J. MEYERS, Chairman | Section on Anthropology Section of Junior Students Mr. GERHARD BAKKER, JR., Lorninc Dates, Chairman Chairman Section on Physical Sciences Section on Botany Dr. JoserH B. Fickien, III, Dr. CHarRLes Burcu, Chairman Chairman Section on Geology Section on Zoology Dr. THEODORE Downs, Chairman Dr. A. Wem BELL, Chairman — STANDING COMMITTEES Finance Publication W. Dwicut Pierce, Chairman Jonn A. Comstock, Chetan Joun A. Comstock WiiuramM H. Easton Joun R, PEMBERTON HILDEGARDE Howarp | GRETCHEN SIBLEY GrorGE R. JOHNSTONE SHERWIN Woop WrtuiAaM V. MAYER ALLEN STEvART, Auditor Rutu D. Smpson Conservation Dr. Ross Harpy, Chairman Program Hospitality KENNETH E,. Stacer, Chairman DONALD DRAKE, Chairman Membership Library Witi1am V. Mayer, Chairman Mrs. Lioyp M. Martin, ‘Chairman OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY . Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, California if Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences VOLUME 55 = Se See a aa ee ae Parr 2, 1956 AN INTRODUCTION TO EARLY WESTERN AMERICAN PREHISTORY By Ruta DEETTE SIMPSON Associate Curator, Southwest Museum Los Angeles, California Man’s occupation of western North America during late Pleis- tocene times is the most challenging and critical aspect of contem- porary American archeology. The arid portions of the western states constitute a rich and little-known field for those investigating the problem of early human occupation of the western hemisphere. The material pre- sented herewith is a summary of significant data and resultant interpretations derived from the early western sites. It is well known that during the Pleistocene, when glaciers. cloaked the mountains, the intermontane valleys and basins were subjected to pluvial climate, were characterized by extensive drainage systems and were, therefore, natural habitat for grazing and predatory animals. The intermontane region was also ideally suited to the needs of hunters during late Pleistocene and early post-Pleistocene times. Today, the Pluvial lakes and streams are gone, but proof of their previous existence remains in fossil land- forms. The evidence of Pleistocene and early post-Pleistocene human occupation is closely associated with those landforms. Campsites, hunting sites and workshops are usually on unpro- tected river terraces and lake shores where perishable objects are destroyed by the elements. Therefore our study of early human occupation has been predominately a study of Man’s early lithic industries. This lithic record can readily be divided into two principal parts: an early phase featuring rather heavy lithic im- plements and devoid of stone weapon points; a later phase in which lighter, finer implements and weapon points are present. The beginning of modern climatic conditions may, temporarily at least, be accepted as a terminal date for that aspect of western 61 BULLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 archeology commonly designated as “early Paleo-Indian occupa- tion.” Therefore, as a working basis, it is suggested that the lithic record of early human occupation extended from an as yet unde- termined time in the Pleistocene until the beginning of the Medithermal Period, and was divided into two major sections; the division being determined in part by the appearance of stone weapon points prior to the close of the last, or Wisconsin Glacial Epoch. Much has been written and will be written about the various weapon-point horizons. Therefore, this article shall be confined to the less publicized material representing the more generalized earlier lithic industries. Scientific investigations of sites yielding only Early P Paleo- lithic-type specimens were under way in the 1920s and 1930s (Rogers, Malcolm J., 1939; Harrington, Mark R., 1934; Simpson, George G., 1933; Renaud, Etienne B., 1936, 1938, 1940). However, as so frequently happens to work done in the vanguard of science, little attention was paid to those investigations and no one fur- thered the work until 1950. Thus, in 1950, our knowledge of western American late Pleistocene archeology was confined to scattered, isolated, little-known, little-appreciated, but tremen- dously important chapters in the story of American prehistory. It is interesting to note that this early work was far better appre- ciated in Europe than in America, because so much more work had been done pertaining to Old World early prehistory, and because that investigation had begun a century earlier than in the United States. What is presented here, then, is the story told by those early American discoveries and by the work a handful of us are doing to extend and interpret the non-weapon-point artifact assem- blages. For simplicity’s sake, these assemblages shall be referred to as “early lithic industries.”* Our concept of the age and extent of these lithic industries has changed enormously during the last two decades. Nearly all archeologists now agree that Man was here 20,000 years ago and many fieldworkers are willing to accept a much greater age. Radio-carbon dates are lending strong support to the scientists who favor a long Pleistocene occupation. As we shall see pres- ently, there is one desert locality older than 23,800 years as dated by C-14. There are also other sites which have been dated at ap- proximately 20,000 years. Thus far, early dates are rare because 1At no time henceforth does the term “lithic industry” imply consider- ation of later weapon-point assemblages. 62 BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 perishable material needed for C-14 tests is preserved primarily in caves, and few undisturbed caves have been discovered by archeologists. Since most of the known ancient campsites are open sites, we are, therefore, dependent upon geologists, paleontolo- gists and climatologists for estimated dates. Evidence of early lithic industries is being recovered from widely scattered sites, especially within the arid portion of west- ern North America. An increasing number of America’s arche- ologists are convinced that, from “Wyoming to Baja California, from California’s deserts at least as far inland as the Rocky Moun- tains, Texas and Sonora, there were widespread, unspecialized, Lower Paleolithic lithic industries. The extent to which these industries were distributed is being revealed as a progressively increasing number of investigators in an ever-widening area be- come interested in and acquainted with the crude, unspectacular artifacts as they lie inconspicuously among the natural stones. In general, it may be said that the early lithic industries have the following characteristics which are as applicable in Wyom- ing as they are in California: 1. The majority of artifacts are choppers, cleavers, coup de poing-like implements, side scrapers and cutting edges. Most of ese specimens belong in the “heavy equipment” category and have been shaped by the percussion method of flaking. Some artifacts show evidence of re-utilization and supplementary flaking by later craftsmen as witnessed by the different degree of patination on more recent flake scars, and by sharper edges. 2. Implements are fashioned from materials at hand—pebbles and cores of native rock. There is virtually no evidence of inter- areal trade. Of course, pottery is totally absent from the early sites. 3. As would be expected, the early lithic industries must be subdivided into minor cultural and temporal phases. However, the study of this material is just beginning, and refinements of classification cannot be undertaken as yet. 4. On many of the older specimens, patination is deep and heavy—flake scars being patinated until they are frequently in- distinguishable by color from the remainder of the specimens’ surfaces. Sharp edges are smoothed, even rounded, by sand and/or water action. While patination and weathering are elu- sive, uncertain criteria, they can, if handled with caution, supply valuable information. This is true particularly on mixed _ sites where early and late artifacts are found in association (as in blow-outs and on terraces). There, later tools fashioned from the same material, exposed for a shorter length of time to the same 63 BuLLEeTIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 climatic and soil conditions, show little or no weathering or pat- ination in comparison with the older implements. Thus, patina- tion and weathering, which are much dependent upon the nature of the stone involved, are important clues to relative age. 5. One other important aspect of collections made on the early sites should be noted: the large percentage of specimens which show only edge or marginal uniface flaking, and which are amorphous or lacking distinctive form. Whether these objects were fashioned by Man, nature or the elements is frequently de- batable. However, the retention of a representative collection of these specimens seems justified when they are found on definite sites associated with unquestionable artifacts. Investigators, sincerely interested in learning the story old stone tools can tell, know that they must proceed slowly and with caution as they attempt to distinguish between accidentally flaked stones and those that have been worked by Man. Happily, there are criteria of various kinds which enable the scientist to recognize with greater certainty Man’s handiwork. For example: 1. Crudely flaked specimens assume greater importance when found in an area which was obviously free, during Pleistocene as well as recent times, from vioient stream or wave action. It is not sufficient that one or two crude tools be found. If there are many in a comparatively small area, it argues in favor of Man’s presence. 3. It is highly desirable that charcoal or perishable material be found with lithic implements to permit radio-carbon dating; it is also highly desirable that identifiable Pleistocene animal bones and shells be associated with the stone tools. However, such criteria can seldom be met on open sites. This is one reason why the stratified Tule Springs Locality in Nevada is of vital signifi- cance, 4. It is necessary to be exceedingly critical of a site where all specimens are crude, amorphous, and flaked only along the edges. It is reasonable to expect that any site, worthy of con- sideration, will yield some unquestionably man-made tools. Since the need for irrefutable artifacts is urgent, it is important that investigators be in agreement on what constitutes such an artifact. In the first place, the form and flaked edges must create a tool satisfying a specific human need—as a cutter, scraper, chopper, etc. The form of the implement must fit comfortably the human hand. The flake scars must run from the edge onto one or the other face of the artifact since Man drives flakes off by 64 BULLETIN, So. Catirr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 striking an edge where he may utilize a natural or prepared striking platform. In the vast majority of cases, the flaked edge will form, with the dorsal and ventral surfaces, an accute angle. Flaking should be concentrated to form a working edge, not scat- tered promiscuously. The working edge may often bear appro- priate use-scars. It is desirable, though not always necessary, that there be a few biface tools—tools with flaking running from the edges over both ventral and dorsal surfaces. If flaking is alternate, that is, if a flake is thrown from one surface, the next flake from the other and so on, the implement is certainly man-made. And, parenthe- tically, it should be noted that there are certain methods of flaking which are too complex and which evidence too great an applica- tion of logic to be produced with any regularity by nature. Thousands of these unquestionably man-made implements, col- lected from more than a hundred early sites cannot be rejected as accidental. They were purposefully shaped to meet specific human needs. The early lithic-industry sites occur with diverse types of fossil landforms: on high lake terraces (Clements, Thomas and Lydia, 1953); on the shores of extinct shallow lakes and cienegas (Simpson, Ruth D., 1952); beneath lake and pond deposits (Harrington, M. R., 1934, 1955, Simpson, Pes G., 1933; Simp- Sone ne DD), 1955 ):; on high terraces (Renaud, E B., 1936, 1938, 1940); and buried in deep valley fill (Carter, George F., 1954; Simpson, R.D., 1954). Thus far in our investigations, the three localities which are most important are Black’s Fork in southwestern Wyoming, Tule Springs in southern Nevada, and Texas Street near San Diego, California. The Black’s Fork Locality (Pl. 16) is of prime importance because there we have more than seventy sites on which there are abundant diagnostic tools characteristic of the Lower and Middle Paleolithic. Amply represented are techniques typical of Pre- Chellean, Chelleo-Acheulean and Mousterian workmanship. Here, as in Europe, Asia, Africa and South America, is the extremely early Paleolithic development: the Pebble Industry (Renaud, E. B., 1955). At Black’s Fork, this is a basic element in the sequence of lithic industries. On marginal sites, some later artifacts of Mesolithic and Neolithic types are found (Renaud, E. B., 1938, poll). Since these are surface sites, implements representing the var- ious lithic horizons are frequently mixed. However, the varying degrees of patination and weathering, combined with the varying 65 BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, celetshatt, 2, 1956 PLATE 16 Black’s Fork Locality. Southwestern Wyoming. degree of evolutionary development of technique, specialization of form and refinement of purpose, permit the establishment of a well-ordered series. It is possible, then, to develop helpful systematic classifications on the basis of appearance,” Among the oldest Black's Fork specimens, the most important and numerous tools are choppers and coups de poing fashioned from cores and pebbles (PL. 18). These heavy implements are accompanied by a variety of scrapers, pointed tools, cutting edges, short blades (in the true European sense of the word), un- modified Clactonian flakes and other fiake implements. Side scrapers are notably abundant. 2The writer sees no reason to give diverse names to techniques and tools just because they are found in widely separated parts of the world. Therefore, the accepted European terms and periods are used when such use is justified by the material at hand. Universal terminology simplifies description; it does not imply equation of time; it indicates the stage reached in the evolu- tion of lithic workmanship, it does not pertain to geological or absolute chronology. 66 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 55, Part 2, 1956 PEATE, 17 Tule Springs Locality. Southwestern Nevada The Tule Springs Locality (PL. 17) is of prime importance because the presence of ash and charcoal has permitted the Uni- versity of Chicago Institute of Nuclear Studies to date Man’s presence here at “more than 23,800 years” (Libby, Willard E., 1954). Buried under 10 to 20 feet of lake or pond deposits, the ash and charcoal are combined with broken bones of camels, | bison, horses and mammoths—all extinct Pleistocene fauna. Many _ of the bones have been broken and split for marrow, many are charred. There are a few bone tools and some closely associated stone tools (PL. 19). The high-backed plano-convex scraper is predominant among the implements thus far recovered. As yet, no weapon points have been found. However, excavations are incomplete and the chronological position of this site in the tech- nical evolution of the lithic industries is tentative. The Texas Street Locality (Carter, G., 1954) derives its im- portance from the fact that the crude cores and flakes and fire- broken rocks are buried beneath 50-90 feet of valley fill with a well-developed soil profile—a fact which suggests Man’s presence either late in Third Interglacial or very early Wisconsin Inter- 67 BuLLeTin, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 PLATE 18 Typical Pebble Industry Implements, Black’s Fork, Wyoming. (Side chopper and coup de poing. ) stadial times. In either case, the presence of Man at the Texas Street Locality appears to more than treble the “maximum age” previously accepted for Man in America. SUMMARY: The study of Early Prehistoric archeology of west- ern America began comparatively recently and is much too young to give us decisive conclusions. However, present knowledge does provide challenging, thought-provoking data; does open new vistas; does afford a strong incentive for scholars to further their investigations into the probably great antiquity of Man in America. Certain aspects of our study are now well established, well documented. A few of these merit inclusion in the summary of this progress report on the investigation of Early Prehistoric western American archeology: 1. Thousands of Early Paleolithic-like artifacts from many sites situated in different areas, cannot be overlooked or ignored. They represent widespread and very early lithic industries. 2. Certain criteria must be met before sites and lithic imple- | ments are acceptable as evidence of the presence and work of 68 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 JPLvNIE; 1G) Typical Chopper and Scrapers, Tule Springs, Nevada. (Length of chopper: 11 cm.) early Man. Some of these criteria are: the presence of artifacts undeniably fashioned by Man; implements manufactured to meet Mans specific primary needs (cutting, scraping, pounding, etc. ) and which comfortably fit the human hands operating the tools in their functions. 3. The early lithic industries of western America display many of the traits characteristic of the Early Paleolithic industries of Western Europe, Africa and Asia. These traits are world-wide in their manifestation. The trend of evolution is similar: it starts with a pebble industry which is closely followed by a heavy core industry; tools are shaped by bold percussion flaking; then there is a tendency to reduce weight and size of artifacts, to extend and improve the quality of flaking, and to proceed from general- ized towards specialized implements, 69 BULLETIN, So, CaAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 The evidence of the antiquity of Man, and of his presence in fee rica during a relatively long portion of the Pleistocene is incre asing with every new discove ‘ry. Incessantly, the arbitrary “age ceilings” are being pushed back. Unbiased scientific research is bringing new and favorable light on the problem of Man’s an- tiquity in America. The first exploratory phase of American Paleolithic investiga- tion has yielded much vital information. During the initial prob- ing stage, the foundations were laid for future work. We have now some concept of the extensive field, of tremendous poten- tialities, of the exacting task ahead. We are beginning to appre- ciate the full significance of the long chapter of Man’s American prehistory w hich archeologists are attempting to understand and reconstruct. Thus will American archeology gain its rightful place beside the prehistory of the Old World where Africa, very rapidly, Asia, more slowly, and Australia, most recently of all, are adding their own chapters to that already written by Europe in the book of Human Prehistory. America cannot fail to make its contribution. Dr. E. B,. Renaud opened the door to a new era of scientific investigation when he became the first scientist to recognize, accept and publish the presence of Early Paleolithic industries in America. Today, the growth of this investigation is unequalled in the annals of American archeology, and the decades ahead give promise of new discoveries, new concepts that are yet but dreams in the scientific mind of America. The prehistoric horizon is widening; archeologists, encouraged by their first success, are ready and eager to explore further this immense field. They know new and significant discoveries will be made that will lead us further along the trail of Human Prehistory and deeper into the archeological and geological past. The Future will reveal the Past of Man in America. BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 BIBLIOGRAPHY Carter, George F. “An Interglacial Site at San Diego. California,’ The Masterkey, vol. XXVIII, no. 5, pp. 165-174, Southwest Museum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1954. Clements, Thomas and Lydia “Evidence of Pleistocene Man in Death Valley, California,” Geological Society of America Bulletin, vol. 64, pp. 1189-1204, Geological Society of America, New York, 1953. Harrington, Mark R. “A Camel-Hunters’ Camp in Nevada,” The Masterkey, vol. VIII, no. 1, pp. 22-24, Southwest Museum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1934. “A New Tule Springs Expedition,” The Masterkey, vol. XXIX, no. 4, pp. 112-114, Southwest Museum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1955. Libby, Willard F. “Chicago Radio-Carbon Dates,” Science, vol. 120, no. 3123, pp. 733-742, Lancaster, Pa., 1954. Renaud, Etienne B. “Archeological Survey of Southern Wyoming,” The Archeological Survey of the High Western Plains, Seventh Report, 16 pp., Denved University, Denver, Colorado, 1936. “The Black’s Fork Culture of Southwest Wyoming,” The Archeological Survey of the High Western Plains, Tenth Report, 54 pp., Denver Uni- versity, Denver, Colorado, 1938. “Further Research in Black's Fork Basin, Southwest Wyoming,” The Archeological Survey of the High Western Plains, Twelfth Report, 93 pp. Denver University, Denver, Colorado, 1940. “The Pebble Industry,” The WMasteion, VOLE ONEXe Noon pps 1465S Southwest Museum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1955. Rogers, Malcolm J. “Early Lithic Industries of the Lower Basin of the Colorado River and Adjacent Desert Areas,’ San Diego Museum Papers, no. 3, 75 pp. San Diego Museum of Man, San Diego, Calif., 1989. Simpson, George G. “A Nevada Fauna of Pleistocene Type and Its Probable Association With Man,” American Museum Novitates, no. 667, 10 pages, American Museum of Natural History, New York, 1933. Simpson, Ruth D. “A New Discovery of Early Core-and-Flake Tools in the Mohave Desert,’ The Masterkey, vol. XXVI, no 2, pp. 62-63, Southwest Mu- seum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1952. “A Friendly Critic Visits Texas Street,” The Masterkey, vol. XXVIII, no. 5, pp. 174-176, Southwest Museum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1954. “Hunting Elephants in Nevada,” The Masterkey, vol. XXIX, no, 4, pp. 114-116, Southwest Museum, Los Angeles, Calif., 1955. VSS 71 BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 *THE ORIGIN OF ELSINORE LAKE BASIN By Jorn F. MANN, Jr. University of Southern California INTRODUCTION Lake Elsinore, one of the few natural lakes in southern Cali- fornia, is in Riverside County, about 75 miles southeast of Los Angeles. For many years the basin of Lake Elsinore has been recognized as being of fault origin, occupying a downdropped block, or graben, within the Elsinore Fault Zone. William Morris Davis, who visited this area in the mid-1920’s, considered the escarpment along the southwest side of the lake as “a good ex- ample of a scarp in a maturely dissected and fan-bayed stage of its post-faulting evolution” (Davis, 1927). The narrow trough occupied by Lake Elsinore can be seen quite readily from the outcrop pattern of pre-Quarternary rocks shown on Plate 22 and from the aerial photograph (Plate 20). LATE PLEISTOCENE DRAINAGE The most recent evidence bearing on the origin of Elsinore lake basin has been derived from detailed geologic mapping and physiographic studies in an area to the southeast (Mann, 1955). In that report it was suggested that in the Late Pleistocene the major drainage flowed west across the Temecula Basin then northwest within the Elsinore Fault Zone to join the Santa Ana River. This ancient stream, named the Pauba River, flowed just northeast of the present position of the lake, through what is now the City of Elsinore (Plate 21). The Pauba River was prob- ably forced to flow near the northeast side of the graben because of the development of large alluvial fans formed by torrents de- bouching from the high ridge to the southwest. The same type of asymmetrical sedimentation within the Elsinore Fault Zone can be seen more clearly northwest of Elsinore where large fans developing from the southwest side of the graben have pushed Temescal Wash to the northeast; this wash is now superimposed on the basement rocks beyond the edge of the graben. 12 BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 PLATE 20 Aerial view of Lake Elsinore looking west. Taken in 1953 when the maximum depth of water was about 6 feet. (Courtesy Lake Elsinore Valley Chamber of Commerce. ) FORMATION OF THE LAKE BASIN Fairly late in the Pleistocene the Pauba River was beheaded and diverted through Temecula Gorge. At about the same time the lake basin was formed by downfaulting of a local block within the larger graben, which was downfaulted initially about the beginning of the Pleistocene. The faults along which the movements took place are shown on Plate 23. An important con- sequence of the faulting was the diversion of the San Jacinto River into the downfaulted area. Overflow from the lake basin followed essentially the same course as the present Temescal Wash. The diversion resulted in a wind gap (Plate 24). PROBABLE DESTRUCTION OF THE LAKE BASIN All lake basins, geologically speaking, are short-lived. De- struction of lake basins may take place by (1) filling, or (2) rim erosion. It is not possible to state how the eventual destruc- tion of Elsinore lake basin will come about; nevertheless, certain 73 BuLLetin, So, CAuie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. ~Parte2s L956 lines of reasoning can be presented which may bear on its ulti- mate fate, At present, little sediment is reaching the lake because essentially all the flow of the San Jacinto River and its tributaries must pass through Railroad Canyon Reservoir. Assuming that at some time in the future Railroad Canyon Dam will be destroyed, sediment will again reach Lake Elsinore. It is quite possible that destruction by rim erosion will occur in advance of filling. At point B (Plate 24), the present outlet, erosion must be accom- plished on hard basement rocks by water essentially devoid of suspended load, during those rare times when the lake over- flows. That erosion must necessarily proceed slowly. Further- more, the overflow must pass across a block which appears to be rising actively, and the amount of erosion required to destroy the lake basin may be much more than is now indicated. At point C, another low spot on the rim, erosion is proceeding at a slower rate than at the outlet. From all present indications, point A is where the eventual destruction of the rim will take place. Since some time during the late Pleistocene, when the drainage of the Temecula Besin was diverted through Temecula Gorge, a sub- sequent tributary (Murrieta Creek ) has been lengthening to the northwest within the Elsinore Fault Zone and now this drainage has reached to within a mile or so of the shoreline of the lake when full. The divide separating the Murrieta Creek drainage from the lake drainage is only a few tens of feet high and con- sists of soft alluvial deposits. Continued headward growth of Murrieta Creek seems assured and the indicated period of ero- sion required to destroy the lake basin is rather short. Upon completion of this diversion, the San Jacinto River, which is now a tributary of the Santa Ana River, will join the drainage of the Santa Margarita River. REFERENCES Bean, R. T. - 1955 - Geology of the San Jacinto and Elsinore Basins; Ap- pendix B to Bulletin 15, Santa Ana River Investigation; California Divi- sion of Water Resources (mimeographed ). Davis, W. M. - 1927 - The rifts of southern California; American Journal of Science, vol. 213, pp. 57-72. Engel, Rene - 1949 - Geologic Map of the Lake Elsinore Quadrangle; California Division of Mines Bulletin 146 (in press) (Map released in advance ). Mann, J. F., Jr. - 1955 - Geology of a portion of the Elsinore Fault Zone, California; California Division of Mines, Special Report 43, 22 pp. and maps. 74 BULLETIN, So. CaAir. Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ) / / 1 \ 1 \ t ‘ / SY yy Va H N , / S 4 Y a / Bee / We te a 7 SS Ko IS we g / ‘N 7 = ee SS pee Ny Nw ae S if NS a. / Sky SS / Cc Sy, xX >. ] SS = Ly To H SNe 2 Uf, m™N / Z 7 N a / N 7 y / ' 7 yj } ee / | Z / ) 7 J I A J 7 ao ) / Le 7 ae | i \ y f i \ ) Us y / ie / i / Z/ / ni YE KL / / I 7 a / a - / 3 Le / 4 - / CZ Yo | i UY 2 { PLATE 21 Suggested drainage in the Lake Elsinore area during Late Pleistocene time (before the lake basin was formed ). 79 Butierin, So. Cause, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 % ts "LF “a PPMENT .,. KK KKK EF amt OUTCROP LIMITS OF PRE- QUATERNARY ROCKS PLATE 22 Distribution of Quaternary and pre-Quaternary rocks in the vicinity of Lake Elsinore. 76 BuLLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 KNOWN FAULT, ACCURATELY LOCATED KNOWN FAULT, APPROXIMATELY LOCATED FAULT CONCEALED BY ALLUVIUM PROBABLE FAULT FAULT POSITIONS /N PART FROM ENGEL (1949) AND BEAN (1955) PLATE 23 Fault lines which have had a part in the formation of the basin of Lake Elsinore. Ue BuLLetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 + x xr Re KK KR $ + # # “ + “1 MURRIETA CREEK * DRAINAGE PLATE 24 Present drainage pattern in the vicinity of Lake Elsinore, show- ing the postulated wind gap and the points where the lake basin may be destroyed by rim erosion. 78 BULLETIN, So. CAaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 2 NOTES ON TWO ANOMURAN CRUSTACEANS NEW TO CALIFORNIA WATERS’ By JANET Haic Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California Among the decapod crustaceans in the collections of the Allan Hancock Foundation are two species of Anomura, collected off the California coast, which have never been reported from that state. The specimens were taken by the Foundation’s research vessels VELERO III and VELERO IV in the period between 1941 and 1955. It seems advisable at this time to record these additions to the California crustacean fauna. GALATHEIDAE Munidopsis depressa Faxon Munidopsis depressa Faxon, 1893, p. 189; 1895, p. 96, pl. 22, figs. 2, 2a-b. The holotype was collected by the ALBatross off Tres Marias Islands, Mexico, at 680 fathoms. This appears to be the only specimen on record. Six specimens were taken by the VELERO IV off southern Cali- fornia from four stations between Santa Catalina Island and the mainland, at 400-450 fathoms. The carapace of the largest male measured 20.3 mm in length, exceeding the 19 mm given by Faxon for the holotype. A specimen from one of the Hancock stations has already been listed by Hartman (1955, p. 95). Following is Schmitt’s (1921, p. 168) key to the California species of Munidopsis, modified to include M. depressa. 1. Abdomen unarmed. Eye-stalks spined above. Rostrum acuminate, laterally unarmed. Chelipeds hairy. verrilli Benedict 1Hancock Foundation Contribution No. 177. This study was supported _in part by a grant from the National Science Foundation. The author wishes to thank the administration of the Allan Hancock Foundation for the use of facilities, and Dr. John S. Garth for reading the manuscript. 79 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 Ii. Abdomen armed with spines or tubercles. A. Eye-stalks spined above. Dorsal armature of abdomen not confined to median line. Chelipeds hairy. Rostrum lateraly spined, hystrix Faxon B. Eye-stalks not spined. Dorsal armature of abdomen con- fined to median line. 1. Rostrum not armed with lateral spines. a. Anterior margin of carapace with a small, serrated lobe on either side of base of rostrum behind ocular peduncle; lateral margins arcuate. Chelipeds hairy. aspera (Henderson ) b. Anterior margin of carapace straight, at right angles ‘to lateral margins; lateral margins straight. Cheli- peds not hairy. quadrata Faxon 2. Rostrum laterally spined. Carapace with a row of 4 large median spines; segments 2, 3, and 4 of abdomen each with a large median spine. depressa Faxon PORCELLANIDAE Polyonyx quadriungulatus Glassell Polyonyx quadriungulatus Glassell, 1935, p. 93, pl. 9. The type specimens of this species were collected at Estero de la Punta Banda, Baja California, Mexico, about 65 miles south of the California border. Steinbeck and Ricketts (1941, p. 458) reported it from E] Mogote in the Gulf of California. Be- sides its California material, the Hancock Foundation collections contain specimens from several localities on both sides of the Baja California peninsula. ‘The Vetero II and VEtero IV took nine specimens from six southern California stations, at Santa Rosa, Santa Cruz, and Santa Catalina Islands. The species was found on two occasions in Chaetopterus tubes, this being the most common habitat for the genus as a whole; three times it was recovered apparently free- living (with sand and mud bottom recorded in one case); and on the sixth occasion it was taken from kelp holdfasts. The depth range was 2-25 fathoms. The genus, as well as the species, is new to California waters. 80 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 The only other species of Polyonyx reported from the west American coast is P. nitidus Lockington (1878, p. 405), from Baja California, exact locality unknown. It is unfortunate that Lock- ington’s type (the only known specimen ) is no longer extant, pre- sumably having been destroyed in the San Francisco earthquake and fire of 1906, for a comparison of the two species would be highly desirable. Glassell distinguished P. eee from P. nitidus on the basis of three characters: (1), hands unequal, instead of equal as in P. nitidus; (2), carpus of chela two-thirds as wide as long, instead of “about twice as long as wide’; (3), dactyli of ambulatory legs with four unguicles, instead of with three to five as in P. nitidus. All the other characters given in Lockington’s brief description apply equally well to either form. The California specimens varied greatly in the second char- acter, having carpi from 53 per cent to 67 per cent as wide as long; therefore this distinction does not appear to be valid. Probably not much weight should be given to the variation in the number of unguicles on the dactyli of the walking legs re- ported by Lockington for P. nitidus. The unguicles are not always easy to see even with the modern binocular microscope, and the counts made by Lockington may perhaps be attributed partly to weaker magnification. In one of the California specimens exam- ined, only three unguicles were present on one dactyl but it could be seen under high magnification that the fourth had been broken off. In several cases, also, two distal unguicles were parnally grown together and appeared almost as one. Thus it seems to the writer that two of the characters on which Glassell based his new species are of only questionable validity. The first character mentioned, however. that of the structure of the hands, immediately sets the two forms apart. Lockington stated twice that the hands were equal in his species, but in P. quadriungulatus they are quite obviously different. It appears that the two species must be kept distinct on this basis alone, at least until such time as future collecting in the Baja California and Gulf of California area reveals more examples of P. nitidus. Sl BULLETIN, So, Cautir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 LITERATURE CITED Faxon, W. ~ 1898. Reports on the dredging operations off the west coast of Central I . . I i. . . America to the Galapagos, to the west coast of Mexico, and in the Gulf of California... by the U.S Fish Commission steamer “Albatross,” during 1891... VI. Preliminary descriptions of new species of Crustacea. Bul. Mus. Compar. Zool, Harvard, 24: 149-220. 1895. Reports on an exploration off the west coasts of Mexico, Central and South America, and off the Galapagos Islands . . . by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer “Albatross,” during 1891... XV. The stalk-eyed Crustacea. Mem. Mus. Compar. Zool. Harvard, 18: 1-292, pls. A-K, 1-57. Glessell, S. A. 1935. New or little known crabs from the Pacific coast of northern Mexico. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., 8: 91-106, pls. 9-16, Hartman, Olga 1955. Quantitative survey of the benthos of San Pedro Basin, southern California. Part [. Preliminary results. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped., 19: 1-185, pls. 1-7. Lockington, W. N. 1878. Remarks upon the Porcellanidea of the west coast of North America. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., (5) 2: 394-406. Schmitt, W. L. 1921. The marine decapod Crustacea of California. Univ. California Pubs. Zool., 23: 1-470, pls. 1-50, text figs. 1-165. Steinbeck, J., and E. F. Ricketts 1941. Sea of Cortez, a leisurely journal of travel and research. (x) 598, pls. 1-280. New York, Viking Press. BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON PTILOTHRIX SUMICHRASTI (CRESSON ) AND SOME RELATED GROUPS OF EMPHORINE BEES (Hymenoptera, Anthophoridae )' By EK. G. Linstey, J. W. MacSwatin anv Ray F. Suir University of California, Berkeley During the months of July and August, 1954, at several lo- calities in the vicinity of Fresnillo, Zacatecas, Mexico, opportu- nities were afforded to observe the habits of Ptilothrix sumich- rasti (Cresson)* end to make comparisons with Melitoma eug- lossoides Lepeletier & Serville’ and several species of Diadasia’. These observations permit further generalizations on the bio- logical characteristics of emphorine bees (Linsley, MacSwain and Smith, 1952a) as well as comparisons between Ptilothrix and Emphor on the basis of the extensive literature on Emphor bom- biformis (Cresson) (Robertson, 1890, et seq.; Grossbeck, 1911; Nichols, 1913; Rau, 1930; Michener, 1947; and others). More detailed accounts of the habits of Melitoma ‘euglossoides and the Mexican Diadasia will be published elsewhere. Brotocy oF Ptilothrix sumichrasti (Cresson ) LocauitiEs, Three localities were involved in the observations on Ptilothrix sumichrasti. The first was 17 miles north of Fres- nillo, Zacatecas, where notes were made by J. W. MacSwain and E. I. Schlinger between July 14 and 16, 1954. The other sites were 1.5 and 9 miles south of Fresnillo, respectively, where ob- servations were made by the authors during the first and second weeks of August. All three sites were characterized by flat, hard- packed, barren areas suitable for nesting, nearby sources of water, and an abundance of Ipomoea longifolia Benth’, and J. pringlei Gray’, the pollen plants utilized by P. sumichrasti in this part of Mexico. 1 The observations reported here are part of a series of studies made possible by a grant-in-aid from the Associates in cop ical Biogeography, University of California. 2 Identified by C. D. Michener. This species was inadvertently referred to by Linsley, MacSwain and Smith (1954: 264). as Emphor bombiformis (Cresson), a species not known to occur in Mexico * Identified by C. D. Michener. 4 Identified by P. i. Timberlake. » Identified by Helen K. Sharsmith. 83 BuLLetin, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 Ptilothrix sumichrasti was described from “Mexico” by Cres- son (1878) as Melissodes sumichrasti. The authors do not have data on the general distribution of the species®. Presumably it occurs throughout much of Mexico in areas of summer rainfall where Ipomoea and suitable conditions for nesting exist together, although we did not encounter it except near Fresnillo. Nest construction. In the vicinity of Fresnillo, P. swmich- rasti was found nesting in flat or gently sloping surfaces in areas where the soil was hard-packed. Excavation of burrows in these sites proved difficult, and required a mattock or chisel’. P. sumichrasti digs by moistening the soil and cutting away the dampened portion. Female bees were observed taking water from five sources. One was a shallow well, from six to eight feet in diameter, with the water surface three or four feet below the ground level. An- other was a small pool in a sandy wash, which dried up during the few days that it was being observed. A third source consisted of several rather extensive marshy pools beside a highway which differed from the others in having considerable vegetation grow- ing up from the water. The remaining sources were a ‘small shallow reservoir and a series of small potholes eroded out of the adobe soil in the drainage from the reservoir. These last were visited by the bees more frequently than the larger reser- voir. In each of these cases the water was still and was located immediately adjacent to the nesting sites. When visiting a water source the female alights on the sur- face, usually eway from the edge, and obtains a load of water in from 4 to 6 seconds. The majority of the visits observed by us were between 5 and 54 seconds in duration. When resting on the water the hind legs are held backwards and outwards from the body, the mesothoracic legs are placed forward and away from the body and the fore legs are extended slightly forward in front of the head and to the side. Females appeared to have no diffi- culty in alighting on the water or taking off, and no drowned individuals were found. Information as to the times during the day when females were engaged in taking water for nest con- struction is fregmentary and no attempt was made to follow the daily pattern of an individual female. One water source which was under observation from 7:30 to 10:00 a.m. was not visited by bees during this period. However, in one case a female was see _using water to begin a burrow at 11:30 a.m., in another at 12:25 p.m. The latest that we recorded bees taking water was _® However, Michener (in litt) found this species nesting about 3 miles west of Rachuca, Hidalgo, Mexico, under conditions similar to those described here. 7 Adults, larvae and casts of burrows and cells have been deposited in the collection of the California Insect Survey, University of California, Berkeley, California. 84 BULLetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 3 p.m. However, many females were still engaged in this activity at that time and it is likely that they continued for an hour or more. Excavation consists of alternately moistening the hard-packed soil and cutting it away to form moist mud pellets. The first pel- lets excavated are used to construct a very short turret, 3 to 5 mm. in length, which is fashioned by passing the mud pellets back to the hind legs and forcing them into position with ab- dominal pressure. The female rotates around the developing turret so that upon completion all parts of the lip are at a uniform height. The inside of the turret is smooth, the outside pebbled (fig. 1). The lip is also smooth and it is beveled so that the en- trance diameter is slightly larger than that of the remainder of the turret and that of the main burrow. When the turret has been completed, additional mud balls are brought to the lip and thrown out in the characteristic man- ner which has been reported for Emphor bombiformis. During this procedure the bee emerges backwards from the turret, holds the mud pellet against the lip with the ventral apex of the ab- domen, and kicks the pellet with the hind legs. Bees were seen to throw pellets as far as 13 cm. from the entrance and, in a few cases, pellets were found on the surface of the ground at con- siderably greater distances (e.g., 23 cm.). The pellets are thrown out in such a manner that they are rather uniformly distributed in various directions from the entrance. From one to four pellets result from the excavation activities between trips for water (most commonly two or three ). There was no correlation between the number of pellets produced and the stage involved in the construction of the main burrow shaft. Nor was the number of pellets correlated with the length of time spent in the burrow between trips for water. This last reflects the stage of construc- tion of the main shaft. For example, a female was timed for the first eighteen excavation periods from the start of her burrow and spent the following times in the burrow: the first six periods averaged 46 seconds (range 22 to 69), total 17 pellets; the next six periods averaged 76 seconds (range 62 to 86), total 17 pellets; and the last six periods averaged 92 seconds (range 34 to 98), total 13 pellets. Conversely the time spent on trips for water decreased as follows: the first six trips averaged 36 seconds (range 18 to 70); the next six trips averaged 23 seconds (range 16 to 41); and the last six trips averaged 20 seconds (range 17 to 23). This female also ceased construction activity twice for extended periods but these are not included in the above sum- mary. The first of these occurred after two round trips for water and the female remained away for nine minutes, then returned, and spent five seconds in the burrow before flying off for water to resume excavation. The second period was after eight addi- 85 BULLETIN, So. Cautir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 PLATE 25 Figure 1. Burrow of Ptilothrix sumichrasti (Cresson) (X 1%). Figure 2. Plugged burrow entrance of P. sumichrasti (Cresson) (X 1%). Figure 3. Pollen mass and egg, in situ, of P.-sumichrasti (Cresson) (X 7). tional trips for water. This time the female was gone for seven minutes and fourteen seconds and after returning, she remained in the burrow for seven minutes. The trips for water after each of these periods was also longer than average, being 50 seconds after the first and 41 seconds after the second period. Following the last eight trips the female was gone for another extended period and our observations were terminated before she returned. 86 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 Presumably, these three long periods were spent in taking nectar and resting. Excavation of the burrow shaft progresses rapidly (the form of the completed burrow is indicated in figure 1). The female referred to above excavated to a depth of 13 mm. in fourteen minutes, in addition to fashioning a turret. In an elapsed time of 53 minutes, of which approximately 24 were spent in other ac- tivities, (see above ), she had reached a depth of 35 mm. Another female constructed a turret and dug to a depth of 82 mm. in a two and one-half hour period. Since the depths of the various burrows excavated by us ranged from 65 to 115 mm., it is likely that the entire burrow shaft is constructed in a single day. How- ever, our data indicate that the construction of the first cell re- quires an additional day. The diameter of the main shaft was found to vary from slightly more than 4 mm. to 5 mm. The burrows deviate only slightly from the vertical and have a conspicuous enlargement at the bottom of the main shaft just above the first cell. Similar but slightly smaller enlargements are constructed in lateral tun- nels leading to additional cells. Nothing quite comparable to these enlargements has been found by us in the tunnels of other anthophorid bees. When a burrow with a single unprovisioned cell is filled with Plaster of Paris, the resulting cast suggests two cells in series. The upper enlargement probably permits the bee to turn around in its burrow. The cells of Ptilothrix, like those of most anthophorids, are urn-shaped externally and are constructed within a larger cavity so that they can be removed intact. External measurements of twenty cells varied from 17.5 mm. to 22 mm. in length, and a maximum diameter of 14.5 mm. Internal measurements were from 13 to 15.3 mm. in length and from 9.5 to 11 mm. in diameter. The first cell is constructed at the bottom of the main burrow shaft and frequently this was the only cell found. More com- monly, an additional one to four cells were placed around the first cell as indicated in figure 1. However, in several burrows, cells had been constructed off of the burrow leading to the second cell rather than off the main shaft. All of the cells found by us were vertical. With the exception of the cap, the inner surface is smooth but does not have a waterproof lining. The outer sur- face of the cap is smooth and concave, the inner surface rough and spirally arranged. The pollen mass (fig. 3) is cup-shaped but with the upper surface convex, and usually fills from two- thirds to four-fifths of the cell space. There is no surface liquid and the pollen mass can be removed intact. The egg is placed at the bottom of the cell under the pollen mass and is imbedded in it for about one-fourth its diameter. These features appear to 87 BuLLetin, So. CaLtir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 be characteristic of the emphorine bees (cf. Linsley, MacSwain and Smith, 1952b, plate 9, fig. 1). A single egg, preserved in alcahol, measures 5.5 mm. in length and 0.9 mm. in diameter. The chorion is minutely and densely reticulate. The reticulations are elevated and darkly pigmented, the enclosed areas about one and one-half times as long as broad, with the long axis coincid- ing with that of the egg. Most of the enclosed areas are hex- agonal, a few pentagonal. They are largest toward the middle of the egg where they are mostly about 55 » in length. We have found a similar network of fine thickenings in the eggs of other emphorine bees (Melitoma euglossoides Lep. & Serv., Diadasia mexicana Timberlake, D. diminuta (Cresson), D. consociata Timberlake ), and in the apids (Apis mellifera Linnaeus, Bombus vosnesenskii Radoszkowski ), but not in Micranthophora, Nomia, or Pseudopanurgus, the only other bee genera of which we now have eggs available for study. It would appear desirable to define more precisely the occurence of this feature throughout the Apoidea. DEVELOPMENT. No attempt was made to rear P. sumichrasti through its developmental stages. However, some of the activi- ties of the different stages were observed and others were recon- structed from evidence found in the cells. After hatching, the first instar larva cuts a deep channel in the side of the pollen mass and progresses toward the top. This channel-like method of feeding continues eround the pollen mass in this and the sub- sequent larval instars and transforms the pollen mass into a pro- gressively smaller sphere. Two morphologial developments of the larvae (fig. 5) are apparently associated with this unusually active feeding pattern. The long slender form of the feeding instars presumably facilitates their passage between the pollen mass and the cell wall. Also the thoracic and first eight abdominal segments have prominent, backward-projecting dorsal elevations which, together with a somewhat similar development of the ninth abdominal sternum, apparently are used in progression around the pollen mass. When the pollen mass has been completely consumed, de- fecation and cocoon formation take place. During these activities, the unruptured pollen grains which have passed through the larva, cre applied in a layer over the entire inner surface of the cell. This layer of excrement is not uniform. On the walls of the cell it is four to six pollen grains thick. At the bottom of the cell the layer is slightly thicker and at the top it is composed of short fecal pellets. Although these pellets are distinct, they ad- here closely to each other and cannot be separated. After appli- cation of the fecal material, a thin transparent cocoon is con- structed upon this new wall. The cocoon consists of a relatively few long strands of silk which adhere to the pollen grains, and 88 | BULLETIN, So. Cautir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 PLATE 26 Figure 4. Young larva of Diadasia (Dasiapis) ochracea (Cockerell). Figure 5. Half-grown larva of Ptilothrix sumichrasti (Cresson). Figure 6. Full- grown larva of Melitoma euglossoides Lepeletier and Serville. Figure 7. Anal aspect of young larva of Diadasia (Dasiapis) ochracea (Cockerell). Figure 8. Anal aspect of full-grown larva of Diadasia (Diadasia) enavata (Cresson). Figure 9. Anal aspect of full-grown larva of Diadasia (Coquil- lettapis) consociata Timberlake. Figure 10. Anal aspect of half-grown larva of Ptilothrix. sumichrasti (Cresson). Figure 11. Anal aspect of full-grown larva of Melitoma euglossoides Lepeletier and Serville. 89 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 a complete inner papery layer. When this inner layer is examined microscopically it is seen to consist of silken strands which are partially coalesced and ribbon-like. As seen from the inner sur- face, the cocoon appears to be a thin varnish-like layer insulating the larva from its fecal material. Further morphological modif- cations of the larva are epparently associated with the disposi- tion of this material. The anal opening (fig. 10) is almost dorsal on the tenth abdominal segment while the surrounding area is elevated, fattened, more heavily sclerotized than the remainder of the segment end ornamented with a pattern of small spines. The ambulatory modifications are most evident in the early in- stars, the anal development in the last larval instar prior to its resting stage. In the somewhat flacid overwintering larva both of these modifications are somewhat masked. Similar modifica- tions of the anal area occur in other emphorine larvae available for study and several of these are here illustrated (figs. 7-11). Ambulatory modifications are also illustrated for Diadasia (fig. 4) and Melitoma (fig. 6). Full grown larvae and pupae of the previous season were found in mid-July. At the same time cells of the current season contained only eggs or very young larvae. Thus it would appear that pupation occurs over a considerable period of time. EMERGENCE AND ADULT AcTrviTIEs. The earliest emergence of P. sumichrasti must have occurred near the first of July and the number of overwintering and transforming larvae found by us suggest that emergence would have continued until mid-August or early September, if the pupal period of P. swmichrasti is ap- proximate to that of other anthophorids which we have studied (i.e., 20 to 30 days). Males probably appear somewhat earlier in the season, than the females, judging from the preponderance of female pupae found during excavation. Copulation was not observed but undoubtedly occurs in the Ipomoea flowers. Males were not encountered about the nesting sites but commonly were seen flying from flower to flower and entering those which contained other bees. It is not clear where the males spend the night. We did not find them in old burrows and only a small fraction of those in the area spent the night in flowers. Detailed data on cell provisioning was not obtained because the observations made in mid-July were hampered by overcast and rainy weather and those in mid-August were made when the flowers had practically disappeared. On July 15, new flowers commenced opening at about 6 a.m. and shortly after sunrise, at 6:55 a.m., the heads of several females appeared at the en- trances to their burrows. However, heavy clouds on the horizon 90 —— BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 obscured the sun and light intermittent rains fell in the nesting area, and these bees did not come out. Under more favorable conditions P. sumichrasti probably would have been active on the flowers at this time. Even under these conditions, one female was seen visiting the flowers at 7:30 a.m., only five minutes after a male had been seen flying in the vicinity. At 7:45 another fe- male was timed visiting five flowers in two minutes and twenty- five seconds over a linear distance of about 10 feet, after which she flew rapidly away with what eppeared to be a full load of pollen. Three additional females were timed at 8:05, 8:15 and 8:32 a.m. as follows: the first visited six flowers in two minutes and five seconds but only obtained pollen from three; the second visited ten flowers in three minutes and twenty seconds but ap- parently collected pollen from only four of these; the third took pollen from three or four of eleven flowers in three minutes and forty-five seconds. During these observations the rain continued and by 8:30 a.m., considerable water had accumulated at the base of the flowers. The bees spent from 20 to 45 seconds (mean 30) for visits in each flower from which pollen was gathered, and a considerable portion of this period was spent on the pistil packing the pollen on the legs. From these limited data and what it known of the flowering habits of Ipomoea longifolia, it is ap- parent that pollen is gathered only in the early morning, that the number of flowers required to furnish a full load is few, and only sufficient pollen for a single cell can be gathered by the bee in any one day. Female Ptilothrix undoubtedly construct and provision sev- eral burrows during the season, but the factors which determine the number of cells associated with each burrow are not known. However, after provisioning from one to five cells the female plugs the burrow. There are two plugs involved. The inner plug is just within the entrance and extends from 1 to 1.5 cm. down into the burrow. It is loosely constructed and may actually be made up of a number of different layers. The surface plug is a compact layer approximately 0.7 cm. in length and is concave at the surface as illustrated (fig. 2). The process of sealing a bur- row was not observed but the turret is demolished and presum- ably is used for constructing the plug.Whether or not some of the scattered pellets from the original excavation are also used remains to be determined. EFFECTS OF PHYSICAL FACTORS. As previously mentioned, Ptilothrix sumichrasti is apparently restricted in its distribution by a combination of soil requirements (bare, flat, hard-packed ), availability of water, and presence of its pollen flower. The weather in the vicinity of Fresnillo during the months of July through September, when the adult bees are most active, 91 BuLLEeTIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 is extremely variable. Heavy rains and overcast days were com- mon during the early part of the 1954 season. However, this species appears to adjust to all but the most severe weather con- ditions and, as was noted earlier, will gather pollen even during light rain. Heavy rains cause the bees to return to their burrows where they remain just inside, facing the entrance. In the face of very heavy rainfall the females retreat down the burrow, turn around and back up to the entrance and block it with the ab- domen. This activity pattern, together with the erect turret may have a high survival value for the species in an area where tor- rential cloudbursts may cause floods which, however, are of short duration. However, the use of water in excavation also indicates adaptation to the drier conditions which prevailed at other times. FLOWER RELATIONSHIPS. As with all oligolectic bees, the flower relationships are particularly critical. These include not only the phenological relationship between the bee and the pol- len plant, but, in addition, competition with other insect species for the pollen and nectar. Ipomoea longifolia Benth. was the most abundant species of morning-glory in the areas studied and the only pollen source utilized by P. sumichrasti during the first portion of the season. House (1908) records distribution of this plant as from Okla- homa and Texas to Arizona end south into Mexico to Queretaro in Baja California and to Aguas Calientes in Central Mexico. The species is characterized, in part, by having trailing stems up to 10 feet long; elongate, narrow, entire leaves, and large, white, pink-throated corollas. The flowers, according to our ob- servations, open in the early morning, usually shortly before sun- rise, and last but a single day. At the site north of Fresnillo, in mid-July, individual plants were producing from a few to a dozen flowers each day. At the same time, there were some al- most mature fruits on several plants. On August 6, 1.5 miles south of Fresnillo, very few flowers were opening each day al- though the bloom in this area had been judged as comparable to the other when both areas were seen in fal July. On the later date a survey was made of the Ipomoea plants in a triangular area of approximately 7500 square feet. There were 44 plants of I. longifolia and 19 plants of I. pringlei. The longifolia plants were classified for each of the following characteristics: maxi- mum diameter of plant, opposite diemeter, number of maturing fruits, number of old flowers that had failed to produce fruits and had fallen from plants, number of old flowers which were presumably from the previous day, number of new flowers, and, finally, the number of buds. These data are revealing in a num- ber of particulars. First, 14 of the smaller and presumably youngest plants had not produced any floral parts. The other 30 92 BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Volmbo sm bante2a L956 plants exhibited a wide range of size and productivity. To sum- marize, 16 or approximately 53 percent of these plants had a potential productivity of 14 to 95 flowers and a total of 730 blooms or 13 per cent of the total flower production (5665) of the 30 plants; 8 or 27 per cent had 118 to 274 flowers and a total of 1486 flowers or 26 per cent of the total while the remaining 6 plants or 20 per cent had 355 to 885 flowers and a total of 3449 flowers or 63 per cent of the total. The latter statistics clearly show the dependence of P. stmichrasti in this area on a relatively small number of plant individuals. On the day of the survey there were only 15 new flowers in the survey area, 18 wilted flowers from the previous day, and 190 buds, all of which were associated with eleven of the thirty plants. Thus it seems reason- able to assume that this plant species would have been available to the bees for approximately two weeks more. However, at this same time, the second species of Ipomoea, I. pringlei, was in an early blooming stage and was being visited by considerable numbers of bees. Ipomoea pringlei Gray was abundant in only one of the three areas studied but was visited by P. swmichrasti in all three lo- calities. The distribution of this plant, according to House (1908) and H. K. Sharsmith (in litt.), is considerably less than that of I. longifolia being known from the States of Chihuahua, Coa- huila, Durango, and Zacatecas in Mexico. The most northern of these records is Santa Clara Canyon in Chihuahua; the southern- most is 9 miles south of Fresnillo in Zacatecas. This species is a low, dense bush, 2 to 4 feet tall with erect, green branches, the leaves are pinnately divided into filiform divisions, and the cor- olla is reddish-purple with a white center. In the Ipomoea sur- vey area, (referred to above) only 8 of the 19 plants had started blooming but all of them had large numbers of buds in many stages of development. Only a single maturing fruit was found. Unfortunately, the erect and dense growth characteristics did not permit recording figures compzrable to those taken for I. lon- gifolia. However, the plant which had a maturing fruit also had 15 old flowers, 27 new flowers and more than 35 buds. This was by far the most advanced plant, and the maximum number of new flowers on any other plant was 6. The time at which flowers of this species opened is approximately the same as for I. longi- folia but it was not positively established whether flowers sur- vived more than one day. A number of other insect species were competing with P. sumichrasti for the pollen of both species of Ipomoea. The more significant of these were the several kinds of lepidopterous larvae which were abundant in mid-July; an emphorine bee, Melitoma euglossoides Lepeletier and Serville; a scarab beetle, Euphoria 93 BULLETIN, So. CAuiIr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 basalis Gory and Perch*; and a blister beetle, Lytta variabilis Dugés. The scarab was abundant in all areas where Ptilothrix was studied, Melitoma was most numerous in the locality 1.5 miles south of Fresnillo. The nature of the competition furnished by these two insects and the apparent reasons for the relative abundance of M. euglossoides are discussed below. Euphoria basalis is a common cetonid in Central Mexico. Casey (1915) states that it is abundant from Durango to Mexico City, and Sallé (1833) reports its association with squash flowers. We found this beetle in Cucurbita flowers at several localities, but not as abundantly as in the blossoms of Ipomoea longifolia and I. pringlei, where up to six individuals occurred in a single flower. Shortly after the opening of new flowers each morning the scarabs enter them, remain eating the floral parts throughout the day, and spend the night within the wilted blossom. On clear mornings the bees undoubtedly gather their pollen before the beetles transfer to the new flowers, but on overcast or rainy mornings, the beetles may invade and destroy the pollen before the bees can gather it. It is possible that the fact that only half of the flowers in the survey area produced fruits may reflect the activity of Euphoria and other less common insects of similar habit. However, it is likely that a large percentage of damaged flowers would have been visited by Ptilothrix sumichrasti or Melitoma euglossoides before being injured. Melitoma euglossoides was the only other bee species ob- served in Ipomoea flowers and unquestionably it competes with P. sumichrasti for available pollen. It has a much wider distri- bution than P. sumichrasti and wes found in all areas where the latter species occurred. Like Ptilothrix, it gathers pollen only from Ipomoea, but we found it associated with a greater number of species of this plant. In contrast to P. sumichrasti, this bee nests only in vertical surfaces, such as banks or adobe dwellings, and foreges over greater distances for water and pollen. The relative abundance of these two species is apparently controlled by the availability of suitable nesting sites. Wherever adequate sites for both species occurred, M. euglossoides was the domi- nant species. For example, 17 miles north of Fresnillo the only bank was a small one formed by the construction of a drainage culvert under the highway, although there were extensive areas of bare, flat or gently sloping, ground. Here the proportion of the two species was about 10 to | in favor of Ptilothrix. The op- posite was true 1.5 miles south of Fresnillo where there were both extensive banks on both sides of a stream bed and large areas of flat, barren ground. Thus it would appear that the num- 8 Identified by L. W. Saylor. 94 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 bers of P. suwmichrasti are influenced not only by its own require- ments but by the presence or absence of suitable nesting sites for M. euglossoides. PARASITES AND PREDATORS. Two entomophagous species of in- sects were associated with the cells of P. swmichrasti in the Fres- nillo area. One was the meloid beetle, Lytta variabilis Dugés, of which an unemerged adult was captured in its resting cell ad- jacent to the destroyed cell of P. sumichrasti from the previous year. However, further excavation of old burrows did not yield many cells which had been destroyed by Lytta nor were the beetles numerous in any of the three sites although present at all of them. Indirect evidence suggests that an undetermined species of Bomyliidae destroys a greater percentage of the immature bees than does Lytta variabilis. The bombyliid larvae were found in some cells, shed pupal skins were observed projecting from many old burrows, and adults were seen ovipositing in burrows of the current season. It is likely that Ptilothrix, through the development of such characteristics as a solitary nesting habit, the construction by the female of several burrows with only a few cells each, and possibly also the production of a turret at the entrance, has re- duced the influence of parasites and predators. These adapta- tions, on the other hand, have probably reduced the reproductive potential of the species. GENERIC BIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS AMONG EMPHORINE BEES We have called attention previously (Linsley, MacSwain and Smith, 1952a) to some of the biological generic characters among emphorine bees’. Some of these may now be supplemented and all are summarized below. No features are known to us to sug- gest that Ptilothrix and Emphor are generically distinct on bio- logical grounds. (Moure, 1947, apparently reached much the same conclusion on morphological grounds.) P. swmichrasti col- lects pollen from Ipomoea (Convolvulaceae ) and Tmphor bom- biformis from Hibiscus (Malvaceae), but judging from the situ- ation in Diadasia this would appear to be a specific character. ® For discussions of morphological generic characters among the Emphorinae, see Michener (1944, 1954). 95 BULLETIN, So, CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 In all other features mentioned below the two species are essen- tionally identical'”. Nestinc siruation. Ptilothrix stimichrasti (and Emphor) generally prefer flat, hard-packed ground, devoid of vegetation. Diadasia species usually select flat, moderately well-packed ground, adjacent to sparsely placed vegetation. Melitoma uti- lizes cliffs and vertical banks (including soil blocks in uprooted trees). This characteristic is a specific rather than a generic feature in Anthophora and may prove to be so here. Usk OF WATER IN EXCAVATION. Ptilothrix, Emphor and Meli- toma regularly collect water to moisten the soil during excava- tion of the burrows; Diadasia species do not. Ptilothrix (and Emphor) alight on the surface of ponds, well out from the mar- gin. Melitoma species also gather water from the surface but alight near to the land and are most commonly observed along the margins of running water. EXCAVATED MATERIALS. The material excavated by Ptilothrix (and Emphor) and Melitoma during burrow excavation is in the form of mud pellets which are kicked out of the turret open- ing. In Diadasia loose soil is pushed out as a tumulus or carried and dropped at a distance from the nest. Turrets. Ptilothrix, Emphor and Melitoma construct turrets with the first soil excavated. In Ptilothrix (and Emphor) the turrets are vertical, short, entire and symmetrical; in Melitoma, elongate, curved, split. The species of Diadasia build their turret more slowly and do not appear to initiate it with the first earth excavated. The turret in this case is elongate and entire and may be straight or curved. Ptilothrix (and Emphor) break down the turret and use it to seal the completed, provisioned burrow. BuRROW SHAFT AND CELLS. The burrow shaft of Ptilothrix (and Emphor) is shallow and vertical, with few cells; of Melitoma, more or less horizontal, with many cells; of Diadasia, vertical, straight or sinuous, with many cells. In Ptilothrix (and Emphor ) the cells are arranged singly; in Melitoma and Diadasia they are arranged serially. POLLEN FLOWERS. The Emphorinae as a group exhibit a high degree of oligolecty at the generic and specific levels. However, Emphor, Ptilothrix and Melitoma visit large deep-flowered mal- vaceous or convolyuleceous plants (Hibiscus, Ipomoea, and Ipomoea respectively), Diadasia mostly but not exclusively smaller flowered or shallower flowered plants, such as Sphaeral- cea, Sidalcea, Sida. 10 These generalizations are based upon relatively complete data for one species each of Ptilothrix and Emphor, two of Melitoma, and eight of Diadasia. Less extensive data available for other species are in agreement. 96 BuLLetTin, £o. Carir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 SUBFAMILY BIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS OF EMPHORINE BEES Information now available mzkes possible certain tentative comparisons between the biological characters of the Emphor- inae™, Anthophorinae and Eucerinae’’. Sufficient data are not now available to us to permit comparison with the Exomalop- sinae or Hemisiinae. Turrets. Turrets are characteristic of the active nests of all of the Emphorine bees which we have studied, although in Dia- dasia they are sometimes blown or washed away. Among the anthophorine bees, some species construct turrets, some do not, although in our experience the habit is less prevalent than many writers appear to have believed. We have not found turrets at the entrance of the burrow of any North American eucerine bee but they have been reported for the European Eucera (Friese, 1923). Ceuts. The cells are arranged serially in the Anthophorinae, serially or singly in the Emphorinae, and apparently always singly in the Eucerinae. The external shape is urn-like in the Emphorinae and Anthophorinae, elongate-oval in the Eucerinae. The water-proof lining is thick in the Anthophorinae, thin in the Eucerinae, and very thin or lacking in the Emphorinae. In the Anthophorinae the inside of the cap is also lined, not so in the Eucerinae and Emphorinae. CELL provisions. The Emphorinae provision their cells with a dry convex pollen mass, the Eucerineze with very moist pollen (Eucera is said to work the food material into a ball, our genera pack the pollen into the base of the cell and cover it with a thin layer of nectar, which may be mixed partially with the surface pollen), end the Anthophorinae with pollen topped with liquid (concentrated nectar? ). In this last group the cells have a char- acteristic strong fermenting odor not evident in those of the Em- phorinae or Eucerinae. PositIon OF EGG. The eucerine bees insert or float their eggs on the top of the pollen mass, the anthophorines float them on a surface liquid, and the emphorines place them beneath a pollen mass. LarvaAL FEEDING. In the Anthophorinae and Eucerinae the larvae feed from the top of the food mass; in the Emphorinae 11 See also Linsley, MacSwain and Smith, 1952a. 12 See also Linsley, MacSwain and Smith, 1956. 97 BuLLeTIN, So. Catir,. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 the slender larvae are very active and continually move around the pollen mass while feeding. DIspOsITION OF FECAL MATERIAL. The mature larvae of the Anthophorinae deposit their fecal material in semi-liquid form at the bottom of the cell. The same is said to be true of the European Eucera but the eucerines known to us plaster it at the top of the cell (Linsley, MacSwain and Smith, 1956). In the Emphorinae it is deposited over the entire inner surface of the cell. Cocoon. The anthophorine bees construct no cocoon. The emphorines cover the plastered fecal material with a thin, var- nish-like layer. The Eucerinae construct a conspicuous, double or multi-layered cocoon. It is interesting to note that the para- sitic bees of the genus Xeromelecta construct a cocoon similar to that of the emphorines and that the position of the anal open- ing of the larva and sclerotization of the surrounding area is also similar. It might be worthwhile to re-examine the morphology of the adults in the light of this suggested relationship. POLLEN PREFERENCES. The Anthophorinae are polylectic at the subfamily and generic levels, mostly so at the species level. The Eucerinae are mostly oligolectic at the species level, al- though within the subfamily many groups of plants are utilized as pollen sources. The Emphorinae show a strong preference for the plant families Malvaceae and Convolvulaceze and the pro- portion of oligolectic species is very high. GREGARIOUS NESTING TENDENCIES. In our exeperience the eucerine bees exhibit no tendencies toward gregarious nesting”, although apparently Thygates nests in dense aggregations ( Mich- ener, in Litt.). In the Emphorinae the tendency is slight, except in Melitoma, in which it appears to be well developed. Among the Anthophorinae, gregarious nesting appears to be character- istic of a large proportion of the species. BIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS OF THE ANTHOPHORIDAE There are a number of reasons for considering the Antho- phoridae as a family distinct from the other groups with which it has recently been combined. Two which we have not seen emphasized previously are (1) the Anthophoridae overwinter 13 The question as to whether the tendency to concentrate a large number of burrows in a limited area is an inherited characteristic, or reflects environmental limitations, or is a matter of chance, remains to be resolved. In any event, differences between species are evident in this respect. 98 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . ., VolMoor bart l956 in the larval stage, in contrast to the Apidae (including the Bombineze and Meliponinae) and the Xylocopidae (including the Ceratininae), and (2) with the exception of Clisodon, they nest in the ground and the non-parasitic forms construct their own burrows (except possibly Exomalopsis ). Some of the social bees nest in the ground but they utilize existing cavities. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS (1) Ptilothrix sumichrasti (Cresson) nests non-gregariously in flat or gently sloping, hard-packed, barren soil in areas where water and Ipomoea are both available. Water is utilized in ex- cavation and in order to collect it they alight directly on the surface. The burrow is shallow (65-115 mm.), vertical, with a very short turret. The soil is excavated in the form of moist pellets which are thrown out of the entrance by the hind legs. The first cell is constructed at the bottom of the main shaft, others to the side and slightly below the first. They are externally urn-shaped, vertical, separate, and vary from one to five in number. The pol- len mass is cup-shaped but convex above, dry, and is placed on top of the egg. The larva feeds by cutting channels around the pollen mass reducing it to a successively smaller sphere as feed- ing progresses. When larval development is complete, feces are plastered on the wall of the cell and a thin papery cocoon is constructed within. Adults are active over an extended period in the summer. They apparently construct and provision several burrows. (2) Ptilothrix swmichrasti (Cresson) end Emphor bombifor- mis (Cresson) exhibit very similar nesting habits. On the basis of information now available there appear to be no biological grounds for assigning them to different genera. (3) The genera of Emphorinae exhibit differences in the use of water in excavation, the form of the excaveted material, in turret formation, in the pattern of the burrow shaft and cell ar- rangement, and in pollen sources. (4) The subfamily Emphorinae appears to be amply distinct from the Anthophorinae and Eucerinae on biological grounds. Comparisons with the Exomalopsinae and Hemisiinae await ad- ditional data. Biological features of the melectine genus Xero- melecta suggest a possible relationship with the Emphorinae that should be further explored. we) Butvetin, So. Cartier. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 (5) The Anthophoridae exhibit a biological unity and dis- tinctness from related groups of bees which we interpret as justifying recognition at the family level. REFERENCES Casey, T. L. 1915. A review of the American species of Rutelinae, Dynastinae and Cetoniinae. Memoirs on the Coleoptera, 6:1-394. Cockerell, T. D. A. 1934. The wild bees. Natural History (New York), 34:748-753, figs. Cresson, E.T. _ 1878. Descriptions of new species of North American bees. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 30:181-221. Davis, W. T. 1926. Wasps and bees as water-straddlers. Bull. Brooklyn Entom. Soc., Dil glee Friese, H. 1923. Die europiischen Bienen (Apidae). DeGruyter, Berlin and Leip- sig, 456 pp., illus. Grossbeck, J. A. 1911. A contribution toward the life history of Emphor bombiformis Cress. Jour. New York Entom. Soc., 19:238-244, figs. House, H. D. 1908. The North American species of the genus Ipomoea. Ann. New York Acad. Sci., 18(6):181-263. Von Ihering, H. 1904. Biologia das albelhas solitarias do Brazil. Rev. Mus. Paulista, 6:461-481, figs. Knab, F. 1911. How Emphor drinks. Proc. Entom. Soc. Washington, 13:170. Linsley, E. G., J. W. MacSwain and Ray F. Smith 1952a. The bionomics of Diadasia consociata Timberlake and some bio- logical relationships of emphorine and anthophorine bees. Univ. Calif. Publ. Entom., 9(3):267-290, pls. 1-6. 1952b. The life history and development of Rhipiphorus smithi with notes on their phylogenetic significance. Univ. Calif. Publ. En- tom., 9(4):291-314, pls. 7-12. 1954. A note on the nesting habits of Exomalopsis solani Cockerell. Pan-Pacific Entom., 30(4) :263-264. 1956. Biological observations on Xenoglossa fulva Smith with some generalizations on the habits of other eucerine bees. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci., 54:131-144, figs. 100 BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES : Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 Michener, C. D. 1944. Comparative external morphology, phylogeny, and a classification of the bees (Hymenoptera). Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 82(6): 151-326, figs. 1947. Bees of a limited area in southern Mississippi. Amer. Midland Nat., 38(2):448-455, figs. 1953. Comparative morphological and systematic studies of bee larvae with a key to the families of hymenopterous larvae. Univ. Kansas Science Bull., 35(2)8:987-1102, figs. 1954. Bees of Panama. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 104(1):5-175, figs. Moure, J. S. 1947. Notas sobre algunas abejas de la provincia de Salta (Hymen. Apoidea). Rev. Soc. Ent. Argentina, 13:218-253. Nichols, M. L. 1913. Some observations on the nesting habits of the mining bee, Em- phor fuscojubatus Ckll. Psyche, 20:107-112. Rau, P. 1930. The nesting habits of Emphor bombiformis Cresson. Bull. Brook- lyn Entom. Soc., 25(1):28-35, figs. Robertson, C. 1890. [Habits of Emphor bombiformis]. Canadian Entom., 22:216-217. 1918. How Emphor drinks. Canadian Entom., 50:320. 1925. Habits of the hibiscus bee, Emphor bombiformis. Psyche, 32: 278-282. Sallé, A. 1833. Observations sur les moeurs de plusiers Coléoptéres du Mexique. Revue Entomologique (Silbermann), 1:237-243. 10) BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 NOTES ON THE LIFE HISTORY OF A RARE ARIZONA SPHINX MOTH, XYLOPHANES FALCO WALKER By Joun AbdAMs COMSTOCK One of the prizes that occasionally falls to the net of the lepidopterist in southern Arizona is Xylophanes falco Wk. This moth is not illustrated in any work dealing with the lepidoptera of the United States, and apparently nothing has been published on its life history. It is included by Druce in Biologia Centrali-Americana’ and pictured in color. Its habitat is given as Mexico to Honduras. Draudt also includes it in Seitz’, giving its range as “Mexico to Honduras and Guatemala,” and showing an excellent figure on Plate 98 E. In the Dyar Catalogue of 1902’ it is not included, but in 1927 Barnes and Benjamin list it for boreal America’. My first sight of it on the wing was in the Chiricahua Moun- tains of Arizona, several years ago, when the late John and Grace Sperry and I were camped in Barfoot Park, and discovered this rarity sipping nectar from the blossoms of wild Iris. Since then I have taken it at light in Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, Arizona, but always sparingly. Incidentally, this canyon seems to be one of the outstanding spots in the southwest, for sphinges. Lloyd Martin reports that the Los Angeles Museum collection has a total of twenty-one different species of sphinx moths taken within the confines of Madera Canyon, an area less than three miles long. During a collecting trip to the Santa Rita Mountains in 1946 I collected larvae of two different species of sphinges. 1 Druce, H. Biol. Cent. Am. 1: p. 12, pl. 1, fig. 8. 1900 * Draudt, M. Seitz Macrolep, of the World. VI. Americana, p. 890. > Dyar, Harrison G. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. No. 52. A. list of No. Am: Lepid. 1902. + Barnes, Wm. and Foster H. Benjamin. Check List of the Lepid. of Boreal Am. Superf. Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea,. Bull. So. Cal. Ac. Sci. 26: (2) pp. 35-50. 1927. 102 oe BULLETIN, So. CaLir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . s Vol. 55, Part 25 1956 “ aoe’ * oy Age Sores obe IPILAMIELD; 247 Larva of Xylophanes falco Walker. Fig. 1. Dorsal aspect. Fig. 2. Lateral aspect. Fig. 3. Head, and first five segments of larva, lateral aspect. All figures slightly enlarged. Photo- graphs, courtesy of Henry Wilson. 103 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 One lot, reared on Boerhaavia, emerged in July and August of 1947, and proved to be Arctonotus terlootii Hy. Edw., the life history of which was published in 1948", The second species, a single larva, was feeding on Bouwardia glaberrima Engelm. Notes were made of this, but the specimen proved to be parasitized, so we could not attach a name. On August 5, 1947 John S. Adams collected one example of the same type of larva in Madera Canyon, altitude about 5500 feet, and Bernie Weber secured two more in the same locality on September 13, 1947. In both cases the foodplant was reported as a species of “wild honeysuckle.” Photographs of the mature larva were made by Henry Wilson. Later, a pupa was made available, and one of these, under the watchful eye of William A. Reese, produced an imago of Xylophanes falco. It will be noted that a number of persons cooperated in fur- nishing the material and developing the facts that have made possible this account of a new life history. These individuals belong to a group of younger entomologists whose interest was aroused end stimulated by the several edu- cational agencies operating under the aegis of the Division of Science of the Los Angeles County Museum, and the Lorquin Entomological Society. To these young men, our thanks are due for the materials and facts that have made it possible to present the following date. Xylophanes falco Walker Mature Larva. Length, extended, 77 mm. Body thickest through fourth segment, tapering gradually towards cauda. Head and first segment small and retractile, being drawn partly into the third and fourth segments when resting. The head and all of its appendages except the clypeus are black. The latter is a dull blackish ivory. Body ground color, predominately smoky black. There is a narrow black mid-dorsal stripe running from the first to the fifth segments, lateral to which is a dull ivory area dorsally, gradually changing to black dorso-laterally. The fourth segment bears two conspicuous round eye-like spots lateral to the dull ivory area. Both of these have a cen- trally placed blue pupil in the form of a circlet, or a letter C, resting on a velvety black background. The black spot is circled by a narrow yellow bend, which in turn is circled by a narrow 5 Comstock, J. A. Bull. So. Calif. Ac. Sci. 47: (2) 49-51. 1948. 104 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ; Vol. 55, Part 25 1956 2 PLATE 28 Pupa of Xylophanes falco Walker. Fig. 1. Ventral aspect. Fig. 2. Lateral aspect. Fig. 3. Dorsal aspect. All figures slightly enlarged. Reproduced from painting by the author. black stripe. The whole effect gives the appearance of a large, widely opened eye, particularly when the segment on which it rests is bulged by the retraction of the head. There are two longitudinal rows of large round or oval white spots in line with the large ocellar spots, which are pzired on each segment from the sixth to the eleventh segments. Each of these spots is placed immediately caudad to a seg- mental juncture. A series of diagonal bands is present on the lateral surface. Each of these begins at one of the round white spots just men- 105 BULLETIN, So. Catire. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 tioned, and runs antero-inferiorly. These bands are a soiled ivory, and their margins are not clearly delimited. The spiracles are placed on the antero-superior margins of these diagonal bands, except for those which occur on segments where the diagonals are absent. From the sixth to the eleventh segments the body is crossed transversely by lines of fine white dots which run in parallel series of approximately eight rows to a segment. The caudal horn is stout, short, and slightly recurved cau- dally. It is black, as are also the legs, prolegs and crochets. The abdominal surface is predominantly dull slaty black. Spiracles, soiled ivory, the centers shaded with black, and a fine black circlet around the margins. The larva is illustrated on Plate 27. Pura. Length, 46 mm. Greatest width, 14 mm. Robust, taper- ing gradually toward the rounded head, and more acutely toward the cauda. Color, light tan or straw, with sparse smoky black and brown markings and mottlings. The texture of surfaces of the thoracic portions and the wing cases is smooth and glistening; that of the remaining surfaces delicately rugose or punctate, hence dull. The wing cases are somewhat heavily marked with brownish black, except for their costal margins, which are very light brown, with a few round black spots ‘conspicuously placed on them. The antennae reach only half the distance to the margins of the wings. The caudal horn of the larva persists as a small button, in- clining slightly caudad. The black cremaster is short and stubby, and bears a few short, slightly curved spurs. The spiracles are black rimmed, and prominent. No setae or tubercles occur on eny portion of the body. Other structural characters not specifically mentioned are shown on the illustration, Plate 28. Ks” 106 BuLLeTIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Viola obarte2elo5G SCHIZASTER MORLINI, A NEW SPECIES OF ECHINOID FROM THE PLIOCENE OF IMPERIAL COUNTY, CALIFORNIA By U. S. Grant, IV', anp Leo GrorGE HERTLEIN” In March, 1955, Dr. G. Dallas Hanna, Curator of the Depart- ment of Geology, California Academy of Sciences, received from Mr. W. Morlin Childers of E] Centro, California, a letter accom- panied by specimens and photographs of a fossil echinoid found at Coyote Mountain, Imperial County, California. Mr. Childers mentioned that the specimens resembled Schizaster martinezensis Kew, but he recognized that differences existed between the two and suspected that his specimen might represent an undescribed species. The specimens were submitted to the junior author for identi- fication and it became evident that they represented an undes- cribed species. Further correspondence between Hanna and Child- ers led to a request that the present authors study and describe the species. Four specimens have been available for this study. The authors wish to thank Mr. Childers and Dr. Hanna for the opportunity to study and describe this interesting new species, the first species of Schizaster from Post-Eocene beds in southern California. Schizaster morlini new species Plate 29, Figures 1-8 Test broad, oval, greatest width at about the middle of the length and anterior to the apical system; greatest height at inter- ambulacrum 5, which is keel-shaped; posterior high, vertical, somewhat concave around a large periproct; actinal surface slight- ly convex, labrum prominent with peristome wide, somewhat ‘Professor, Department of Geology, University of California at Los Angeles. “Associate Curator, Department of Geology, California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. 107 BuLLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 7 8 PLATE 29 Figs. 1-8. Schizaster morlini Grant & Hertlein, new species. Holotype, length 54 mm.; width, 49.5 mm.; height, 24 mm. Fig. 1. Abactinal view. Fig. 2. Actinal view. Fig. 3. Posterior end view. Fig. 4. Lateral view. Paratype. length, 35 mm.; width, 29.5 mm.; height, 26 mm. Fig. 5. Lateral view. Fig 6. Abactinal view. Fig. 7. Actinal view. Fig. 9. Posterior end view. The original shape of the specimens has been altered somewhat due to compaction of the enclosing sediment. 108 BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ; Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 sunken; all petals sunken, particularly the anterior unpaired III, which has vertical walls and extends to anterior ambitus; poster- ior paired ambulacra, I and V, short, not extended to the mar- gin of the test; fascioles indistinct and incomplete, appayently due to lack of preservation; genital pores obscured. Measure- ments of holotype: anterior-posterior length 54 mm.; width 49.5 mm.; height 24 mm. Measurements of paratype: length 385 mm.; width 29.5 mm.; height 26 mm. Holotype and Paratype (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geology Type Coll.) from the southern slope, approximately midway east to west about two thirds of the way to the top of Coyote Moun- tain, Imperial County, California, in a sandstone formation; Pliocene. Specimens of a coral, Eusmilia carrizoensis Vaughan, were found at approximately the same locality. This new species differs from Schizaster cristatus Jackson (1917, p. 499, pl. 68, figs. 2-4), from the “Upper Oligocene or Miocene’ of Brazil, Costa Rica, in its less prominently raised keel in interambulacrum 5, the narrower and more steep-sided am- bulacrum III, and the larger angle between the posterior paired ambulacra. Schizaster morlini n. sp. differs from S. panamensis Jackson (1917, p. 500, pl. 66, figs. 2-3) of the Gatun formation, Canal Zone, in the more deeply sunken petals and wider bivaial angle. The new species here described differs from Schizaster stalderi Weaver (1908, p. 274, pl. 21, fig. 3) in the more depressed unpaired anterior ambulacrum, the narrower space between the bivium, the more elevated keel in interambulacrum 5, and in the less anterior position of the peristome. Weaver's species occurs in Pliocene strata at the mouth of Bear River, Humboldt County, California, but has not been authoritatively reported in the south- ern part of the state. This new species is named for Mr. W. Morlin Childers, El Centro, California, who collected the type specimen. 109 BULLETIN, So, Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 BIBLIOGRAPHY Grant, IV, U. S., and Hertlein, L. G. 1938. The West American Cenozoic Echinoidea. Publ. Univ. California at Los Angeles in Math. and Phys. Sci., Vol. 2, pp. I-VI, 1-225, pls. 1-30, figs. 1-7 in text, April 19. Jackson, R. T. 1917. Fossil Echini of the Panama Canal Zone and Costa Rica. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Vol. 53, No. 2218, pp. 489-501, pls. 62-68, figs. 1-3 in text, September 24. See also U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. 103, pp. 103-116, pls. 46-52, figs. 1-3 in text, February 9, 1918. Kew, W. S. W. 1920. Cretaceous and Cenozoic Echinoidea of the Pacific Coast of North America. Univ. Calif. Publ., Bull. Dept. Geol., Vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 23-236, pls. 3-42, figs. 1-5 in text, September 28. Weaver, C. W. 1908. New Echinoids from the Tertiary of California. Univ. Calif. Publ., Bull. Dept. Geol., Vol. 5, No. 17, pp. 271-274, pls. 21-22, December 28. IDFA. TWO NEW SPECIES OF NASSARIUS FROM THE PLIOCENE OF LOS ANGELES COUNTY, CALIFORNIA By Grorce P. KANAKOFF In May, 1954, the author reported a new Kelletia from the Upper Pliocene of the Pico Formation from Humphreys Quad- rangle in Los Angeles County’. During the following months the several tons of silt collected from the locality yielded a large marine fauna in a good state of preservation. The lumps of mat- rix, ranging from almost black.to light gray in color and from silt to shale in consistency, had first to be dried, then soaked in sieves half-submerged in water to separate the shell material from the matrix. When again dried so that the shell material was hard enough to handle, the specimens were sorted and studied. Among the forms segregated are two new species of Nassarius, one very abundant, the other comparatively rare. These are the subject of the present paper. Nassarius stocki sp. nov. Hotoryre: The holotype No. 1109 in the Los Angeles County Museum (PI. 30, figs. A and C), collected by the author, May 10, 1954. IKanakoff, G. P., 1954, Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. V. 53, pl. 2, pp. 114-117. 110 BULLETIN, ‘So. Car. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 A. B. C. PLATE 30. Nassarius stocki sp. nov. Holotype L.A. County Museum #1109—“A” and * One Paratype L.A. C. M. (a longitudinal section—“B.” Type Locauity: LACMIP 291 (Los Angeles County Museum, Invertebrate Paleontology, Locality 291). An exposed stratum of black silt, weathering into gray, in a gully in the center of the south half of Sec. 27, T. 4N, R. 15W, Mt. San Bernardino B. and M., (which is probably the same as Kew’s Loc. No. 3590)’; it is exactly 2 mile south of the Humphreys RR Station, Los Angeles County, Calif. AGE AND Formation: Upper Pliocene, Pico formation. Diacnosis: Shell small for the genus, ovate-conical; whorls seven, convex, strongly cancellated i prominent axail ribs (slop- ing posteriorly at 5 degrees to the axis of the shell) and over- lying (less prominent) thinner ridges, together forming squarish concave interspaces on the last five whorls; spire acuminated at an angle of 62 degrees; sutures deep, sharply defined; the body whorl with 15 ribs, the sixth whorl with 19, the fifth with 16, the fourth with 16, the third with 14 obsolete riblets, and the first two whorls *Kew, W.S.W., USGS Bull. 753, pp. 77-81. HIER BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 bare, forming a simple smooth nucleus; inner lip thin, reflected, with four prominent parietal bar-like tubercles, forming upper and lower pairs; outer lip thick (with an inner thickening re- sembling an internal varix) with one prominent tooth in the mid- dle and three lesser bar-like tubercles, one above and two below it; columella extended, with a strong plication on the inner side, and a deep, narrow groove, around it at the base of the body whorl. The holotype, a large adult, measures: length 9.6 mm., breadth 5.5 mm. The holotype has the outer lip imteriorly ex- tended by an elongated tubercle which deepens the canal (See PI. 30 fig. C); sectioned paratype No, 142 shows the tubercle to be continuous with the columella. ParatyPes: Out of 500 plus specimens of the species available, 130 near-perfect adults were selected and measured. A longitud- inal section of one (L.A. Co. Mus. No, 142) is figured (pl. 30, fig. 18})). Absolute means of the measurements of the paratype lot are: 1. length—7.282 mm. bo width—4.581 mm. 3. ratio length to width—1.589. Distripution: Known only from the type locality. DISCUSSION The striking feature of this lot is the uniformity of this small species, where the general shape and sculpture are concerned. The most variable feature noticed is the number of denticles in the aperture, varying from strongly serrate to obsoletely serrate, and from 2 to 8 denticles in the outer lip. This species is named for one of the most highly honored and foremost paleontologists of the United States, who in addition to his scientific achievements was also outstanding for his qualities as a human being, Dr. Chester Stock (1892-1950), under whose guidance the author had the privilege of working for over eleven years. 112 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 PLATE 31 Nassarius hildegardae sp. nov. Holotype L.A. Co. Museum #1110 Nassarius hildegardae sp. nov. HotoryPe: The holotype No. 1110 in the Los Angeles County Museum collected by the author May 10, 1954 (pl. 31). dyer Locaniry: LACMIP 291. AcE AND Formation: Upper Pliocene, Pico formation. Diacnosis: Shell smallest in the genus, elongate-conic; whorls seven, flattened-convex, four of them with rugosely cancellated sculpture; ribs 12 on the fourth whorl, 13 on the fifth, 15 on the sixth and 16 on the body whorl, crossed by overlying thinner, raised uniform spiral ridges; 4 on the fourth whorl, 6 on the fifth whorl, 5 on the sixth, and 8 on the body whorl, forming bead-like effect on the crossing, and rhomboid cavities in the interspaces; spire acuminated at 40 degrees; first three whorls bare, forming a simple, smooth nucleus; sutures deeply incised; aperture narrow- ly-oval, its axis at 25 degrees to the axis of the shell; inner lip thick, reflected, free, with 2 bar-like tubercles at the anterior end, and 3 round tubercles at the posterior end; outer lip thick, with 6 bar- like tubercles evenly spaced throughout its inner length; canal short, broad; siphonal notch profound. The holotype, a large adult, measures: length 9.2 mm., breadth 4.0 mm., and length of the aperture (canals included) 3.2 mm. 113 BuuLetin, So. Cauie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 Parnatrypes: Out of 70 plus specimens, 44 adults in a good state of preservation were selected and measured. Slight varia- tions were noticed in the thickness of the outer and inner lips, which range from almost-smooth to strongly serrated, and the inner lip from thin and attached, to thick and detached, the den- ticles on it ranging from 2 to 6 in number; in all other respects ex- teriorly being very uniform. Absolute means of measurements of the paratype lot are: . length—5.604 mm. width—3.014 mm. ratio length to width—1.859. Owe Disrripution: Known only from the type locality. DISCUSSION At a glance, this species resembles young specimens of Nassar- ius mendicus Gould, but differs in size, more acuminated spire, sculpture, and in the shape of the aperture, both lips being pro- portionately much thicker in this species. Nassarius hildegardae is named for the noted avian paleontol- ogist, Dr. Hildegarde Howard, Chief Curator, Division of Science, Los Angeles County Museum, who has given so willingly and un- stintingly of her time, knowledge, and friendship to the author, and whose help and many years of pleasant association are grate- fully acknowledged. 114 BuLLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 A NEW HOST AND LOCALITY RECORD FOR IXODES JELLISONI COOLEY AND KOHLS A single specimen of Ixodes jellisoni was taken from the neck of a kangaroo rat Dipodomys agilis agilis, collected December 19, 1955, in Loma Linda, San Bernardino County, California. The rat and tick were collected by M. J. Whitney who very kindly gave them to the writer. Cooley and Kohls (1945) list previous collections of I jellisoni from a ground squirrel, Kings County, California, and from several Perognathus californicus, (pocket mouse), from Alameda and Monterey Counties, Cali- fornia. This is the first record of this tick from a kangaroo rat and the first time it has been reported from San Bernardino County. Acknowledgment is hereby given for the kindness shown by Dr. Glen M. Kohls, Rocky Mountain Laboratory, who identified the tick, and to Dr. Robert T. Orr, California Academy of Sciences, who identified the kangaroo rat. The tick has been deposited in the museum of the California Academy of Sciences. LITERATURE CITED Cooley, R. A. and Glen M. Kohls 1945. The genus Ixodes in North America, Nat. Inst. of Health Bull. No. 184 Robert D. Lee Department of Entomology, School of Tropical and Preventive Medicine College of Medical Evangelists, Loma Linda, California THE LARVA OF Euclidimera diagonalis Dyar, (Lepidoptera; Catocalinae ) Three species of the genus Euclidimera are listed for North America, north of Mexico in the McDunnough Check List (1938)1, namely — E. intercalaris Grt., E. diagonalis Dyar, and E. triangulata B. & McD. Apparently no records of the early stages of anv member of the genus have been published. : On August 15, 1954, I collected a single larva in Ramsay Canyon, Huachuca Mountains, Arizona. It was found in the evening, resting on grass, and apparently had finished its feeding period, as shortly thereafter it began spinning a fragile cocoon. Fortunately, I had made field notes before the process of cocoon making began. The site chosen for pupation was near the ground, among stems of grass, and small particles of vegetation were incorporated into the cocoon, resulting in a good camouflage. With only a single example of an apparently unknown species to work with, the pupa was purposely left undisturbed. In just three days short of one year (August 12, 1955) a typical example of Euclidimera diagonalis (Dyar) emerged. My field notes were subsequently slightly damaged by rain, but the following items were salvaged: Mature larva. Length, 39 mm. Subcylindrical, tapering slightly toward head and cauda. Head, larger than first segment, prominently striped with light brown and white lines running vertically. Ocelli, black. Antennae, white. Mandi- bles irregularly edged with black. Body, striped longitudinally with dark and light bands. These bands are composed of numerous fine wavy lines. The middorsal band is made up of four dark elements on a ground of yellowish straw. IMcDunnough, J., Check List of the Lepidopt. of Canada and the U.S. of America. Part 1, Macrolep. Memoirs, S. Calif. Acad. Sci., Vol. 1. 1938. 115 BULLETIN, So. CAtir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 The dorso-lateral band is composed of five red-brown wavy stripes on a ground of light olive. The suprastigmatal band is composed of a variable number of salmon colored elements on a ground of light straw. The stigmatal band is divided into an upper half of four light brown elements on a ground of light olive, and a lower element of a crenulated band of salmon, below which is a band of white. Inferior to this is a band composed of three or four black lines. My notes on the ground color of this band were blurred by rain. Below this is a pinkish-salmon area. The abdominal surface is covered by numerous delicate brown lines on a straw colored base. Spiracles, pinkish, rimmed with black. Legs, translucent straw. There are three pairs of prolegs, counting the anal pair. The typical proleg is mottled light pink and brown, and has a large black tubercle later- wlly placed on it. The larval pattern is somewhat like that described by Forbes (1954)? for a closely related group,—Euclidia, but the colors are brighter and more varied. One member of this genus, E. cuspidea Hbn., a common eastern species, feeds on clover and @rasses. Dyar originally described “Euclidia” diagonalis in 1898° from “one female, Mesino Valley, New Mexico.” Lloyd Martin, Associate Curator of Entomology, Los Angeles County Museum, reports that he has been unable to find a record of “Mesino Valley’ in New Mexico, and suggests that it may be a misinterpretation of Mesilla Valley. The series of E. diagonalis in the Los Angeles County Museum collection contains 34 examples, the localities represented being: Globe, Ash Fork, Paradise, Patagonia, White Mts., Baboquivari Mts., Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mts., all in Arizona, and a single specimen from Brewster County, Texas. The moth is illustrated in Barnes’ and McDunnough’s “Contributions to the Natural History of Lepidoptera of North America,’ Vol. 4, No. 2, page 116, plate 15, figure 15, 1918. Joun ApAms Comstock The Larva of Stenoporpia grisearia (Crt. ) (Lepidoptera: Geometridae ) A single example of a geometrid larva was collected on oak, in Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, Arizona, August 11, 1954, trom which the following brief notes were made. Penultimate instar. Length, 23 mm. Head: mottled like body, but somewhat darker on the upper half, and whiter below. Ocelli, black. Body: cylindrical throughout its entire length. Color, superficially appearing dull gray, but actually made up of a reticulated network of fine wavy lines, dashes and dots, ranging in color from soiled white, through brown, to black. At the juncture of the fifth and sixth segments, in line with the spiracles, there is a warty tubercle, the posterior half of which is black, and the anterior half soiled white. 2Forbes, William T. M. Lepidoptera of New York and Neighboring States. Noctuidae. Part III. Memoir 329, Cornell Univ. Agr. Exper. Sta. p. 343. 1954. 3Dyar, Harrison G. Jour. N. Y. Ent. Soc. VI, 41, 1898. 116 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 55, Part 2, 1956 On the last caudal segment, mid-dorsally placed, is a warty prominence, mottled black and white. The remainder of the body is uniformly smooth and mottled. Legs and prolegs, concolorous with body. A few minute hairs occur on the body, arising from black dots. Mature larva. Length, 35 mm. The body color has become a mottled brown, with less contrast between the reticulated lines, dots and dashes. Spiracles, black, with an aureola of light gray around them. There is a scant vestiture of very short black hairs, arising from minute black papillae. The head is mottled somewhat as before, but the lower half is red- brown. A horizontal whitish dash runs across the center, and the upper half is mottled brown. The larva went underground September 2, 1954, and the imago emerged July, 1955. The moth was first described by Grote as Cymatophora (Boarmia) grisearia in 18831 from a single female taken in Arizona by Neumoegen. In Dr. McDunnough’s “Studies in North American Cleorini” (Canad. Dept. Agr. Ent. Br. Bull. No. 18, p. 25, 1920) he says of the genus, “Most of the species are decidedly rare and nothing is known of their early stages.” So far as I have been able to determine, that statement still holds good. JoHn ApAMs COMSTOCK Co~) ACADEMY PROCEEDINGS Abstract of an address delivered before the Scuthern California Academy of Sciences on March 16, 1956, by Dr. Jay M. Savage, of the Department of Zoology, Pomona College, entitled THE MAJOR FEATURES OF LIZARD EVOLUTION The modern lizards (Order Sauria) comprise a vast array of widely divergent forms adapted to a variety of ecologic situations. The group is primarily terrestrial but many species are arboreal and numerous forms are modified for life under surface debris or as burrowers. Although the majority of lizards are insectivorous, some are partially or exclusively herbivorous, others are mollusk and crab eaters and others prey upon reptiles, birds and mammals. The order apparently originated in Triassic times but few fossil remains have been recorded earlier than the Cretaceous. The primitive stock of lizards appears to have been derived from the diapsid eosuchians through modifications in the postorbital region of the skull, dental placement and vertebrae. These changes all appear to have been in the direction of adapta- tions for chasing, seizing and chewing insect prey. Other modifications in me also seem correlated with the further development of insectivorous abits. 1Can. Ent. XV. 124. 1883. MIG BuLLeTIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 plification of the skull through loss of the postorbital (temporal) arch or closure of the supratemporal fossa, as modifications for a fossorial existence. This trend has proceeded along at least 10 independent evolutionary lines within the group to result in a wide variety of burrowing types showing every possible combination of stages of devolution in the listed structures. The members of the Iguania are essentially terrestrial insectivores. Sev- eral genera are herbivorous and some species prey on vertebrates. A number of forms are arboreal and one family, the Chamaeleontidae, of Africa and India, is magnificently adapted for life in the tree-tops. The Gekkota are an insectivorous group that has taken on nocturnal habits as opposed to the majority of lizards which are diurnal. The geckos proper are mostly nocturnal and mainly arboreal with specially developed eyes (the eyelids are usually immovable and transparent) and a considerable variety of limb, toe and tail modifications to aid them in climbing. One off-shoot from the main line of gecko evolution, the Australasian pygopodids, are burrowers with immovable eyelids, a streamlined skull and the limbs and girdles greatly reduced or absent. Our local night lizards, family Xantusiidae, are also members of this section but are not arboreal or burrowers. The Anguinomorpha can be divided into two major sections on the basis of morphology and habits. The first section contains a large number of insectivorous species with rather extensive osseous protective plates. These forms are primarily terrestrial, but some are arboreal and several have the limbs, girdles, ears and skull reduced and are snake-like burrowers. The second line of anguinomorph evolution is formed of a series of relatively large carnivorous terrestrial species. These lizards, including the monitors of the old world and the poisonous beaded lizards of North America, feed on birds, mammals and other large prey. Also placed in this group are a number of extinct fish-eating forms, including the strictly aquatic mososaurs. Lizard evolution thus appears to have been initiated by adaptation to insectivorous habits. Rather early in its history the order became broken up into four distinctive evolutionary lines that persist today. The primitive forms within each major group were apparently diurnal. terrestrial insecti- vores, but each line has undergone considerable adaptive radiation. The scincomorph line has developed many fossorial forms with reduced limbs or snake-like appearance. The Iguania have evolved no true burrowers but have developed specializations for arboreal life and some are herbivores. The geckos and their allies are essentially nocturnal, arboreal and burrowing forms. Sime anguinomorphs are limbless fossorial types and one major section. has become adapted to feeding on vertebrate prey. In all groups there are species more or less adapted to climbing trees or bushes and others modified for life under surface litter. The basic differences between the major lizard groups and the wide adaptive diversity within each group accounts for the great variety of living species and the marked parallelism between distantly related forms occupying similar ecologic niches. These factors amply explain the evolutionary success of the lizards. 118 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES _ Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 Within the Sauria four major evolutionary lines are indicated, the Scin- comorpha, Iguania, Gekkota and Anguinomorpha. These groups are clearly demarcated from one another and at the present time it is not possible to establish one stock as being nearest the ancestral lizards. The scincomorphs are an insectivorous line, primarily terrestrial, but with some species arboreal in habit. Most of the members of the group are fully limbed and provided with osseous protective plates. However, there has been a marked tendency among numerous scincomorphs toward reduc- tion of limbs and girdles, loss of moveable eyelids and external ears and sim- ANNUAL MEETING 1956 The annual meeting of the Southern California Academy of Sciences was held on May 4, 1956, on which occasion an address was given by Dr. C. H. Cleminshaw, Assistant Director of the Griffith Observatory and Plane- tarium, entitled “Exploring the Universe.” Preliminary to this, reports were presented by the officers of the Academy. Included was a report of the Treasurer, Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, which is herein briefly summarized. TREASURER’S REPORT iRixcisinests iano all royneers esses Total $ 5767.84 Including receipts from investments, $2652.65; | Membership dues $760.58; Sale of publications, | $454.25 and Receipts for memorials, $428.67. DISBURSEMENTS) Of; alll tyes eee soe ee eens eens Total $ 5767.84 Including printing of Bulletin, $1433.07; Portfolio investments, $1219.86 and transfer of gifts to memorial fund, $428.67. LNG©ANBTBININ? RSS ae ae ee Total $68,245.92 | The work of the Southern California Academy of Sciences is carried on entirely through the generosity of private citizens, who are suf- iciently interested in the advancement of education and cultural endeavor to donate funds or make bequests to the Academy. 119 BULLETIN, So. Cauie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY of SCIENCES Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California Subscription—$3.50 per year Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00) Publications of the Southern California Academy of Sciences The Academy has published to date the following: PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6. MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri- cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers. All issues of the above are now out of print. Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 — one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) in 1920. The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August; Vol. XX, No. 3, December. The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September. The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July. The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March- April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October: No. 6, November-December. From 1925 to 1955, including volumes XXIV to 54, three numbers were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2 May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume. MEMOIRS Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1 1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949. 120 Buttetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 2, 1956 BULLETIN Vol. 3, No. Publications of the Southern California . . . v ov ory . ty . “ ory > Ca NA Seg OA LNA Ng SMD EST Oa . Ny ’ WNMONMNHMNMNMNMNtd . ’ a SS a Seas Academy of Sciences For Sale at the Appended Prices JEG DO ees sk 8 Sah ie eae en TROT ANG OIA: (each) pees en LO Dey (aha) biases eect oes eee eee TNS CAG) seat poke SE bare AES se meee FOS Se mL OOVa ((each))) ee ee WH, Bin UG PIeI (Pore) st) [eek ee ee Ree ee aL ODO Geach) ees es aa Se moe OS tal (each)) easel eee ee ae DB ORDA (eye sl) eee en eee Ta OS 5K (each) 9 te he ee NG SAa (Each) eee eae oe eee eer mtn DEO OS5 (Each) este e eee mom 936) (each) baa. = eee 94, Bs AIS RY AM (ET) at) Vee ear eae ea ce eetee moe O39" (ede) ee ee Jno LOS9r (each) om eke ses a ee GAC) Bereremee ter a ens. Res er ear, a oe mee el OANA (each) bas ee seer Tm GAI (each) ies oe Tea seal 943) (each) =e ee 2, 3. NO AAE (each) Mee ere weer wee oe 9454 (each) See oe es ee Sie O4AGi (each) ees ee ees ee SU O47 (each) -o eee ee ae Sel 9488 (each) pa Sel 9498 (each) a ee el S5O0n(each)) sate ene eer eel Gali (ach) sas se es ee ODN (each) bere see ere ee SOD Sn (each) he ee ei ee SODA (each!) eis = tee te Sal 95 5p (each) ee a ee ee (Continued on next page) SPE SP REA SSP APE ODA v Caen 121 To To Non- Members Members $ .50 1.00 50 1.00 0 1.00 1.50 3.00 1.00 2.00 75 1.50 1.50 3.00 2.00 4.00 75 1.50 1.50 3.00 50 1.00 0 1.00 1.00 2.00 35 ahs: 35 ste 30 Af) 200 Me OO Ate OO) ie .o0 ao .O0 he . z 3 ‘ wi ; r : i } : ‘ ‘ : 7 a ‘ iF ; i i c : 7 ti i aed 3 \ ie wae : > - = u Y < - os - 7 ; te @&> ried Tal ors of aricled accepted for poblication in the lletin should order ms ints, if desired, when they return galley proof earn for al eee ee: "(WITHOUT ¢ COVERS). ne ‘I2pp. 16pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. §9100,12:15'15.50.. 11.75. 20/50: 24.00 WOO) VSS 18.50,02095° 34:75. 9875 (17.75. 21.50 25.75 29.00 33.50 O 20.251, 24.50. 29125 (33.25.3895 On 22. 75 27.50 32.75 37.50 43.00 4 covers of Yee each. ornia a Academy of Sciences to aM scientists ae all ‘ilanches a to any advancement of science. 48 I privileges and receive all publications annually $3.00 le eet ete Cele ate Feckng thhekte we Tie A Came NG tee Tat $1 00. 00 ed through the Editor at the following Press, 1140 oes Blvd., Los Angeles, 32pp. » 7.00 $10.25 $12. 50 $14.25 $16.25 $19.25 $21.00 26,25) ¢ 31.50 36.75 42.00 47.25. BR OEIC ATS NEW Yor BOTANICA GARDEN Part 3 alifornia Saath Gaploss on Taxonomic ho haere bat pone C. Templeton 123 a pee Deseription of Two New. Sub- CO og te CPST SERBS BSS ie 131 New a, ecies of the Megathymus ey: C. ) Comp ex. Don B. Stallings and J. R. Turner 150 ina Recently Extinct Polymorphic Lyczenid y, G ucopsyche xerces (Bdvy.), with Notes on its and onomy. J. C. Downey and W. H. Lange, Jr. 153 stories of Two Southern Arizona Butterflies. PAE Rie or nN aa ste 2, Mey Na ae LTT Sylvatic Trypanosoma cruzi in Triatoma from ob fila AE AE bs Ui ae Saeko CRN ean Dy 180 fe" Histories of Abies: Arizona Morn: 1 IR SURE OP ESE ae 180 “Issued December 31, 1956 Southern California Academy of Sciences OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS ij Mn, Kennern E./Sracenio i. 8 President — Da. Hi DEGARDE | HOWARD 200i. ooL ig ioeteaceesecttneacinnsetaveneenhnad First Vice-President On. Fren'S, Prk. Ase a Second Vice-President Mise’ GripoHENn SIBLE wie. co scpcodenckianed de eeehaee lv a MN he A Secretary y MBO D Vir IVTARTIN ces cobs a aseda seal cate ate eacboac bees pnhcecdd Assistant to Secretary . 4 DREW DWIGHT. PIBRCRa seis ee ere rs ee one atl Treasurer ig Torn. JOHN JA. QOMBTOOR 6c libics hess iio Sa shan -n arco a eee ee Editor my Dr, A. Wem BELL Dr. W. Dwicut Prerce i: Dr. Jonn A. Comstock _ Miss GreTCHEN SIBLEY Dr. THEODORE Downs Miss RutH DeErre Srmpson Dr. HmpEcARE Howarp Mn. KENNETH E, STAGER Mr. Liroyp M. Martin Dr. Frep S. TruxaL Dr. SHERWIN F. Woop ADVISORY BOARD Pror. J. STANLEY BRODE Dr. WititiaM VY. Maven: Dr. THomMas CLEMENTS Mr. THEODORE PAYNE Dr. Howarp R. Hitt Dr. Ricuarp H. Swirr Dr. CARROLL L. LANG Miss Bonnie C, atin ohn Dr. Louis C. WHEELER SCIENCE SECTIONS Section on Entomology Section on Health Dr. Water Esetinc, Chairman Dr. Tuomas J. MEYERS, Chairman Section on Anthropology Section of Junior Students Mr. GenuarD Bakken, Jr., Loninc Dates, Chairman Chairman Section on Physical Sciences a Section on Botany Dr. Joserx B. FICKLEN, Ill, Dr. CuarLes Burcu, Chairman Chairman Section on Geology Section on Zoology Dr. THEoporE Downs, Chairman Dr. A. Wem BELL, Chairman — STANDING COMMITTEES Finance Publication W. Dwicur Prerce, Chairman Joun A. Comstock, Chairman Joun A. Comstock Witu1am H. Easton Joun R. PEMBERTON HiLpEGARDE Howarp GRETCHEN SIBLEY GrorcE R. JOHNSTONE SHERWIN Woop WILLIAM V. MAYER ALLEN STEUART, Auditor RutH D. Smrson Conservation Dr. Ross Harpy, Chairman Program Hospitality : KENNETH E. STAGER, Chairman DoNALD DRAKE, Chairman Membership Library Wiitram V. Mayer, Chairman Mrs. Lioyp M. Manx, Chai ¢ OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY 2) Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, California Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences MeMmpEmOoOye = == - -- = - - - «= Parr 3, 1956 PLEISTOCENE FLORA OF CALIFORNIA WITH EMPHASIS ON TAXONOMIC PROBLEMS IN THE RANCHO LA BREA FLORA’? By Bonnie C. TEMPLETON Curator of Botany, Los Angeles County Museum There are six important Pleistocene floral deposits in California recorded to date (Map #1). These have been reported in as many publications by Chaney (1, 2), Mason (1, 2, 4, 5), Frost (3), and Potbury (7). These deposits are located in the Tomales Bay, San Bruno, McKittrick, Carpinteria, Santa Cruz Island, and Rancho La Brea regions. The TomMates Bay REGION is located in Marin County. There, five plant-bearing localities were found within a distance of 12 miles. In all cases the plant material occurs in lenses of sand and gravel, or as isolated fragments in a sandy conglomerate. Most of the specimens show evidence of having been carried to the site of deposition by water, and no remains of roots or tree trunks in situ have been noted. The San Bruno REGION is located in a tributary to, and in the south branch of San Bruno Creek, a few miles south of San Fran- cisco. The plant material is deposited in a fine alluvial sand which made complete preservation possible. The Mckrrrrick recIon is located in a southwesterly direction from Bakersfield, Kern County. The fossil deposits are in an area of a great number of oil wells and the fossils are imbedded in sand impregnated with asphalt. The CARPINTERIA REGION is located very near the ocean, one mile southeast of the town of Carpinteria, in Santa Barbara County. The fossils are imbedded in sand, with occasional pebbles in pockets of fine gravel, heavily impregnated with asphalt. The Sanra Cruz IsLANp REGION lies 24 miles offshore from Santa Barbara. The fossil flora was found in a canyon of Willow \ Creek on the west side of the island in alluvial deposits of clay, jyellow and gray sands and gravel, and in pockets of gravel and \carbonaceous clay. The RancHo La BreA REGION is located in Los Angeles in what is now known as the heart of the Wilshire district. At the * Read at the 8th International Botanical Congress, Paris, July 7, 1954. 123 BuLLerin, So, CAauur. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 OREGON f MAP 1 PLEISTOCENE FLORAL REGIONS T - Tomales region B - San Bruno region C - Carpinteria region M - McKittrick region R - Rancho La Brea region s - Santa Cruz Island region time of its discovery, however, it was located about 8 miles from the center of town. The fossils occur in a sandy matrix which is heavily impregnated with asphalt. Approximately 80 species, including two new forms, have been reported from the Pleistocene deposits of the foregoing regions. 124 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 These represent 56 genera of 37 families. One Fungus, 2 Pter- idophytes, 13 Gymnosperms, and 66 Angiosperms, and more than 6 undetermined species comprise the total number. Of the more than 80 fossil species reported, 19 occurred in regions no longer inhabited by their modern counterparts. Although a few species of plants have been reported in several other Pleistocene localities, no important amount of material has been found outside of the six regions enumerated above. The plant material from the three regions in which the matrix is im- pregnated with asphalt is better preserved than that of the other localities. The Plesiotype material from the Tomales, San Bruno, Mc- Kittrick, and Santa Cruz Island regions is deposited at the Uni- versity of California at Berkeley; that of the Carpinteria region is deposited at the Santa Barbara Museum of Natural History; that of Rancho La Brea, in part, at the University of California and, in part, at the Los Angeles County Museum. The writer is now engaged in a review of the records and ma- terial of the Pleistocene floras in California in connection with an. intensive study of plant material — especially seeds — from the Rancho La Brea deposits. It is anticipated that many species will be added to the list of California’s fossil plants, and it is hoped that our knowledge of the climate and flora of California in the Pleistocene may be considerably extended. The first work of excavation at Rancho La Brea was carried on at intervals from 1907 to 1913 by the University of California, Southern California Academy of Sciences, Occidental College, and the Los Angeles High School. In 1913, Mr. G. Allan Hancock, owner of the Rancho, granted to Los Angeles County exclusive privilege to excavate these deposits, and later, he generously gave _ the tract of land on which the famous fossil beds occur (approxi- mately 23 acres) to Los Angeles County with a request that the scientific features be adequately preserved and exhibited. More than 100 excavations, or pits, were made at Rancho La Brea by the Los Angeles County Museum in search of fossil de- posits. It has been generally reported that many of these deposits contained only fossil bones, others contained bones and plant material alike, while many others yielded nothing. However, from a study of the field notes made at the time of the various excava- tions, it can be determined that some of the pits, supposedly con- taining bones only, also contained fossil plants, while in some of the pits only plant material was noted. 125 BuLLetin, So, Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Be eens oe ae a ; ; f. - Be PLATE 32 Fig. a.— Juniperus californica, McKittrick deposits; ca. 3x, (5) plate 23, fig. 1 Fig. b. — Juniperus californica, Carpinteria deposits; ca. 3x, (2) plate 6, fig. 10 Fig. c. — Juniperus californica, Rancho La Brea deposits. Fig. d. — Juniperus californica var. breaensis, Rancho La Brea; ca 2x, (3) plate 15, fig. 4 Fig. e. — Ceanothus Jepsonii (modern), L. A. Co. Mus. coll. Fig. f. — Juniperus utahensis (modern), L. A. Co. Mus. coll. Fig. g.— Juniperus californica (modern), L. A. Co. Mus. coll. 126 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 These field notes indicate the presence of plant material in at least seven pits, but apparently little of it was considered of sufficient importance to keep. The great abundance and striking massiveness of some of the bones so absorbed the attention of the excavators that only meager regard was given to the plant mater- ial. Our greatest source of fossil plant material now on hand has been obtained in the washing and cleaning of the skulls and bones from the various excavations. Many seeds, leaves, and twigs are being extracted from the matrix inside of skulls, and even from the cavities of beetle bodies. Pit records on the skulls provide the data for these plant fossils and indicate occurrence of plant material in six pits in addition to those reported in the field notes. The only previous report on the flora of Rancho La Brea was written by Frederick Frost (1927), based mainly on material collected by the University of California. He lists six species which are probably but a small portion of the number yet to be identified in the material now being extracted from the matrix at the Los Angeles County Museum. At the time of Frost’s report, very little was known of the Pleistocene flora of California and he labored under considerable handicap in making his determina- tions, especially of seeds and cones. From certain illustrations and some of the written description, it would appear that there are several discrepancies in identification. For example, Juniperus californica var. breaensis (P| 32, fig. d) is illustrated by a group of seeds that show very little similarity to seeds of J. californica (illustrated ) from other deposits (PI. 32, figs. a, b, c) or to those of living seeds of this species (Pl. 32, fig. g), or of J. utahensis (Pl. 32, fig. £) (which variety breaensis is supposed to represent as an interrelated species). On the contrary, they more closely resemble seeds of Ceanothus Jepsonii (Pl. 32, fig. e). I have not _ been able to locate the material upon which Frost based _ his _ work to determine the accuracy of the illustration. In another instance, Celtis mississippiensis var. reticulata (ref. to C. Douglasii by several authors of modern California flora) was reported with- out illustration but the description given appears to describe _more accurately seeds we are finding (PI. 33, fig. a) that do not compare with those of modern or fossil Celtis. 127 BuLvetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 a. De Ce PLATE 33 Fig. a. — Seeds from Rancho La Brea deposits (unidentified ). Fig. b. — Seeds from Rancho La Brea deposits (unidentified ). Fig. c.— Sambucus glauca? Rancho La Brea deposits. Fig. d.— Seeds of a Composite (unidentified), Rancho La Brea deposits. Note: All photographs with the grid background taken by the author; each square in the grid —1 sq. mm. 128 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Three pine cones were found in the deposits at Rancho La Brea. Two of these were found in Pit 9, one imbedded in the socket of an elephant scapula. One of these cones was reported by Frost as Pinus tuberculata (or P. attenuata by most authors ), but Mason recognizes this cone as Pinus muricata. From my somewhat brief study of the three cones, it appears that there may be three different species present. The greatest problem, and a serious handicap in the identifi- cation of this fossil material, particularly of the seeds and fruits, is one of taxonomy and morphology. So little is done in the des- cription of modern species to adequately describe the fruits and seeds. For instance, in the descriptions of Juniperus californica, the berries are said to contain 1 or 2 seeds, or 1-3 seeds, or no mention of the seeds is made at all. Their form, size, or other characters which would distinguish the seeds of one species from those of another are rarely if ever noted. Such information would be very important since Juniperus californica is reported from at least three Pleistocene deposits in California. Some work has been done on seed morphology in a few fami- lies in the Floras. Since considerable use is being made of seed morphology in the field of seed analysis, comprehensive studies of this phase in more plant families should be undertaken. The seed analyst must recognize and designate weed seeds occurring incidentally with agricultural seeds. In this connection somé studies have been made of the anatomy and morphology of the weed seeds encountered. In the study of fossil seeds, the external form and structure is very important, not only in such material as we are getting from the Rancho La Brea deposits (where the actual organic material is preserved) but in the many instances of fossil impressions of seeds. One of the chief barriers to seed morphology is the lack of a suitable terminology to describe the many variations found in seeds. In 1951, Murley (6) illustrated the terms used in her keys and in the descriptions of seed coats of Cruciferae. Although this wonderful work covers a certain group of characters encountered in the seeds of this one family, much more is needed before one can adequately describe all the different characters that may be found in seeds and fruits of the thousands of species of Sperm- atophytes. Of the numerous kinds of seeds that have been recovered from the Rancho La Brea matrix, several are illustrated here to point out the problems involved in their identification. Those shown in Pl. 33, fig. c, appear to represent those of Sambucus glauca although they bear resemblance, also to seeds of Ovxalis and of Phacelia. The seeds in Pl. 33, fig. b, may be those of a species of Ceanothus of a Euphorbia, but there are also several 129 BuLLeTIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 other kinds of plants having similar seeds. Plate 33, fig. d, shows seeds that belong to a species of the Compositae family. But, to be certain of the identification of these seeds, further comparative studies will be necessary. Very meager mention is made in the descriptive Floras of the shape or form, texture, surface markings, other characters which would facilitate their determination. Lacking these data for most of the seeds and fruits of the modern plants, it will be necessary to study very carefully this phase of the living plants of California, and possibly elsewhere, before an accurate identification can be made of the fossil seeds of the Rancho La Brea deposits. The discrepancies noted in this paper are not mentioned in a spirit of criticism, but to point out the lack, or very meager des- cription of seeds in plant taxonomy. If the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature could be so revised that a complete des- cription of the fruits and seeds of a species would be a requirement of naming a new species of living Spermatophyte, the problems of identification of both living and fossil plants would be greatly lessened. In turn, such information would eventually lead to a more complete understanding of the phylogeny of the flowering plants. REFERENCES 1. Chaney, R. W. & H. L. Mason 1930. PLEISTOCENE FLORA FROM SANTA Cruz ISLAND, CALIFORNIA, Car- negie Instit. Washington Pub. 415, 1-24. 9 ee eet 1933. PLEISTOCENE FLORA FROM THE ASPHALT DEPOSITS AT CARPINTERIA, CALIFORNIA. Carnegie Instit. Washington Pub. 415, 45-79. 3. Frost, F. H. 1927. PLEISTOCENE FLORA OF RANCHO LA Brea. Univ. of Calif. Pub. Bot. 14 (3) 73-98, 4. Mason, H. L. 1934. PLEISTOCENE FLORA OF THE TOMALES FORMATION. Carnegie Instit. Washington Pub. 415, 81-179. er 1944, PLEISTOCENE FLORA FROM THE McKirrrick ASPHALT DEPOSITS OF CauirorRNiA. Calif. Acad. Sci. Proc. 25, 221-33. 6. Murley, Margaret R. 1951. SEEDS OF THE CRUCIFERAE OF NORTHEASTERN NORTH AMERICA. Am. Mid. Nat. 46 (1), 1-81. . Potbury, Susan S. 1932. PLEISTOCENE FLORA FROM SAN BRUNO, SAN MATEO CounrTY, CavirorNniA. Carnegie Instit. Washington Pub. 415, 25-44. ~l BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 TIGER BEETLES of the GENUS CICINDELA in SOUTHWESTERN NEVADA and DEATH VALLEY, CALIFORNIA, and DESCRIPTION of TWO NEW SUBSPECIES (COLEOPTERA - CICINDELIDAE ) by Norman L. RuMpPr China Lake, California The tiger beetles of Death Valley, Inyo and San Bernardino counties, California, and regions associated with the Amargosa River in Nye county, Nevada, are still relatively unknown. The author has devoted many of his spare moments to the observation and study of these populations wherever found in this vast remote region of the Great Basin. Though much work remains to be done, it appears appropriate at this time to publish some of the results of those efforts. Sincere appreciation is hereby expressed to both Dr. Mont A. Cazier whose advice and encouragement have been, most helpful, and Mr. F. W. Binnewies, superintendent of the Death Valley National Monument, whose permission made possi- ble the accumulation of all Death Valley specimens. The first part of this paper deals with Death Valley populations. Five subspecies of tiger beetles of the genus Cicindela have so far been identified with Death Valley, and collected specimens at hand have verified their existence in this region. These are: C. willistoni pseudosenilis W. Horn 1900, Ent. Nach. XXVI, p. 218 C. amargosxe amargosx Dahl 1939, Bull. Brook. Ent. Soc., vol. POOR, p. 221 C. californica erronea Vaurie 1951, Amer. Mus. Nov., no. 1479, mm 12 syn. C. californica viridicyanea Vaurie 1950, Amer. Mus. Nov., no. 1458, p. 1 _ C. newadica nevadica LeConte 1875, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., V, p. 159 C. hemorrhagica hemorrhagica LeConte 1851, Ann. Lye. Nat. mist N. Y., V, p. 171 WB Butierin, So. Cauue. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The Smile subspecies has been reported from Nevada and Death Valley (Cazier 39: 27), but its actual existence in the Valley has not been ere d: C. denverensis propinqua Knaus 1922, Journ, N. Y. Ent. Soc., XXX, p. 194 The information made available here on the Cicindela fauna of Death Valley is based on the populations found in two areas located approximately 80 miles apart. I. The one area is located on the eastern edge of the Valley's ae sink, and is divided into two sites: One site is seven miles north of Furnace Creek, extending both north and south of this point for some distance, at an eleva- tion of 260 feet below sea level. Here, natural springs known as Salt Springs drain almost the year around in long rivulets which flow generally westward into the open alkali flats. Alkali-resistant grasses grow thickly at the edge of these flats, except in drainage areas where the ground is relatively free of grass and alkali. b. The other site is along the southern end of Salt Creek, 17 miles north of Furnace Creek, at an elevation of 200 feet below sea level. Here, this permanent section of the creek fans out and disappears underground leaving extensive sand bars exposed. IJ. The other area is located across the normally dry Amargosa River bed, one quarter mile west of Saratoga Springs in San Bernardino county, California, nearly 75 miles south of Furnace Creek. This area extends for several miles to the north of Saratoga Springs, on a gradual down-hid slope from an elevation of 200 feet. At this location the river bed is made up of numerous chan- nels through alkali and sand bars, covered here and there with short grasses. The footing usually reveals dampness just below the surface. At some places pools of water are found which sometimes contain fishes of the genus Cyprinodon. Several other places were visited on occasion in quest of Cicindela, but no beetles were found. These places include Stove- pipe Wells, upper Salt Creek, areas around the few masonry cov- ered wells in the middle Valley, Tule Spring, Badwater, and pools to the south which are permanent bodies of water so surrounded by salt incrustations that tiger beetles cannot live in the vicinity. Other likely habitats are at the ruins of the old Eagle Borax Works, at Furnace Creek Ranch, and along the waterway east of Furnace Creek Inn. A closer examination of the site seven miles north of Furnace Creek reveals that all five subspecies occupy it. Though as many as four of these may be found at any one time, it appears that each BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 dominates the site in turn, indicating that some balance has been reached in their competition for this limited living space. They appear as follows: I. A population of C. willistoni pseudosenilis is the first to make its appearance. Individuals of this population prefer the damp flats at the western edge of the grassy area, and occasionally may be found far out on the alkali flats. Specimens are always a con- stant dark green or blue-green, with white maculation; the lunules are always present, usually complete, and in many individuals more narrow than is found in Owens Lake samples. This popula- tion and the next compete for the site on fairly even terms at near- ly the same time; they have also been found together in Novem- ber. Observation indicates that ssp. pseudosenilis takes cover on very windy days, when wind velocities approach 30 miles per hour and up. II. The next population seen is one of C. amargosxe amargose. This is treated here as a distinct species, and not as heretofore when it was known as a subspecies of C. willistoni, for such sufficient reasons that two distinct subspecies of the same species cannot exist sympatrically, that no interbreeding with ssp. pseudosenilis has ever been observed, and that no hybrids have ever been found; this is in general agreement with the original observation by Dahl - (39:222). It will be shown later that C. amargosx is polytypic. Individuals are very numerous in April; by mid-May they are seen in reduced numbers, but still mating; by June they disappear. They invade the grassy area where the ground is moist and dark- est; they are most numerous where the waters of the springs drain off, and are frequently seen standing in the very shallow spots, often mating in this surrounding. Visual evidence indicates that they are more active on overcast or partly cloudy days, possibly because they live, as a rule, among the alkali-resistant grasses where some shade may be obtained. They will appear when the wind velocity is very high. Their color is a medium dark shade of green or blue-green in April, becoming darker in May but never black as in some Nevada specimens. Their elytra are very hard and brittle, becoming more so as the season wears on. This site, or one slightly to the south, is the type location of this subspecies. It has not beea found at any other location. 133 BuLLetin, So. Cause. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Il. The third population to be seen is of subspecies C. cali- fornica erronea. This is the first mention of this new location in California for this striking blue and green subspecies, which here- oe was known only from the vicinity of Willcox, Cochise coun- Arizona (Vaurie 50:1), Individuals are first seen in mid-April; Es the beginning of May they take over the site in large numbers, In the early period of their emergence they are competing for space with ssp. amargosex, and are then found mostly along the shallow streamlets in open spots away from the grassy area. When they predominate they close in to the edge of the grasses where there is owing water. They frequently walk in the shallow water where they too do not hesitate to mate. IV. C. netadica nevadica makes up the fourth population to ap- pear. This sub-species so common at Ash Meadows in Nevada, has never before been reported from Death Valley. Individuals emerge in the latter part of April, from a few to increasing num- bers by May. They disappear in June when the water at this site recedes to a few isolated puddles. These unusually wary nevadica blend well with their background, invading by preference the edges of water runs where the sand is exposed and reasonably free of alkali. They are rapid runners and short flyers. From mid- April to mid-May, populations of the above four subspecies may be found in greater or lesser numbers at this site. VY. The final population to emerge is composed of C. hemorr- hagica hemorrhagica. Adults appear at the end of May and prob- ably outlast all the other populations. At that time this same subspecies is commonly found throughout Southern California and some parts of Nevada. Individuals from Death Valley appear to be fully maculated. At the Salt Creek site only two subspecies have been observed. C. willistoni pseudosenilis was collected in May, after it had dis- appeared from the site seven miles north of Furnace Creek. At the same time C. nevadica nevadica was as plentiful here as in’ the populations above Furnace Creek. The author has not visited the Saratoga Springs area of Death Valley as frequently as the Furnace Creek area because of the greater distance involved and the general poor condition of the roads south of Badwater. The populations found here include C. willistoni pseudosenilis, C. californica erronea, and C. nevadica nevadica. C. amargose does not appear at this location in any 134 BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 form, and it is surprising that even hybrids have not been en- countered. The ssp. pseudosenilis population differs from the northern population in that the maculation is still more reduced, with a few immaculate or nearly immaculate individuals appearing in any sample. A much more extensive population of C. californica erronea may be observed here, with the individuals usually lurking among the grasses, but not hesitating to appear in the open; when water is present they will walk into the shallower spots; they are not very wary, and can be approached very closely. C. nevadica nevadica is also very common at this location, and is always found on the alkali-free mud or sand bars, usually where it is wet and water is exposed. A few miles upstream of Saratoga Springs, the Amargosa River makes a wide turn where it reverses its course from the northwest as it comes out of Inyo county. Here, along the river bed at Sho- shone, California, and extending a few miles south of the town, there is a new subspecies of C. willistoni that exhibits a nearly con- stant reduction in maculation and size. Cicindela willistoni praedicta, new subspecies Medium size, narrow and convex, head and prothorax green; elytra blackish-blue, immaculate except for two small vaguely marked apical spots. Head and prothorax as in subspecies echo ex- _ cept that the basic color is green, with only faint highlights of _ bronze; impressions of the prothorax deep and colored blue; sec- ond joint of male palpi pigmented; antennae slender, the first four joints green. Elytra coarsely and fairly evenly punctured, with slightly heavier punctures in the impressions; they broaden evenly from the shoulder to the apical two-thirds; there are no humeral or _ median lunules, and the apical are reduced to vestigial crescents near the suture. Underside brilliant blue, clothed with white de- _cumbent hair; femora blue with green joints, tibae green. Male— length 11.1 mm, width 4.4 mm. Female—like the male except for larger size and broader proportion; length 11.4 mm, width 5.0 mm. Holotype male, allotype female in the author's collection. Col- lected at the type location 3.5 miles south of Shoshone, Inyo county, California, on April 17 and April 8, 1956 respectively. 55 paratypes collected as follows: Shoshone, April 3, 1955 (1), April 18, 1955 (5); 3.5 miles south of Shoshone, April 18, 1955 (9), April 7, 1956 (11), April 18, 1956 (11); Carson Slough, Ash Meadows, Nye county, Nevada, March 18, 1956 (1), April 8, 1956 (3), May 5, 1956 (14). 135 BuLLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 A distribution of paratypes was made as follows: 2 to Dr. Mont \. Cazier of the American Museum of Natural History, and 2 to Dr. E. S. Ross of the California Academy of Sciences, Type location: 3.5 miles south of Shoshone, Inyo county, Cali- fornia, in the Amargosa River bed. At this location the river bed is broad and the water, which is usually present, breaks up into numerous parallel rivulets which cut narrow meandering paths through the alkali beds. A ty pe of brownish alkali-resistant grass grows in clumps and patches in this area. The type location is along the westernmost waterway. This gregarious population is restricted to a narrow band only a few feet wide and not over 150 feet long. Upon leaving this small strip, the appearance of C. den- verensis propinqua may be noticed. The leached out crust of salt and alkali is very white and nearly one half inch thick; underneath, the ground is brown and moist. The adults hide under this crust. On very windy days they may be seen walking on the alkali where they are readily noticed; though they are good flyers, usually fly- ing short distances at one time, they are rarely seen taking to the air during windy weather, a characteristic typical of pseudosenilis and echo-like populations. In May this population is easily con- fused with the dull colored ssp. propinqua population which in- termixes with it. At Ash Meadows, along Carson Slough, the ssp. praedicta pop- ulation is restricted to an area a few feet wide by not over 200 feet long; adjacent to this area may be found both ssp. propinqua and amargosz hybrids. The predicta populations exhibit the same extreme reduction in maculation observed in other Cicindela groups of the upper Amargosa River region. The absence of maculation is not con- stant, varying from completely immaculate individuals to a few narrowly maculated individuals quite like those of Death Valley populations. A comparison of length in various populations of ssp. echo, pseudosenilis, and predicta indicates that there is a nearly continuous reduction in size with distance, as shown in Table A. 136 BULLETIN, So. CALtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 stil el a6 sub=species population = = = SSE ea (mm)_|_(mm) [eee se mor fe [ee wat [ae ae Fone ef [is [me [nae | as | SSRI eee oe SUD aie ps fos [ae fos preedicta Sime ef ret [ere re TABLE A! Comparison of Length in Various Populations of C. willistoni echo, pseudosenilis, and predicta. Subspecies predicta cannot be readily differentiated because of its smaller size, as size may vary because of the effect on the larvae of yearly rainfall, temperature gradients, and food supply. Color differences in the willistoni complex may be significant since they appear to be explainable by the degree of hybridization and |. The algebraic formula for the calculation of variance used in this paper is: es (XY jel where the square root of the variance is termed the "estimated standard deviation", and is denoted by the letters. The X ( x bar ) denotes the average, or mean, of the indivi- dual measurements X considered in n samples. 137 BuLLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 isolation of the various populations. However, a more reliable method is comparison of the degree of maculation with the nearest populations, as shown in Table B Type of elytral maculation ) cali aa immaculate en [wie le] eer ag [enn arma [fap DE BOESE TABLE B Comparison of Percentage of Maculation Coverage in various Populations of the C. willistoni complex. By this it can be shown that the Shoshone population of ssp. preedicta is significantly different from the population of Saratoga Springs. The Saratoga Springs population is more nearly similar to the northern populations of Death Valley and is therefore to be included with ssp. pscudosenilis. The dark blue-black color influence of ssp. predicta is observed in all Death Valley and Owens Valley populations, decreasing with distance, while the 138 BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 degree of maculation increases steadily. Subspecies pradicta may have once populated the shores of ancient Lake Tecopa, the Amargosa River into Ash Meadows, and even the connecting river into ancient Lake Pahrump which filled the valleys to the east between the Spring and Nopah Mountains. That still better defined immaculate representatives of the parent stock still exist in that area is a good possibility. Hybridization with the ancestral echo seems to have occurred in two directions, namely southward via the Amargosa River through Death Valley to the Owens Lake basin, and northward along a path now too indistinct to trace. This would explain in part why the Ash Meadows population ex- hibits more joint overlap with ssp. pseudosenilis than does the Shoshone population. The Koehn Lake (Saltdale ) population from Kern county, Cali- fornia, is placed with ssp. echo because it is hardly influenced by blue coloring, and bears much wider maculation. This indicates the possibility that ssp. predicta intruded on the ssp. echo popu- lations during one of the last pluvial periods, and that Koehn Lake, though not linked with the Death Valley System during that per- iod, was connected to it during an earlier period. C. nevadica nevadica is present at all locations in the vicinity of Shoshone. At Tecopa and Tecopa Hot Springs, located in Inyo. county, eleven miles southeast of Shoshone, C. denverensis propin- qua, C. nevadica nevadica, and C. hemorrhagica hemorrhagica were noticed during the month of May. In Nye county, Nevada, between Beatty and Springdale, at an elevation of about 3400 feet, the highway passes through alkali _ beds, intermittent streams, and damp meadows which constitute the normal channel of the upper Amargosa River. This is about 110 miles upstream of Saratoga Springs, or 190 miles from the location near Furnace Creek by following the river channel; by road it is only 44 miles from Furnace Creek, but separated by the _ Funeral Range, which may be crossed at Daylight Pass. This mountain range and other lesser ranges to the east form a barrier that effectively separates the tiger beetles of both locations. Four _ populations of the genus Cicindela live sympatrically in this upper region of the Amargosa River, and are: C. tranquebarica kirbyi LeConte 1866, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 362. C. amargose nyensis, a new subspecies described below. C. pusilla imperfecta LeConte 1851, Ann, Lyc. Nat. Hist. N.Y., oe op. 171. C. nevadica nevadica LeConte 1875, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., V, p. 159. 139 BuLLerin, So. Cater. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The first populations are observed in late March and early April, and consist of C. tranquebarica kirbyi with ever increasing num- bers, until mid-May, and C. amargosx nyensis new subspecies, which is most abundant in April. Cicindela amargosz nyensis, new subspecies Medium small in size, sericeous, black above with very faint green reflections in the muricate wrinkles of the prothorax and scutellum, and still fainter blue traces in and around the punctures of the disk of the elytra. Sparse hairiness above, consisting of a few hairs in line near the lateral edges of the prothorax, and a few scattered hairs on the frons; beneath rather densely hairy. Head and prothorax as in ssp. amargosz but smaller, and labrum rela- tively shorter; color uniformly black with very faint blue-green re- flections in the rugosity of the prothorax; the deeper transverse impressions of the head and prothorax have stronger blue and green tinges. Elytra glabrous, sides widest at apical third as in ssp. amargosx, then evenly rounded to apex; sericeous, black, with impressions faintly bluish, and purplish coloration near the base of the elytra; the small roughly triangular apical spots are very small. Underside is of a uniformly polished dark blue, the hairs are placed as in ssp. amargose. Legs black with faint green reflections that become bluish near the joints. Male—Length 10.4 mm. width 4.2 mm. Female—same as the male except for larger size and wider proportion; leagth 10.9 mm., width 4.9 mm. Holotype male, allotype female in the author’s collection. Col- lected April 16, 1955 with 48 paratopotypes, and an additional 106 paratopotypes collected on April 23, 1955. A distribution of paratypes was made as follows: 22 to Dr. M. A. Cazier of the American Museum of Natural History, 4 to Dr. E. S. Ross of the California Academy of Sciences, 2 to Dr. F. S. Truxal of the Los Angeles County Museum, 2 to Dr. W. J. Brown of the Canadian Department of Agriculture, and 2 to the Reverend B. Rotger of Pagosa Springs, Colorado. Type location: 1.6 miles south of Springdale, Nye county, Nevada; in the Amargosa River bed, along mud flats at the edge of small rivulets, in patches of short grasses. The individuals live among these grasses and are readily flushed. They are reasonably wary, but their flight is weak and short. They are not as robust as ssp. amargose, and their elytra are much softer. The ssp. nyensis population differs from ssp. amargosex by the black color which bears faintly colored reflections that are visible only under magnification, by the apical maculation that is more reduced, and by the smaller size. A comparative analysis of length, which is 140 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 one of the obvious differences, was made between a series of 50 ssp. nyensis and a series of 69 typical ssp. amargose from near Furnace Creek, Death Valley, California. The results of these measurements are shown in Table C. lati sample size} longest shortest | average length(mm)_| poet Gl ed Ee a) Ga) Pemame| fem ene o[s|eo| Bag] @7— [ao] ia |e | | Mees jelels| | | {| [| | TABLE C Comparison of Length in Populations of C. amargose amargose and nyensis. The report by R. G. Dahl (40:79-80) indicates that amargosx specimens collected in northwestern Nevada and nearby areas of California show variable color patterns between black, green, and bronze. Ina letter to the author (1954) M. A. Cazier mentions that at Gerlach and other places in northern Nevada the popula- tion samples run about fifty-fifty green and black. This would indicate that there are extensive hybrid populations. At Ash Meadows, Nevada, approximately 50 miles downstream of the nyensis type location, at the edge of a connecting stream known as Carson Slough, the author has collected individuals from a hybrid population that show characteristics of both subspecies, and at their extremes are indistinguishable from typical ssp. amargosz and typical ssp. nyensis. The hybrid area lies between the type locations of both subspecies, along the Amargosa River which nearly connects all three populations. The population of ssp. dmargose near Furnace Creek is constant in its larger size and maculation, and medium green color. This latter location is not a part of the Amargosa River drainage system as reported 141 BuLtvetin, So. Canim. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 (Dahl 39:222), but of the Salt Creek system which flows south from near Lida, Nevada; both systems meet at Badwater some 30 miles south of the type location of ssp. amargose. Since the two systems rarely flow simultaneously, it is quite probable that the two subspecies are now totally allopatric. Furthermore, from the lack of ssp. amargosw at Saratoga Springs, it appears that the hybrid population of Ash Meadows has become completely iso- lated from the parent stocks in recent times. In May and June, C. pusilla imperfecta is present in great num- bers near Springdale. The color of this subspecies is bright blue and blue-green. Individuals of C. nevadica nevadica may also be found near Springdale at the same time. Ash Meadows is located northeast of Death Valley Junction, California, and lies mostly in Nye county, Nevada, between the Amargosa Desert and the Resting Springs Mountains, at an aver- age elevation of about 2200 feet. Five subspecies of Cicindela have been found there, scattered in greater or lesser populations wherever water is most abundant and permanent. These are: C. denverensis propinqua Knaus 1922, Journ. N.Y. Ent. Soc., XXX, p. 194 syn. C. arida Davis 1928, Pan-Pac. Ent., vol. V, no. 9 65 2, p- 6b. C. willistoni predicta, new subspecies. C. amargos:e hybrids (amargose X nyensis). C. nevadica nevadica LeConte 1875, Trans, Amer. Ent. Soc., V, p. 159. C. hemorrhagica hemorrhagica LeConte 1851, Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. N.Y., V, p. mig Not found by the author are C. punctulata punctulata Oliv., C. var. chihuahuze Bates, and C. tenuisignata Lec., all reported by W. Knaus (22:194- 195). The existence of tenuisignata in Ash Meadows is very probable in the opinion of this author, but he ventures that there was some confusion in reporting the existence of ssp. punctulata and ssp. chihuahuz in this region. The popula- tions were observed as follows: I. The first populations noted at Ash Meadows are those of C. denverensis propinqua, C. willistoni predicta, and C. amar- gose hybrids. Subspecies propinqua has been encountered as early as March along Carson Slough, from Nevada into California, also at Bole Spring and near Ash Meadows Lodge, both in Ne- vada. The type location for ssp. propinqua is in the northern part of the Meadows in the drainage area of Fairbanks Springs, at the 142 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 headwaters of Carson Slough. This unusually bright green Cicin- dela may be doubtfully classed as a subspecies of C. denverensis as originally reported (Knaus 22:194) and later verified by Nicolay and Weiss (32:352), and Davis (29:100), but it is this author's opinion that it is a close relative of the purpurea group, and that alliance to tranquebarica (Horn 30:81, Cazier 39:37) will stand review. Of 118 individuals collected in March and early April 1955, only 3 could be called muddy green as reported by A. C. Davis (28:65) in his description of the synonymous C. arida; but the May specimens are nearly all muddy green. Many of the early individuals possess brilliant coppery reflections that could class them among our most beautiful tiger beetles; unfortunately, this brilliance fades within a few days after death to the basic bright green, with only a few specimens retaining a small measure of their former brilliance. Subspecies propinqua prefers the whitest alkali flats at the farthest edge of streams and damp places. These areas are always sparsely covered with alkali-resistant grass stubbles. The individuals hide under these grasses, and when flushed make one long flight into the open where they may be easily caught. They generally stay fairly apart from each other over an extended area; a considerable amount of walking is neces- sary to net a few. Specimens were collected under the same con- ditions at Shoshone, Inyo county, California, in the bed of the Amargosa River, along with ssp. preedicta. Il. C. nevadica nevadica reaches its greatest population count in Ash Meadows. Individuals have been located at Springdale, Nevada; Death Valley, Inyo and San Bernardino counties, and as far west as Saltdale (Koehn Lake), Kern county (Cazier 37:117), and Saline Valley, Inyo county, California; but they have never been seen in the numbers encountered at Ash Meadows in June and July. While staying at Ash Meadows Lodge one evening in June of 1954, the author found ssp. nevadica swarming at lights and had to shut the door to his room to keep them out. They have been collected at several places in Ash Meadows, al- ways near water. When out in numbers they are easy to collect as their flight is short, usually from one side of a stream to the _ other. Their color is brown over a green background. They prefer open ground where they blend well with their surroundings, while avoiding alkali covered areas. 143 BuLLETIN, So. CALirF. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Ill. C. hamorrhagica hemorrhagica is not uncommon at Ash Meadows from June onward. It prefers muddy areas where the ground is darkest, always at the edge of water. Individuals vary from fully maculated to coal black, all within the same population. LITERATURE CITED Cazier, M. A. 1937. New Coleoptera. Pan-Pacific Entomologist, Vol. XII, no. 3, pp. 113-118. 1931. Two New Western Tiger Beetles with Notes. Bulletins of the Brooklyn Entomological Society, Vol. XXXIV, no. 1, pp. 24-28. Dahl, R. G. 1939. A New California Tiger Beetle, Bull. Brook. Ent. Soc., XXXIV, pp, 221-222. 1940. Notes on Some Cicindelida. Pan-Pac. Ent., Vol. XVI, no. 2, pp. 79-80. Davis, A. C. 1928. A New Cicindela. Pan-Pac. Ent., Vol. V, no. 2, pp. 65-66. 1929. A Correction. Pan-Pac. Ent., Vol. V, no. 3, p. 100. Horn, W. 1930. Notes—List of Cicindelidzee of America North of Mexico. Tran- sanctions of the American Entomological Society, Vol XLI, pp. 73-86. Knaus, W. 1922. Two New Forms of Cicindela. Journal of the New York Entomolo- gical Society, Vol. XXX, pp. 194-197. Nicolay, A. S. and Weiss, H. B. 1932. Synopsis of the Cicindelide. Journ. N. Y. Ent. Soc., Vol. XI, pp. 341-345. Vaurie, P. 1950. Four New Subspecies of the Genus Cicindela. American Museum Novitates, no. 1458, pp. 1-2. 1951. Corrections. Amer. Mus. Nov., no. 1479, p. 12. i 144 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 NOTES ON THE GENUS ISOMIRA (ALLECULIDAE), AND A NEW SPECIES FROM ARIZONA (Notes on North American Coleoptera, No. 2) By Cuaryes S. Papp A new species of alleculid beetle was recently taken in south- ern Arizona by Dr. John Adams Comstock, which is herein des- cribed, and its relationship to certain other members of the genus briefly discussed. A list of all members of the genus occurring in the United States is appended. The numbers preceding each species are those of the Leng’s Catalogue of the Coleoptera of America, North of Mexico. 11305. Isomira discolor Csy. (Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci., VI. Nov. 1891, No. 2, p. 145-146). — A moderately convex, piceous black, rather strongly shining, elongate-elliptical species, with through- out concolorous antennae and legs, pronotum and prosternum pale ferruginous, the pubescence fine, very short and sparse. The head distinctly shining, the comparatively wide interspaces of the punctures being polished. Small, 3.5 — 4.0 mm. Described from California. Fairly rare: 3 specimens collected by R. Hopping in Kaweah, Calif, are in the collection of Mr. G. P. Mackenzie (San Marino, Calif.) and one specimen collected by the writer on July 2nd, 1956 in hte Tokopeh Valley, Sequoia National Park, Calif. on about 7,000 ft. elevation. 11307. Isomira sericea (Say). (Journ. Ac. N.S. Phila. III, 1823, p. 270). — This is an eastern species, previously reported from Massachusetts to North Carolina, Florida and Indiana. Specimens from Baltimore, Maryland (collected by F. E. Blaisdell, June 26, 1909) and Pelham, Mass. (by Marion E. Smith, June 6, 1942) are in the Mackenzie collection and in that of the author, as are also 8 specimens from Rochester, N.Y. (by F. C. Fletcher, July 26, 1947). I. sericea are elongate-elliptical, evenly convex, feebly shining beetles, with fine pubescence. The head is dull, densely punctate and evenly convex. Antennae long and slender, nearly two-thirds as long as the body, and the fourth joints are equal in both sexes. The prothorax is one-half wider than long, the sides rounded anteriorly, nearly straight and parallel in basal half. The elytra are nearly four times longer than the prothorax, the narrowly rounded humeri wider than the thoracic base, rather acute at apex, finely punctured with three or four impressed striae near the suture, and more strongly marked at apex. Where the striae are deeply impressed they become very minutely punctate. Else- where there is no trace of serial punctuation. 145 BuLvetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The under surface is shining; the abdomen very minutely but feebly and densely punctate. Legs, very slender. The eyes of the female are slightly smaller than those of the male, and the joints of the antennze somewhat shorter and thicker. Medium large species: 4.5 — 5.5 mm. 11308. Isomira variabilis (Horn). (Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. V, 1875, p. 156). — A western species, fairly common in Washington State. Many specimens from Salmon Arm, British Columbia (collected by Dr. H. B. Leech, June 12, 1934) are in the authors’ and also in the Mackenzie collection. Two specimens from Trout Lake, B.C. (by E. Hamling, June 23, 1942), one from Lake Arrow- head (June 10, 1939) and Mt. Wilson, Calif. (June 15, 1940) collected by and are in the Mackenzie collection: No specimens reported recently from California (Horn, |. ¢.: “Occurs rather abundantly all over California” ). The head is nearly evenly convex, finely punctate; eyes small; antennae slender, filiform, and half as long as body. The prothorax is about two-thirds wider than long, and gradually narrowed from base to apex; sides broadly rounded anteriorly; disc densely and rather finely punctate. The elytra are approximately three and one-third times longer than is the prothorax, one-third to one-half wider in the center, and somewhat rounded at apex. The disc shows scarcely a trace of impressed striae. Abdomen minutely punctate, the metasternum coarsely and rather densely so; prosternum dull and very densely punctured. The legs are pale and slender. In the male the eyes are separated by about three times their width. — Fairly large species: 4.3 — 5.9 mm. 11309. Isomira luscitiosa Csy. (Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci., VI, November 1891, No. 2, p. 148-149). — Generally slightly broader behind, rather narrowly oval, dull, dark piceous brown with blackish portions on the anterior; pubescence fine, short, moder- ately dense. The head evenly convex, very densely, rather coarse- ly punctate; eyes very small and unusually convex. The antennae are filiform, slender, three-fifths as long as the body. The pro- thorax is three-fourths wider than long with broadly rounded sides which are almost straight and parallel toward the base; disc extremely densely punctate, the punctures rather coarse. Elytra about three times as long as the prothorax, and, at or behind the middle, nearly one half wider, the two bases equal; apex rather abruptly but acutely rounded; disc finely but distinctly punctate, without trace of impressed striae. Legs slender, moderate in length, the basal joint of the hind tarsi shorter than the remainder. Small species: 4.0 — 4.3 mm in length. Seven specimens in my collection from southern California: Lake Arrowhead, San Gabriel Canyon, Azusa and Mt. Wilson are 146 BULLETIN, So. CAatir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 the localities. During May and June on wild flowers. Four speci- mens from the same locations are in the Mackenzie collection. 11310. Isemira pulla (Melsh.) — (Proc. Ac. Phil., HI. 1846, p. 60.). — This is an eastern species, ranging from Rhode Island to North Carolina. My collection contains four specimens from Tampa, Florida, the southernmost recorded point of its distribu- tion. Four specimens in the Mackenzie collection from Baltimore, Maryland (June 16, 1909, collected by F. E. Blaisdell). The head of I. pulla is finely and very densely punctate, the surface almost flat; eyes small; antennae slender, about half as long as the body. The prothorax is three-fourths wider than long, strongly narrowed from base to apex, with almost evenly arcuate sides. The apex is more than one half as wide as the base, the latter being transverse, the angles right, not distinctly rounded. Elytra nearly three times longer than the prothorax, and beyond the middle nearly two-fifths wider. The base is equal in width to the thoracic base. Apex moderately acute, the disc punctured and with subsutural striae nearly as in I. sericea, but the punc- tures are slightly coarser and a little sparser. — Length 5.0 — 5.5 mm. oo PLATE 34 Isomira comstocki. Enlarged X14 —— Isomira comstocki new species. — Small, narrowly oval, head dark, prothorax slightly red-brown, elytra with very fine pale yellow pubescence. | | 147 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Heap brown, finely and very densely punctate, the surface almost flat, slightly elevated between the eyes where the punctua- tion is heavier and the color black or blackish brown, Antennae filiform, about half as long as the body. ProrHorax wider than long, strongly narrowed from base to apex. The base and a longitudinal depression in the middle of the prothorax, reddish-brown. EL_yTrRA more than three times longer than the prothorax and wider at the shoulders than the middle, then becoming broader and at the apex moderately rounded. Pale yellowish-brown in color, and slightly blackish-brown near the scutellum. Disc dense- ly rounded, with four striae running continuously from shoulder nearly to the apex. Surface pale, with yellowish-brown pube- scence. ABbOMEN dark brown, finely punctate and shining. Legs are long and slender, light brown in color. Length: 4.5 — 5.0 mm. Hotorype: Santa Rita Mountains, Madera Canyon, Arizona, August 2, 1954, collected by Dr. J. A. Comstock, to be placed in the coleoptera collection of the Los Angeles County Museum, De- partment of Entomology. ParatyPE No. 1: Same locality, July 30, 1954 to be placed with the California Academy of Science, San Francisco, California. ParatyPE No. 2: Same locality, August 2, 1954, at present re- tained in the collection of the author. The holotype and paratypes were collected by Dr. John Adams Comstock, to whom I dedicate the species. The new species is intermediate between I. pulla (Melsh. ) and I. quadristriata Coup. 11311. Isomira quadristriata Coup. (—velutina Lec.). (The Canadian Nat., 1865, p. 62. — Casey, Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci., VI, Noy. 1891, No. 2, p. 149-150). — A northern species, widely dis- tributed from Canada (vicinity of Lake Superior) to North Caro- lina. Two specimens in my collection are from Rochester, N.Y. (July 3, 1947, collected by F. C. Fletcher) and three examples from Oswego, N.Y. (July 27, 1951, of my own collecting). Six specimens in the G. P . Mackenzie collection from Midland, Michi- gan (June 14, 1936, June 8, 1939 and June 14, 1940), Minnes- magua Lake, Ontario, Canada (July 13, 1938, collected by B. S. Bullock) and two examples from Yellowstone, Wyoming {June 13, 1938, collected by G. P. Mackenzie). 148 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Head feebly and evenly convex, densely punctate, rather shining; eyes small; antennae filiform, half as long as the body. Prothorax nearly twice as wide as it is long, apex rather wide, two-thirds as wide as the base, the latter being transverse, very broadly and feebly arcuate towards the middle. Disc finely, deeply and more or less densely punctate. The basa fovea are almost obsolete. Elytra four times as long as the prothorax. one- fourth wider near the middle, and narrowly rounded to the apex. Disc finely and deeply, although sparsely punctate, with only the vaguest traces of impressed striae, except the two sutural, which become very pronounced toward the apex.—Larger species: 5.0 — 5.75 mm long. Following is a list of all species of the genus Isomira Muls., found in the United States and Canada, separated into two distinct groups: GROUP A: Elytra without distinct series of punctures 11304 iowensis Csy. — lowa 11305 discolor Csy. — California 11306 tenebrosa Csy. — New York 113807 sericea (Say) — Massachusetts to Carolina 11308 variabilis Horn — California and Washington 11309 luscitiosa Csy. — California 11310 pulla (Melsh. ) — Rhode Island to N. Carolina 11310% comstocki Papp —Southern Arizona (Santa Rita Mt. ) 11311 quadristriata Coup. — Southern Canada to N. Carolina (syn. velutina Lec.) and Indiana 11312 similis Blatch. — Indiana 11313 monticola Csy. — California 11314 oblongula Csy. — New York and Indiana GROUP B: Elytra with series of more or less complete and sometimes feebly impressed small punctures. 11315 valida Sz. — Florida 11316 texana Csy. — Texas 11317 ruficollis Ham. — Pennsylvania 11318 ignora Blatch. — Florida 149 BuLttetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SUBSPECIES OF THE MEGATHYMUS YUCCAE (BOISD. & LeC.) COMPLEX. ( Lepidoptera, Rhopalocera, Megathymidae. ) Don B. Stracuincs & J. R. Turner, Caldwell, Kansas. For a number of years the subspecies of Megathymus yuccae that feeds on Yucca brevifolia Engelm. in California has been called Megathymus yucca navajo Skin. Actually navajo is a much smaller subspecies (type locality is in the Zuni Mts. of N. Mex. ) that occurs in parts of N. Mex., Ariz. and Colo. The California subspecies being unnamed we describe it herewith: Megathymus yuccae martini new subspecies FEMALE. Upper surface: Primaries: Grey black with the base having only the faintest indication of sordid yellowish scales and hairs. Spot 1 (cell spot) is rectangular and curves slightly inward at each side. Spots 2, 3 & 4 (subapical spots) white and rather large, compared to the males. Spots 5 and 6 (submarginal spots) are out of line with the remaining three marginal spots (7,8 &9). Spots 7, 8 & 9 are larger, average 5 mm. across. Spot 9 is pointed inward, whereas 7 and 8 are broadly rectangular and slightly rounded on the inner side. All spots (except 2, 3 & 4) are pale yellow. Fringes: Alternately checkered greyish and black. Secondaries: Grey black with some light greyish hairs near the base. There is a broad greyish marginal border with veins edged in black. Spots 10, 11, 12 & 13 greyish yellow. Spots 12 and 13 are usually well defined. Spots 10 and 1] are much smaller and in some cases one or both are not present. These two spots (10 & 11) are placed inward nearer the base and thus are out of line with 12 and 13. Fringes: Grey with only the veins edged in black. Under surfaces: Primaries: Greyish black with the outer margin grey. The spots reappear and are of the same size but somewhat lighter. Secondaries: Greyish black over the center portion, becoming greyer near the outer margin. Costal region grey. The two white spots below the costal margin are about the same size, except the outer one is more linear. Abdomen: Dark — grey above, somewhat lighter beneath. Thorax: Grey above, brownish-black below. Palpi: Sordid White. Antennae: Club black above, lighter beneath, remaining portion greyish, slightly ringed with black. Expanse of forewing varies from 26 mm. to 33 mm., average 31 mm. Wing measurements of Holotype: Fore- wing, apex to base 33 mm., apex to outer angle 19.5 mm., outer ~ angle to base 23 mm. Hindwing, base to end of vein Cu, 23mm. _ 150 BuLLeETIN, So. CAautir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 MALE. Upper surface: Primaries: Grey black with the base of the wings tinted with yellowish hairs and scales. The tip of the apex is grey. Spot 1 is small, pale yellow to chalky white. Immediately above this is a small white area usually smaller than the spot below. Spots 2, 3, & 4 white. Spots 5 and 6 out of line, nearer Outer margin and very pale yellow in color. Spots 7, 8 & 9 are larger and are of the same pale yellow to chalky white color as spot 1. Fringes checkered black and white. Secondaries: Grey black with base tinted with yellowish scales and hairs. There is a medium sized marginal border, pale yellow to chalky white (almost a bluish cast). The veins in this marginal area are faintly outlined in black. Under Surface: Primaries: Brown black with apex and outer margin grey. The spots are all white or chalky white, the lower 3 marginal spots having only the slightest yellow- ish cast. Secondaries: Basal areas brown black, with remainder of wing grey. There is a well defined costal area near the base and beneath it two white spots. The inward spot being developed and triangular in shape, the outward spot a thin crescent curved outwardly. Abdomen, Thorax, Palpi and Antennae very similiar to female. Expanse of forewing varies from 23 mm. to 28 mm., average 26 mm. Wing measurement of Allotype: Forewing, apex to base 27 mm., apex to outer angle 15 mm., outer angle to base 18 mm., hindwing, base to end of vein Cu, 16.5 mm. Described from 76 specimens, 40 males and 36 females. All of these specimens were collected by Dr. John A. Comstock, Lloyd M. Martin and Frank Sala at or near Little Rock, L.A. County, Calif. either as pupae or adults during January, February and March, except two which were collected at Whittier, Calif., by Lowell Hulbirt. HotoryPr: March 23, 1945 (Lloyd M. Martin) Little Rock, Los Angeles County, Calif. and AtLorypr, Feb. 23, 1939 (Lloyd M. Martin) same location, are in the collection of the authors. 15 male and 15 female paratypes are in the Los Angeles County Museum; one pair of paratypes in the San Diego Museum; one male paratype in the collection of F. Martin Brown; one pair of paratypes in the collection of Lowell Hulbirt. 10 male and 8 female paratypes in the collection of H. A. Freeman. The remain- ing paratypes in the collection of the authors. The females of M. yuccae martini can be distinguished from all other subspecies of yuccae by the following characters: Grey- black coloration with the pale spots, the greyish marginal border of the secondaries and the very indistinct, irregularly shaped band 151 BuLLeTIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 of spots on the secondaries. The basic characterictics of the males are their grey-black coloration and chalky white to pale yellow spots. We name this subspecies in honor of Lloyd M. Martin who has been most patient with our many requests for information and data. The life history of this subspecies has been fully re- ported by Comstock and Dammers, (“Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences,” Vol. XXXIII, May-August, 1934, Part 2, p. 79, 87-92). See also “Quarterly of the Los Angeles County Museum,” Vol. VI, No. 2 (Summer, 1947) page 12 for further life history data, including pictures of type locality. Tink- ham pictures both surfaces of both sexes in his recent paper “Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences,” Vol. 53, Part 2, Pg. 75, 1954, describing Megathymus yuccx arizonx. Due to the fact that this paper had not been published he refers to martini as navajo. Due to the fact that the species and subspecies of Megathymus appear to have definite food preferences we apply the name martini only to the feeders on Yucca brevifolia, for the time being. BULLETIN, So. CALtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 ANALYSIS OF VARIATION IN A RECENTLY EXTINCT POLYMORPHIC LYCAENID BUTTERFLY, GLAUCOPSYCHE XERCES (Bdv.), WITH NOTES ON ITS BIOLOGY AND TAXONOMY By J. C. Downey’ anp W. H. LANGE, JR.’ The holarctic genus Glaucopsyche is represented in North America by only two species: G. lygdamus (Doubl.), of wide- spread occurrence throughout the United States and Canada, and G. xerces (Bdv.), previously restricted to narrow limits on the San Francisco peninsula in California. Our records indicate that the last known specimens of G. xerces were collected at the Pre- sidio in San Francisco during May, 1941. Since that time numer- ous lepidopterists have made many collecting trips to the areas in San Francisco where, for at least two prior decades, the only known population of this species had existed. We are of the opinion that it is extinct. Population systematists have long been interested in the effects of population size and geographical distribution on infra- (and intra-) specific variation. But for its untimely extinction, G. xerces would have made a unique tool for studies of this type. It was so limited in distribution that any individual was geo- graphically within flight range of its contemporaries. In this sense it could be considered a species consisting of but one popu- lation. Equally important, the wings exhibit extreme continuous and discontinuous variation in macular components. Unfortunate- ly, little information has been recorded in the literature, and it was felt that the following observations on the biology and var- iation would be of value. ' Department of Zoology, Southern Illinois University, Carbondale, Mlinois. * Department of Entomology, University of California, Davis, California. 153 BuLLetIN, So. Cause. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Glaucopsyche xerces (Bdvy.) Lycaena xerces Bdy, 1852, Ann. Soc, Ent. France, p. 296; Ed- wards 1872, Synopsis No. Amer. Butt., p. 35; Strecker 1874, Lepid. Rhop. and Heter., p. 86; Edwards 1877, Cat. Lepid. Amer. No. Mex., p. 45; Strecker 1878, A Complete Syn. Cat. Macrolepid., p. 96; Edwards 1884, Revised Cat., p. 303; May- nard 1891, Manual No. Amer. Butt., p. 158; Skinner 1895, Syn. Cat. No. Amer. Lepid., p. 55; Smith 1903, Check List Lepid. Boreal Amer., p. 8; Skinner 1905, A Syn. Cat., Suppl. No. 1, p. 19; Williams 1908, Ent. News, p. 476; Williams 1910, Ent. News, p. 38; Skinner 1914, Ent. News, p. 326; Skinner 1917, Ent. News, p. 214; Huguenin 1918, Ent. News, p. 392; Wright 1906, Butt. West Coast, p. 222, and pl. 29, figs. 370, (370)b, (370)c; Draudt 1924, In Seitz Macrolepid., p. 815, pl. 144 row C; Holland 1930, Butt. Book (Rev. Ed.), p. 261, pl. 65, figs. 41, 42, pl. 30 fig. 43. Lycaena antiacis Bdy. 1852, op. cit., p. 300; Edwards 1872, op. cit., p. 37; Strecker (in part) 1874, op. cit., p. 84; Edwards 1877, op. cit., p. 46; Strecker 1878, loc. cit.; Edwards 1884, loc. cit.; Maynard (in part) 1891, loc. cit.; Skinner 1898, loc. cit.; Smith 1903, loc. cit.; Skinner 1905, loc. cit.; Williams 1908, loc. cit.; idem., 1910, loc. cit.; Skinner 1914, loc. cit.; Huguenin 1918, loc. cit.; Draudt 1924, op. cit., p. 816, pl. 144 row C. Polyommatus xerces, Morris 1860, Smiths, Misc. Coll., p. 12; idem., 1862, Diurnal and crepuscular Lepid., p. 88. Polyommatus antiacis, Morris 1860, loc. cit.; idem., 1862, op. cit., p: 90: Lycaena mertila Edw. 1866, Proc. Ent. Soc. Philad., p. 206; Strecker 1874, op. cit., p. 85; Wright 1906, loc. cit. Lycaena polyphemus Bdvy. 1869, Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. 49. Cupido xerces, Kirby 1871, A Syn. Cat. Diurnal Lepid., p, 373. Cupido antiacis, Kirby 1871, op. cit., p. 371. Cupido polyphemus, Kirby 1871, op. cit., p. 373. Glaucopsyche lygdamus (Doubleday ) of Scudder (in part) 1873, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., p. 198; Wright 1906, op. cit., p. 221 and pl. 29, figs. 367, (367)b, (367 )c. Nomiades xerces, Scudder 1876, Can. Ent., p. 21; idem, 1876a, syn. List Butt. No. Amer., p. 117; Dyar 1902; Bull. U. 3S: Nat. Mus., No. 52, p. 43; McDunnough 1914, Ent. Rec., p. 200; Skinner 1917, Ent. News, p. 214. Nomiades antiacis, Scudder 1876, loc. cit.; idem, 1876a, loc. cit.; Dyar 1902, loc. cit. Lycaena behri (partim auct. nec. Edw.) vide Scudder 1876, op. cit., p. 24; Strecker (in part) 1878, loc. cit., p. 97. Lycaena antiacis var. behrii, Edw. 1877, op. cit., p. 46. Lycaena antiacis var. mertila, Edw. 1877, loc. cit. Lycaena antiacis polyphemus, Edw. 1877, loc. cit. Nomiades antiacis behrii, Dyar 1902, loc. cit. Nomiades antiacis mertila, Dyar 1902, loc. cit. 154 BULLETIN, So. CAutir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Glaucopsyche xerces, Barnes and McDunnough 1916, Cont. Lepid. No. Amer., 3, p. 117; idem, 1917, Check List Lepid. Boreal Amer., p. 17; Comstock 1927, Butt. of Calif., p. 199, pl. 56, figs. 30, 31; McDunnough 1938, Check List . . . Macro- lepid., p. 28. Glaucopsyche xerces polyphemus, Comstock 1927, op. cit., p. 200, plemonenes! I 2: Glaucopsyche xerces mertila, Comstock 1927, loc. cit., pl. 57, fig. 4. Glaucopsyche xerces mertila ab. huguenini, Gunder 1925, Ent. News, p. 3, pl. 1, figs. 00 and 0; Comstock 1927, loc. cit., pl. 57, fig. 5. Glaucopsyche xerces mertila tr. £. barnesi, Gunder 1927, Can. Ent., DeZOomplyAuAgs: 2) 2a and) 2b, Glaucopsyche xerces ab. antiacis, Comstock, loc. cit., pl. 57, fig. 3. The complete synonomy listed above is based on available lit- erature and not actual specimens. It is quite possible that in cer- tain instances the catalogues and other compilations mentioned may have been in error in the application of the name. Lacking the specimens available to these early revisors (if indeed some of them actually saw the specimens), we cannot certify to the validity of the usage of the name. Quite understandably, with but few specimens before them, early workers were often misled by the extreme color polymorphism exhibited not only in xerces but in many of the species in the subfamily. The two species most likely to have been confused with xerces are Glaucopsyche lygdamus (Dbldy.) and Icaricia icariodes (Bdv.), both of which are polytypic and have numerous subspecific categories. G. xerces has been reported as far north as British Columbia (Black- more, 1920), as far east as Nebraska (Cary, 1901) and Colorado (Mead, 1875) and in southern California (Simms, 1920). This adds to the synonomy of the species involved in these areas, but the occurrence of G. xerces outside of the San Francisco region has not been verified. Nores ON BIoLocy The life history of G. xerces has been previously described ( Williams, 1908). The reader is referred to that work for detailed descriptions of the egg, the four larval instars, and the pupa, Drawings of the immature stages can also be found in Comstock (1927). The following are notes and comments on the species as recorded in the literature and from observations in the field and on larvae raised by Lange between 1939 and 1941. Williams states that the “usual” food plant is Lotus glaber Greene (= L. scoparius [Nutt.] Ottley), a prostrate, bushy per- ennial. One larva was discovered on Lupinus arboreus Sims, a tall perennial with yellow flowers. He noted that confined larvae “readily devoured” Jeaves and seed pods of Lupinus micranthus Dougl. and Astragalus menziesii Gray. 155 Butietin, So. Cauime. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 In March, 1939, Lange found eggs on the first two species mentioned above, and on a small, blue flowered Lupinus sp. (micranthus?). He examined ten plants of L. arboreus varying, in height from one to three and one-half feet. A total of twenty eggs were found; some plants had as many as eight eggs per plant. Five plants had no eggs. In the same area on the same day, ten specimens of Lotus scoparius were examined, varying in diameter from one to three feet. Thirty-four eggs were discovered with as many as nine eggs per plant. Only one plant had no eggs. The Lotus would appear to be slightly favored with an average of 3.4 eggs per plant compared to 2 eggs per plant for the Lupinus. Unfortunately, no information could be obtained on the possible effects of the different food plants on the variation. _ Some measurements of the egg were taken. The width varied from 0.53 to 0.70 mm.; height range was from 0.36 to 0.40. During oviposition on L. arboreus the female alighted, brought the abdomen forward, and placed an egg in the small depression at the base of the leaflet. On Lotus scoparius, however, the eggs were laid on the new growth near the tips of the leaflets or on the dorsal surfaces of the new growth. Coolidge (1913) states that he has had success in obtaining eggs from gravid females in captivity. Apparently the reactions of G. xerces were similar to other lycaenids under laboratory conditions. Williams (loc. cit.) reported that the larvae of G. xerces are distinguishable from those of G. lygdamus behrii (Edw.) but, beyond mentioning that behrii larvae are broader, gave only minor color criteria. Elsewhere Williams points out that the gen- eral color pattern of both species is similar in both larval and pupal stages. In addition, the larval color seems to be variable in both species. More striking similarity between the early stages of both species can be noted by comparing Williams’ description with that given by Bower (1911) for G. lygdamus from Ilinois. If a structure by structure comparison is made in chart form, neglecting the factors of color, the similarity would raise the question of conspecificity. Bower, however, records five larval instars for lygdamus while xerces has only four. It is known that temperature can affect the number of instars. Williams also notes a row of short supra-stigmoidal clavate hairs not discussed by Bower. This similarity in the two species, plus that noted in the genitalia and in the macular pattern, indicates a much closer phylogenetic relationship than heretofore assumed, Forty-eight days elapsed from the time the eggs hatched until pupation, in the specimens raised by Williams. Those raised by Lange took thirty-one days. Again, temperature at which the larvae were raised could account for the difference in time. 156 BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 As is common to many of the Lycaenidae, the larvae of G. xer- ces are tended by ants. They bear a secretory gland on the tenth segment and a pair of eversible sacs on the eleventh segment. Using Balduf’s (1939) classification of entomophagous insects, they are hereby considered facultative myrmecophiles. As evi- denced by successful laboratory rearings, they are not completely dependent on ants for their welfare. Tilden (1947) records the occurrence of the pupa of G. lygdamus behrii (Edw.) in an ant nest. And almost every mature larva of the Illinois subspecies of G. lygdamus was tended by ants, according to Bower (1911). Bower also reports cannibalism in lygdamus. Downey has reared G. lygdamus from Utah without ants. Apparently the genus is associated in nature with ants, but the relationship is not manda- tory. Three unidentified hymenopterous parasites were found prey- ing on the larva by Williams (loc. cit., p. 482). An ichneumon was also reared from the pupa by the same author. All the para- sites emerged the same season. Length of pupal life averages between ten and eleven months. However, adult emergence seems to be influenced by environ- mental factors. Of the specimens raised by Williams in a warm, dry room, one emerged in mid-winter; others came out the follow- ing year “.. . quite late as compared with xerces in nature”. Two adults in our series are marked “ex egg, Lake Merced, San Fran- cisco’ by E. J. Newcomer. Both were raised in Palo Alto, Cali- fornia. A male emerged November 2, 1909, a female November 4, 1909. On July 26, 1941, Lange searched for pupae in the area where eggs were previously discovered that year. No pupae could be found on the plants, in the detritus below the plants, or in the ground. The major flight period of the adult is from about March 10 to April 15. However, specimens may be taken from late February to early June. On March 19, 1919, the only population noted by Lange was flying in a limited area west of the Marine Hospital, Presidio, San Francisco. He observed pairs mating on Lupinus arboreus, and two mating pairs were preserved. One pair was an antiacis male crossed with a xerces female, and the other pair was the reciprocal. These are shown on plate 36. Since two such matings were observed in one day, it would suggest that there is no selec- tive mating of macular types. Huguenin (1918) has also reported antiacis-xerces crossing, and Barnes and McDunnough (1916) picture a bilateral heteromorphic female; antiacis on one side, mc on the other. These facts verify the synonomy presented above. BuLLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Lange made another series of observations in the same area on March 23, 1941. The butterflies were limited to a small area 65 feet wide by 140 feet long in which Lotus scoparius was found. The Lotus occurred in patches in the partial shade of the Mon- terey Cypress (Cupressus macrocarpa Hartw.) in well-drained sandy soil. Lupinus arboreus was widely distributed among the Lotus, and extended beyond the range of the Lotus and the butterflies. It is of interest that this same association of plants remains essentially unchanged today. There are other areas on the San Francisco peninsula where this situation can be found, Howell (1949) states that these species of Lotus and Lupinus are common in sandy areas in Marin County (just north of San Francisco). Monterey cypress, however, does not occur there. Expansion of the city of San Francisco has destroyed much natural habitat formerly available to insects in the area. However, it would seem that sufficient ecological niches remain so that dimin- ishing habitat could not be the single cause of the extinction of xerces. What effect collecting pressures had on the species is also a debatable point, but it is doubted that it had any beneficial effect on the survival of the species. Physical factors, particularly tem- perature and humidity, are much more static on the peninsula than in regions more remote from the meliorating effects of the prevailing westerly winds off the ocean. Thus, the climate of this coastal region tends to be warmer in the winter and cooler in the summer than inland areas. The effect of a sudden shift in ampli- tude of these rather narrow annual climatic oscillations might have been greater on xerces than on comparable numbers of an- other species in another area where the “normal” yearly fluctua- tions are more extreme. M ACULATION The results of a general analysis of the macular pattern in G. xerces are partially summarized in table 1; the “typical” spot arrangement is shown on plate 35, figure 6. “Typical” spotting of the undersurface was determined by the frequency of combinations of spots as well as by the frequency with which a given macule occurred. Three hundred forty-four specimens were examined. The following macules belong to the “typical” set: forewing, RM, R4, M1, M2, M3, CU1, and CU2 + A (fused); hindwing, SC2, M, RM, SC1, RS, M1, M2, M3, CU1, CU2 + 1A, and 2A. Of the individuals examined, 33.7 per cent had these spots, and the others had varying combinations of miss- ing or additional macules, only a few of which exhibited any degree of consistency. 158 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 SO eS Distended view of genitalia of G. xerces (Bdv.); the zedeagus has been removed and the entire structure is somewhat flattened. F=furca U=uncus G=gnathos (—falx ) Va=valvae T=tegumen Vi=vinculum Lateral view of distal part of aedeagus with everted vesica. Note one group of cornuti on both the dorsal and ventral surfaces. Dorsal view of aedeagus with vesica in normal position and cornuti visible. Lateral view of genitalia of G. lygdamus behrii (Edw.) from Berkeley Hills, Alameda Co., California. Same view, G. xerces (Bdy.) from San Francisco, California. “Typical” spot pattern of undersurface of wings of G. xerces as determined by analysis of three hundred forty four specimens (see text). The macules are designated by the names of the veins above them, except those specifically marked. BuLLetin, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Wing Condition Sex oo ae Number Examined 226 118 “Typical” f(s 45 Spotting (31.4) (38.1) Aberrations U 1 (3.0) (0.08 ) Additional 22, 11 Macules (9.7) (9.3) Re ‘Fore- 57 16 Potal Nome (25.2) (13.5) Missing les Macules Hind- 141 59 wing (62.3) (50.0) Missing more 78 14 than one macule (34.5) (11.8) Mertila 65 32 Dash (28.7) (Gi) i He 21 15) 1g 1 ot 112) Under- (ee) ee) surface tates 55 30 ground a (25:1) (25.6) color Dark 143 1?) Wis (65.3) (61.5) Table 1. Macular components and undersurface ground color of wings of Glaucopsyche xerces (Bdy.). Percentage values for each sex are listed in parenthesis under: the number of individuals showing the condition. In the original compiling of these data we treated as units those individuals of the species that could be grouped under the older taxonomic designations of “antiacis”, “xerces”, and “poly- phemus”. Since the white streak characteristic of the form “mer- tila” had the same frequency of occurrence in all the named va- rieties (28 per cent), it was not utilized in the major macular groupings, and it was not counted as being “typical” or “atypical” for purposes of macular computations as listed on the chart. 160 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 When the data for the three groups were compared, [it was evi- dent that] no significant difference in frequency of macular group- ings or individual macules could be detected. This gave additional evidence that only one taxonomic entity was being treated, and further suggested that the presence or absence of spots is under genetic control, while the absolute size of the spots may be en- vironmentally affected. This view is also held by Brower and Brower (1954) in their work in the subfamily Lycenine. Of the 33.7 per cent showing the “typical” pattern, no division is made of the number of individuals having large or small macules, or pupiled on non-pupiled spots. The maculation of the hindwing is more variable than that of the forewing. Spot 1A was missing in 21 per cent of the in- dividuals and, with the exception of two specimens classified as aberrations (shown on plate 37), was the only spot missing from the macular pattern of the forewing. Whenever spot 1A was absent in the forewing, spots 1A and 2A of the hindwing were also missing. Although spot 2A was missing in 49 per cent of the individuals, it is included as part of the typical pattern. It appears most often in specimens that are “typical” in regard to other ma- cules and have more pronounced spots. Other macules missing from the hindwing are: 1A (in 107 individuals), M (in 24), CU2 (in 7), SC2 (in5), and RS (in 3). Certain combinations appear to be missing rather frequently: forewing 1A, hindwing 1A, 2A (missing in 73 individuals), the same combination +M (in 12), SC2 and M (in 3), 2A and M (in 14), and CU2 and IA (in 7). The upper surface shade of blue in the males is also quite variable. It is influenced by many factors inciuding the wear of the specimen; fuscous infusion, particularly in distal areas and along wing veins; white scales on wing veins; and light. No dis- continuous variation could be noted, even though cognizance of these factors lessened the subjectiveness of the judgment. In general it may be stated that the blue of the males is of a lighter shade than that found in adjacent races of G. lygdamus. Similarly, the brown of the female upper surface exhibits continuous var- jiation. In all females, however, there was a basal infusion of blue scales on the upper surface, which, depending on its extent, greatly affected the gross color. Winc LENGTH Wing length measurements were taken with a Cenco Vernier caliper and recorded in millimeters. In the forewing they were taken from the base of vein CU to the end of M1. The hindwing 161 BuLLetin, So. Carir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 PLATE 36 Mating pairs of G. xerces (Bdv.); males on the left, females on the right. Crosses are reciprocal for pupiled versus non-pupiled macules. BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES - Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 was measured from the base of CU to the end of M2. The fol- lowing average lengths were established: male, forewing 16.2 (maximum 18.0, minimum 13.0), hindwing 12.6 (max. 14.0, min. 9.0); female, forewing 15.8 (17.8, 14.0), hindwing 12.5 (14.0, 10.2). No difference in size range could be found among the named forms, and no shape difference could be detected in the specimens examined. An attempt was made to compare the frequency of macules, macular groupings, and named “forms” with environmental fac- tors, but no definite conclusions could be deduced. Williams (1908) has suggested that the environment probably “produces” the variability in xerces, and Standfuss (1895) and others report that some species in the Lycaenidae show adult color aberrations when the later instar larvae are exposed to different temperatures. Collections of xerces for any one vear were not sufficient in num- bers to determine possible effects of temperature on specimens taken early or late in the flight period. Also, selective collecting by the numerous lepidopterists contributing material might have made the data questionable. However, 56 specimens taken in 1907 and 1909 were compared with 59 specimens taken in 1931 and 1932. The same range of variability in size of wings, color, frequency of individual macules, and macular combinations was. shown in both. The only striking difference was the percentage increase of the form xerces, from 21 per cent of the individuals taken in the early years to 45 per cent in the later group. Again, selective collecting may have influenced these figures. No en- vironmental feature could be related to this increase. Garth (1932) collected several populations of G. Ivgdamus australis Grin. in Riverside County, California, each of which exhibited different frequencies of macular components. As early as 1884. xerces was believed to be extinct (see Ed- wards 1884, p. 303). In 1906 Wright (p. 222) also reported xerces was “lost for 30 years”; of course both authors considered _ it distinct from antiacis and make no mention of the latter being _ “Tost”. This suggests the xerces form to have been in the minority for at least the last two decades prior to 1900. Williams (1910) states that xerces was rare in that year, although formerly abund- ant, and that antiacis was more common that xerces. Skinner (1914) reports one year, presumably 1913, an unusual ratio of one-third antiacis to two-thirds xerces was observed. Huguenin had sent the information and specimens to Skinner and told him that for twenty-five years preceding that time, the reverse ratio had been found. Williams (1908) reared sixteen larvae, all of which emerged antiacis. Lange reared one adult in 1940: it was 163 BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 form xerces. These observations are interesting, but without breeding experiments, the ratios cannot be evaluated as being either of genetic or environmental control. Our material shows 36 per cent xerces forms and 63 per cent pupiled individuals, and, as such, might be an accurate propor- tional assemblage of variable forms, as found in nature, even though collected over many years. PLATE 37 Variation range in wing characters of undersurface of male wings in G. xerces (Bdy.). The pupiled macules of the specimen in the upper left hand corner is typical of what has been called “antiacis.” The unpupiled form “xerces” is shown in the middle row, third specimen. Specimens be- tween the two types have been previously designated under the form name “polyphemus” or, if they have a white dash in the discal cell of the forewing, under the form name “mertila.” For purposes of macular analysis (see text), specimens shown in the last row have been classified under aberrations. 164 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 GENITALIA Figures 1, 2, 3 and 5 on plate 35 show the detail of the male genitalia. Individual specimens exhibit some degree of size vari- ation, but the extremes have the same ratio of component parts. As in the wing studies, preliminary measurements for forms antiacis and polyphemus and for form xerces were kept separate. Statis- tical analysis indicated that they could not be distinguished on the basis of the measurements taken. This fact not only verifies the synonomy presented but proves that within a population the genitalia are less plastic than are wing characters. Only a few structures of the genitalia were conducive to ac- curate measurement. The subjectiveness of other measurements was increased by curvature of the parts and difficulties arising from artifacts of slide preparation. The latter structures are omit- ted from this report. The following data were obtained on twenty- two specimens. Valve length was measured on the longest axis of the medial surface, and width was taken at the widest distal portion of the valve at right angles to the longitudinal axis. All measurements are in millimeters. Mean valve length 1.45, maxi- mum 1.62, minimum 1.26; mean valve width 0.609, max. 0.664, min. 0.556; mean length aedeagus 1.06, max. 1.17, min. 0.86. Valve length showed no proportional increase with increase in length of wing, but seemed to vary independently. The genitalia of G. xerces are very similar to those of G. lygda- mus (Dbldy.). On the basis of the male genitalia alone, xerces should be assigned subspecific status under lygdamus. However, there are differences between these species in larval stages, adult wing maculation, and ecology. In addition, occasional specimens of G. lydamus behrii (Edw.) are taken in the areas where xerces occurred, and hybrids have never been detected. We are of the opinion that they are closely related but separate species. Figure 4 on plate 35 is a lateral view of G. lydamus behrii (Edw. ), which can be compared with G. xerces in figure 5. Here it can be noted that G. xerces possesses a slightly wider uncus fold. There are minor differences in the basal portion of the gnathos, and the dorso-cephalic part of the tegumen in G. xerces has a more marked ventral curvature to its junction with the vinculum. The aedeagus of xerces is somewhat shorter and stouter than in lygdamus. Valve length is greater in proportion to its width in xerces than in lygda- mus. Genitalia of various subspecies of G. lygdamus were exam- ined from numerous widely scattered California localities, from Utah, Colorado, Arizona, Wyoming, and Nebraska, and Manitoba, Canada. As might be expected from their spatial isolation, they exhibit a greater range of variation within the taxon lygdamus than occurs in xerces. 165 BuLLETIN, So, CAatir, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The aedeagus in this genus is rather distinet from that found in other genera of “blues” in that the terminal portion of the eja- culatory duct bears two groups of corntti. These chitinized spines are shown in their normal position, housed within the aedeagus, in plate 35, figure 3. The entire distal portion of this duct is fre- quently found everted, as shown in figure 2. The more mem- branous parts are “hinged” together somewhat like a carpenter's ruler, so that they unfold successively from dorsal and ventral fuleral points. Various stages of erection of this structure are found in slide preparations, which makes more difficult a study of its infra-specific variation. DISCUSSION Recent work has shown that the extinction of a local popula- tion is not a very rare event (see Andrewartha and Birch, 1954, for a discussion). Ford (1949) has given many examples in but- terflies. The only distinction to be made between the extinction of a local population and the extinction of a species is one of de- gree; the former always precedes the latter, but is not always followed by it. The extinction of G. xerces is not as unusual as the fact that the entire species consisted of but one population. One of the most evident considerations of the ecological problems confronting xerces prior to its disappearance would be population size. In a sense, population density is a measure of biological suc- cess. What the maximum number would be for a given species under optimum conditions is a moot point, but the theory is gen- erally accepted that a species is at its adaptive peak where it is most abundant. We are at a disadvantage with this species since its abundance can only be measured and compared in time, not in space. However, extreme yearly fluctuations in numbers have been recorded in the literature and are verified by the museum material available. This suggests that population numbers were a direct reflection of environmental forces. Another generally ac- cepted biological theory is that a species is most variable at the periphery of its range of distribution. Basic to this premise are the more stringent selective forces acting on the genetic struc- ture of the group in that area. Regarding G. xerces, it would seem that the entire species is the “peripheral” group, and popula- tion size is an effect and not necessarily the cause of the variability. Essentially, the species was “trying everything” in its genetic com- position to become biologically successful, but no single genotype became selectively adaptive. However, we can postulate, a priori, — that only a limited number of responses to the environment would 166 BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 be left to a small population living in a fairly uniform environ- ment. This holds true even though each stage of the life history (egg, larva, pupa, and adult) presumably has its own environ- mental requirements (optimum) that would make environmental pressures more subtle. The population can be thought of as an equilibrium between these numerous selective pressures, each influencing the species in a different morphological direction. No one species, particularly those consisting of but one small popula- tion, can have a maximum adaptation to all of the environmental factors. We would like to thank the following individuals and institu- tions for the loan of specimens used during this study: L. M. Martin, Los Angeles County Museum; E. S. Ross, H. B. Leech, California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. SUMMARY | 1. Information gleaned from the literature plus additional evidence _ presented indicates that there is one polymorphic group under the taxon | Glaucopsyche xerces ( Bdv.). | 2. A listing of the synonomy based on available literature is given. 3. G. xerces has not been recorded since 1941 in the area where it form- erly occurred and is presumed extinct. 4. Hitherto unreported aspects of its biology are presented, including oviposition, host plants, egg density, ant association, adult flight period, etc. 5. Evidence is given to show that G. xerces (Bdv.) and G. lygdamus (Dbldy.) are much closer phylogenetically than previously supposed. | 6. A summary analysis of the wing variation in 344 specimens is given, _ from which was derived the typical maculation. 7. Drawings of the genitalia are presented for comparison with forms with which xerces might be confused. 8. A discussion of the variation within the taxon is given, together with comments on the probable factors related to the extinction of the species. REFERENCES | Andrewartha, H. G. and L. C. Birch. 1954. The distribution and abundance of animals, Pp. vii-xv, 1-782. The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Illinois. Balduf, W. V. 1939. The bionomics of entomophagous insects. Part II. Pp. [i], 1-384. John S. Swift Co., Inc., St. Louis. _ Barnes, Wm. and J. H. McDunnough. 1916. Notes on North American diurnal Lepidoptera. Contr. Nat. Hist. Lepid. No. Amer., 3(2):52-156, pls. IV-XI. and _ 1917. Check list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Pp. v-viii, 1- 392. Privately printed, Herald Press, Decatur, Illinois. 167 BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCUENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Blackmore, E. HH, 1920. The Lycaeninae of British Columbia. Proc. Ent. Soc. Brit. Col. L919, No. 14, Systematic Series, pp. 5-11, pl. 1. Boisduval, J. A. 1852. Lepidoptéres de la Californie. Ann. Soc, Ent. France, 21:275-324. 1869. Lépidoptéres de la Californie. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., 12:8-94. Bower, H. M. 1911. Early stages of Lycaena lygdamus Doubleday. Ent. News, 22(8):- 359-363, pl. XII. Brower, L. P. and J. V. Brower. 1954. The heredity of some spot aberrations in Lycaena phlaeas and L. hypophlaeas. Lep. News, 8(5):125-129. Cary, M. 1901. Notes on the butterflies of Sioux County, Nebraska. Can. Ent. 33:305-311. Comstock, J. A. 1927. Butterflies of California. Pp. 1-344, 63 col. pls., published by the author, Los Angeles, Calif. Comstock, J. A. and C. M. Dammers. 1935. Notes on the early stages of three butterflies and six moths from California. Bul. So. Calif. Acad. Sci., 34(2):120-142, 22 figs. Coolidge, K. R. 1913. Method of breeding Lycaenidae. Ent. News, 24:103. Draudt, Max. 1919-1924. Lycaenidae. In Seitz Macrolepidoptera of the World, 5:739- 831, 1043-1046, pls. 144-159. Alfred Kernen Verlag, Stuttgart. Dyar, H. G. 1902. A list of North American Lepidoptera and key to the literature of this order of insects. Bul. U.S. Nat. Mus. No. 52, pp. v-xix, 1-723. Edwards, W. H. 1866. Description of certain species of diurnal Lepidoptera found within the limits of the United States and British America. Proc. Ent. Soc. Philad., 17:195-208. 1869. Descriptions of new species of diurnal Lepidoptera found within the United States. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 2:369-376. 1872. Synopsis of North American Butterflies, pp. iii-v, 1-52, Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., Pa. 1877. Catalogue of the Lepidoptera of America north of Mexico. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 6:1-68. 1884. Revised catalogue of the diurna! Lepidoptera of America north of Mexico. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 11:245-337. Ford, E. B. 1949. Early stages in allopatric speciation. In: Jepson, G. L., Simpson, G. G., and Mayr, E. (eds.), Genetics, paleontology and evolution. Pp. v-xiv, 1-474. Princeton University Press, Princeton, N.J. Garth, John S. 1932. The geographical race concept in Lepidoptera. Can. Ent., 64 (10) :217-223. Gunder, J. D. 1925. Several new varieties of an aberrant Lepidoptera. Ent. News, 36:1-9, pl. 1. 1927. New transition forms. Can. Ent., 59:281-287, pls. A-B. 168 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Holland, W. J. 1931. The butterfly book. Rev. ed., pp. i-xii, 1-424, 198 figs., 77 pls., Doubleday, Doran and Co., Inc., New York. Howell, J. T. 1949. Marin Flora. Pp. v-vii, 1-323. University of California Press, Berkeley. Huguenin, J. C. 1918. Early appearance of Lycaena antiacis, and xerces in 1917. Ent. News, 24( 10) :392-393. Kirby, W. F. 1871. A synonymic catalogue of diurnal Lepidoptera. Pp. i-v, 1-690, John Van Voorst, London. 1877. A synonymic catalogue of diurnal Lepidoptera. Supplement. Pp. i-v, 691-883, John Van Voorst, London. Maynard, C. J. 1891. A manual of North American butterflies. Pp. i-iv, 1-226, pls. I-X, 59 figs. De Wolfe, Fiske and Co., Boston. McDunnough, J. H. 1914. Notes on the synonymy of Boisduval’s North American species of Lycaenidae. Ent. Record, 26:194-203. Mead, T. L. 1875. Report upon the collections of diurnal Lepidoptera made in por- tions of Colorado, Utah, New Mexico, and Arizona during the years 1871, 1872, 1873, 1874 with notes upon all species known to inhabit Colorado. In “Wheeler's Report,” geog. and geol. expl. surv. west of the 100th meridian .. . , v. 5, chap. 8, pp. 737-791, pls. 35-40, Government Printing Office. Morris, J. G. 1860. Catalogue of the described Lepidoptera of North America. Smiths. Misc. Coll., Wash., May, 1860, pp. iii-vii, 1-68. Diurnal and crepuscular Lepidoptera. Pp. i-xxvii, 1-358. Smith- sonian Misc. Collections. Oberthiir, C. 1913. Etudes de Lepidopterologie comparée. Fasc. 7. Pp. 1-677, pls. color clxi-cxevii et pl. photogr. Rennes. Impr. Oberthiir. Scudder, S. H. 1871. A systematic revision of some of the North American butterflies, with brief notes of those known to occur in Essex Co., Mass. Reports of the Peabody Academy of Science, 4th Annual Report, pp. 24-92. 1873. Note on the species of Glaucopsyche from eastern North Amer- ica. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 16(10):197-198. 1875. Historical sketch of the generic names proposed for butterflies Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci., Boston, 10:91-293. 1876. ' The North American blue butterflies of the genus Nomiades. Can. Ent., 8(2):21-24. 1876a. Synonymic list of the butterflies of North America north of Mexico: Part II, Rurales. Bul. Buff. Soc. Nat. Sci., 3:98-129. 1889, The butterflies of the eastern United States and Canada, w. spec. reference to New England. 3 vols., pp. 1-1988, 3 portr., 4 maps, 89 pls., Cambridge, Mass. 169 BuLLetin, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Simms, H. M. 1920. Butterflies observed in Dead Horse Canyon, California, during the L917 season. Southwest Sci. Bul., May 5, 1920, published by the Southwest Museum, Los Angeles. Skinner, H. 1898. Synonymic catalogue of North American Rhopalocera. Pp. i-xiv, 1-100, i-xiv, Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., Pa. 1914. Notes on Lycaena xerces, antiacis and polyphemus. Ent. News, 25(7) :326. 1917. Lycaena lygdamus Doubleday and its races with a description of a new. one. Ent. News, 28:212-214. Smith, J. B. ; p 1903. Check list of the Lepidoptera of boreal America, pp. iii-v, 1-136, Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., Pa. Standfuss, M. (translated by F. A. Dixey ). 1895. On the causes of variation and aberration in the imago stage of butterflies, with suggestions on the establishment of new species. Entomologist, 28:69-76, 102-114, 142-150. Strecker, H. 1874. The No. American species of the genus Lycwna. In Lepidoptera, Rhopaloceres and Heteroceres, indigenous and exotic. Vol. 1, No. 10, pp. 81-94, pl. X (col.), published privately, Reading, Pa. 1878. Butterflies and moths of North America, a complete synonymical catalogue of macrolepidoptera, pp. i-ii, 1-283, published privately, Reading, Pa. Tilden, J. W. 1947. An occurrence of the pupa of Glaucopsyche lygdamus_ behrii (Edwards) in an ant nest. Pan Pac. Ent., 23(1):42-43. Williams, F. X. 1908. The life history of Lycaena antiacis Bdy., with other notes on other species. Ent. News, 19( 10) :476-483. 1910. The butterflies of San Francisco, California. Ent. News, 21(1): 30-41. Wright, W. G. 1906. Butterflies of the West Coast. 2nd ed., pp. 1-255, 32 col. pls., published by the author, San Bernardino, Calif. 170 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 NOTES ON THE LIFE HISTORIES OF TWO SOUTHERN ARIZONA BUTTERFLIES By Joun ApAMs CoMsTock INTRODUCTION In the latter part of July, 1955, the writer made a collecting trip in southern Arizona, accompanied by Dr. Francis X. Williams. We established camp in Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, where considerable material bearing on the life histories of lepi- doptera was obtained. In this work Francis Williams’ long experience in field collecting for the Hawaiian Sugar Planters Association came into play, and many of the studies which I was enabled to carry through could not have been made but for his keen faculty of observation, and his instinctive knowledge of insect behavior. On July 23 we decided to shift camp to Miller Canyon, in the Huachuca Mountains. It is in this canyon that the mining town of Palmerlee was formerly located. Today the town is in ruins, and few Arizonans know of its existence. Its site was of major interest to us however, as it is the type locality for many species of lepidoptera collected in the early days by O. C. Poling, and other entomological pioneers. Miller Canyon is one of three, located on the eastern slopes of the Huachucas, all of which are of interest to lepidopterists. These three, named from north to south, are Ramsay, Carr, and Miller Canyons. All are accessible by roads. The narrow, single-lane road traversing Miller Canyon, runs through heavy brush, then climbs through a thick forest, dom- inated by oaks and sycamores, to a considerable elevation, (6,100 ft.) where it ends in a small cirque of stone ruins and terraces, tucked in and partly obscured by verdure. Apparently the stone walls are mainly the remnants of former miner’s cabins. The vegetation here is varied and luxuriant, and collecting conditions ideal. 7st BuLLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 While scouting in the vicinity of camp, Dr. Williams found so many larvae of various species that the writer had to spend most of his time transcribing field notes and preparing illustrations. Among other prizes thus obtained, a single mature larva of a large skipper was found on oak. Notes were made of this, but the specimen pupated before a drawing of the larva could be exe- cuted. A painting of the pupa was completed, and the specimen eventually gave forth a fine example of Pyrrhopyge araxes arizonx. This species of giant skipper, along with its subspecies, was described in 1893, by Godman and Salvin. In 1921, Dr, A. W, Lindsey, in referring to the subspecies® said “I have two bred specimens from southern Arizona”, It is much to be regretted that the collector who reared these specimens left no record of the life history or foodplant. The only hint we have as to the metamorphosis is that by Draudt in his discussion of the genus Pyrrhopyge.* Since araxes is therein listed as one of the many members of that genus this reference is worth quoting. “The larvae of Pyrrhopyge, as far as we know, are thinly haired on the body, shaggily on ‘the head, brown or reddish, with yellow zebra-like stripes”. Mature Larva and Pupa of Pyrrhopyge araxes arizonae God d Salvi Pyrrhopyge araxes arizonae Godman and Salvin The larva weaves a stout silken network between two leaves, and remains hidden during the daytime. The unique example was collected July 27, 1955. Mature Larva. Length, 40 mm. Greatest width, 8 mm. Relatively stout, the dorsal segments tapering to a restricted neck, and the last two or three caudal segments becoming grad- ually narrower toward the cauda. Head, wider than first segment; ground color black, but much obscured by a thick covering of long white hairs. On the area each side of the front these hairs become orange, which gives the appearance of a pair of orange spots. Ocelli obscured by the hair covering, but probably black. Antennae ringed black and orange. The body is covered with white hairs, which are longer than those on the head, but more thinly scattered, and hence do not 1 Biol. Cent. Amer. Rhop. 11. 253. 1893. Hesperioidea of America N. of Mexico. Univ. of Iowa Stud. in Nat. Hist. ID (CDR oe A 3 Draudt in Seitz Macrolep. of the World. vol. 5. p. 837. 1924. to 172 4 BULLETIN, So. CAautir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 obscure the conspicuous bands of color. These bands encircle the body transversely, and are composed of wide red-brown elements alternating with narrow bright yellow stripes. The scutellum is narrow, with a black transverse stripe on a yellow ground. Spiracles, light yellow. Legs, red-brown proximally, shading to dull yellow, and ter- minating in a black segment. Prolegs, yellow, with light brown crochets. Suranal plate, smoky yellow. The larva changed to a pupa July 29, 1955. Pura. Length, 27 mm. Greatest width, 10 mm. Head, relatively narrow, brownish red, and clothed with num- erous white hairs, except for a small group near the crown of the head, which are orange. Eyes, prominent, glistening, and covered with white hair. Wing cases, brownish red, shading to almost black at margins, and free of hairy covering. Maxillee extending .75 mm. caudal to wing margin. Abdominal segments, ma- roon margined on each segment, dull orange transversely on the centers of each segment, with a clothing of white hairs on the dull orange portions. The thorax is relatively short, being less than one-quarter the length of the body. Cremaster, dark brown, strongly recurved ventrally, and bearing numerous small orange hooklets. Spiracles, burnt orange. A number of small, flat, oval discs occur on the surface in close relationship to the spiracles. The above description applies more par- ticularly to the chrysalis immediately after the larval skin has been shed, and for a day or two thereafter. The more conspicu- ous colors then begin to disappear, owing to the formation of a white flaky powder, which obscures all of the surface except the head, spiracles and segmental junctures. PLATE 38 Pupa of Pyrrhopyge araxes arizonae (G.&S.), ventral as- pect, enlarged X3 — Drawing by the author. 173 BuLLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The imago emerged from this pupa on August 18, 1955. The pupa is illustrated on Plate 38. The Life History of Megisto rubricata cheneyorum Chermock Dr. Ralph L. Chermock, in 1948', gave the name cheneyorum to an Arizona subspecies of the Red Satyr, Megisto rubricata Ed- wards. The type locality for the holotype and allotype was Ma- dera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, Pima County, Arizona. His type series included examples from Miller Canyon. I obtained a gravid female of this subspecies in Miller Canyon, which, in captivity, on July 25-26, 1955 laid twelve eggs. Four examples were carried through to maturity, which made possible the following notes. Ecc. Subspherical, the base gently rounded and the side walls arching inward to the rounded top. Color, very light yellow or yellow-ivory. Width, 1.1 mm. Height, 1.5 mm. The entire surface of the egg is covered with a reticulated net- work of hexagonal cells surrounded by low walls. These cells are rather uniform in size, even those of the micropylar area being quite similar in size and character to those on the side walls. There is some tendency toward arrangement of the cells in rows, running from base to top, but this does not create regular longi- tudinal ridges such as are characteristic of the eggs of Euphydryas or Speyeria. In about three days the surface of the egg begins to show a mottled pink color. A day or two before hatching, the black head of the larva shows through the shell as a large round black spot. The eggs hatched August 4-5, 1955, making ten days in the ovum. The larva consumes the major portion of the egg shell. First INSTAR LARVA. Length, 4 mm. Body cylindrical, tapering gradually and uniformly to the cauda. Head; much larger than first body segment; jet black. It is somewhat squared at the upper edge, and is topped by two knobs. A few very short black setae are scattered over the surface. *Can. Ent. LXXX (1-12) pp 172-173 174 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 PLATE 39 Egg, and larva of Megisto rubricata cheneyorum Chermock. A. Egg, enlarged X15. B. First instar larva, enlarged approximately X10. C. Head of mature larva, enlarged X7. D. Mature larva, enlarged approximately X2%. Reproduced from drawing by the author. Body; ground color, straw. Longitudinal stripes extend the length of the body. One of these runs mid-dorsally. Three on each side parallel this. The first is placed dorso-laterally. The second is of equal width, and is placed in line with the spiracles. The third is slightly narrower, and the space between the stig- matal stripe is a little narrower than that between the stigmatal and the dorso-lateral stripe. 175 BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 There is also a very narrow discontinuous line along the ‘overlap. The cauda is prolonged into a pair of tapering processes, each of which is topped by a long seta, clubbed or expanded at the end. A number of setae of this character occur on the three caudal segments, all of which arch or point caudally, Very minute clubbed setae are present on the other body segments. The legs and prolegs are concolorous with the body. The first instar larva is illustrated on Plate 39, fig. B Ecdysis occurred on August 19-20, 1955. SECOND INSTAR. pe oaets 6 mm. Head; width, 1.2 mm. Wider than first segment, and completely encrusted with light gray papillae, each of which bears a minute hair. Knobs, or ‘horns’ on upper corners more prominent than in the first instar, and covered by the same type of papillae and hairs. Front, black, as are also the ocelli. Body; cylindrical, of equal width from first to fifth segments, then tapering gradually to cauda. The entire body is encrusted with small cream colored papillae, each topped by a minute hair. These are so thickly placed that they somewhat obscure the dull pink ground color. There is a mid- dorsal longitudinal stripe of dull rose, which becomes darker near the cauda, and which is edged with narrow lines of cream-yellow. A similar bordered line parallels this dorso-laterally, and a third suprastigmatally. The stigmatal line is narrower, and below this, on the overlap, is a wide yellow line. The caudal paired processes are proportionately longer than in the first instar. The abdomen is dull pink, legs translucent; prolegs and anal prolegs concolorous with the body. Ecdysis occurred on August 23 to 26, 1955. Tuirp wnstar. Length, 8.8 mm. Head width, 1.6 mm. The head is now encrusted with the same type of papillae as occurs on the body, and is of the same color, —a very light tan. The pair of horns are darker than the ground color, and there is an indistinct dark bar running transversely across the crown from the base of each horn to its fellow of the opposite side. The sutural lines separating the lobes and front show clearly as sharp black lines, and the face begins to show a shadowy pat- tern of dark lines beneath the encrusting papillae. 176 BuLLETIN, So. Cartir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Ocelli, black. Mouth parts edged with black. Antennae tinged with yellow. The body has very much the same character and color as that described for the second instar, except that the dull rose color has been considerably toned down, giving the lines a different shade of tan, accented by stripes of minute black dots. In succeeding instars the principal changes consist of a relative reduction of the cephalic horns, a lightening of the color to vari- ous shades of soft tan, with fainter definition of the longitudinal lines, with more noticeable encrustation of the surface, probably due to the increase in size of the multitudinous papillae that com- pletely cover the head and body. The caudal segments become somewhat foreshortened and progressively narrowed. The ratio of growth, and schedule of ecdysis shows marked disparity be- tween individuals. Mature LarveE. Length, 25 mm. Greatest width through fifth segment, 4 mm. Head width, 3 mm. Head height, 3 mm. The cephalic ‘horns’ have been reduced to low nodules. The ground color of the head is light tan with a mottling of dark brown, which, in some individuals, tends to form three dia-- gonal bands on each cheek, and a transverse band running across the crest. The raised nodules are somewhat larger than those covering the body, but are of the same character. Only two occelli are visible on each cheek, one being relatively large, and the other, superior to it, very small. These are set in a depression. The remaining ocelli may be present, but they are completely obscured by the raised nodules. The mouth parts are dark brown, and the mandibles black. A number of moderately long hairs surround the mouth parts. Body; ground color light tan in most individuals, but a few are very much darker. The longitudinal bands are more clearly de- fined than in the preceding one or two instars. The mid- dorsal stripe is narrow, and very dark. The next lateral band is light, and has a faint margining of soiled white. The suprastig- matal band is wider than the others, and is clearly defined. It bears small white dots, one to a segment. There is a wide dark longitudinal line just below the overlap. A few individuals also show a faint narrow substigmatal line, broken at each segment. The abdomen is light tan; spiracles, black; legs and prolegs, concolorous with body, the crochets, dark tan. WAT BuLLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The larvae are exceedingly lethargic throughout their entire development. By the end of August, 1955, they ceased to feed except spasmodically, and were apparently hibernating from then on until they began preparing for pupation in April, 1956. Only seven individuals survived to the prepupal stage. This may have been in part due to the fact that the various grasses offered them were not as much to their liking as the native species on which they normally feed. Shortly before pupation the larvae spin a fragile pad of silk, and assume a curved posture. In captivity, they pupate in the debris on the floor of the breeding cage, or at the bases of dried grass stalks. The first example pupated on April 29, and the last on May 31, 1956. Of the seven pupae, only four gave forth imagos. The first hatched on May 26, and the last on June 22, 1956. The period in pupa was 27, 23, 31 and 30 days, or an average of approximately 28 days. The mature larva is illustrated on Plate 39, fig. D, and an en- larged figure of the head of a mature larva is shown on the same plate, fig. C. Pura. Length, 10.5 mm. Greatest width 4.3 mm. The form is a robust ovoid, with the cephalic end well rounded, and the cremaster extending ventrally at right angle to the body. The ground color is light straw, shading to a blackish brown on the ventral surface of the last six abdominal segments. The wing cases show a delicate penciling of brown along the neurations which expand at the wing margin to form triangulate dark points. The margin next to the thorax bears a brownish black edging, accented by an accompanying white stripe im- mediately ventrad to it. Over the crest of the thorax there is a narrow longitudinal low ridge. In the mid-dorsal line there is a faint longitudinal band which fades out as it nears the thorax. Lateral to this on each side there occurs a row of round brown dots, two to each segment. Along the side of the abdomen are a number of brown dots, four or five to each segment, more or less regularly spaced. 178 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 PLATE 40 Pupa of Megisto rubricata cheneyorum Chermock. A. Ventral aspect. B. Lateral aspect. C. Dorsal aspect. All figures enlarged approximately X3%. Drawing by the author. The eye is prominent, but does not bulge noticeably. Both the _antennae and maxillae extend to the wing margins. The spiracles are small inconspicuous ovals, margined with narrow brown circlets. The cremaster is slightly arched, extend- ing ventrally, tapering, and terminating in a rosette of numerous yellow spicules with minute recurved tips. The pupa is illustrated on Plate 40; figs. A, B, C. _ The parent species, Megisto rubricata Edwards was described in 1871°, the type being “taken near Waco, Texas! Chermock states that the genitalia of his subspecies are “identical to those of the typical subspecies.” In view of the close relationship, it is more than likely that the metamorphosis of the Texas species will closely approximate that of the Arizona subspecies. ° Trans. Am. Ent. Soc. Vol. 3, p. 212. 179 SULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 SCIENTIFIC NOTES SYLVATIC TRYPANOSOMA CRUZI IN TRIATOMA FROM SOUTHERN UTAH Ten nymphs of Triatoma protracta Uhler were collected on 27-VIII-54 from three wood rat dens at the base of roadside junipers along U. S. High- way 89, 6.3 miles south of Mt. Carmel Junction, Kane County, Utah. These bugs were successfully transported to Los Angeles through northern Arizona and southern California deserts by use of a water cooler (Wood & Wood, 1952, Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 51:108-111) without loss of uninjured specimens. Examination microscopically of the feces of 1 dead 3rd instar nymph on 5-IX-54 was negative for trypanosomes. This bug was crushed by falling twigs when collected. Subsequent examination of three 5th, three 3rd, and one 2nd instar nymph revealed one 5th and one 3rd naturally infected with a trypanosome indistinguishable morphologically from Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas. Wood and Wood (1938, Am. Jour. Trop. Med., 18:207-212) reported collections of Triatoma protracta from 13 wood rat dens in southern Utah. Twenty specimens were obtained 7 mi. north of Kanab, Kane County, on U. S. 89 on 5-VIII-36 and 38 bugs were taken 10-16 mi. west of St. George, Washington County, on U. S. 91 on 7-VIII-36. Of the 58 bugs collected, 51 were examined and all were negative for trypanosomes although the Kanab specimens are very close to the locality reported above. Thus, the 1936 sample averaged 4.5 bugs per den for the 13 wood rat dens examined. The 1954 sample averaged 3.3 bugs. This is the first report of Triatoma protracta naturally infected with Trypanosoma cruzi from Utah. Wood and Wood (1941, Am. Jour. Trop. Med. 21:335-345) specified 38° Latitude North as the most northerly extension of animals infected with Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas in the United States. However, Davis (1943, U. S. Publ. Health Repts., Washington, 58:1006-1010) reported Plymouth, Amador County, California as a source of naturally infected Triatoma pro- tracta and this remains the most northerly locality known to date at 38°, 30’ since the Mt. Carmel location is 37° North,—Sherwin F. Wood, Life Sciences Department, Los Angeles City College, Los Angeles 29, Calif. BRIEF NOTES ON THE LIFE HISTORIES OF THREE ARIZONA MOTHS Prochoerodes forficaria Gn. During June of 1956, while collecting life history material at the Tonto Creek Camp grounds, near Kohl’s Ranch, Gila County, Arizona, a single larva was beaten from black walnut on June 30. This was reared to maturity, and turned out to be the geometrid moth, Prochoerodes forficaria Gn. In view of the fact that nothing is known concerning the metamorphosis of this species, the following brief notes are worthy of record. 180 BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Larva. Penultimate instar. Length, 24 mm. Cylindrical. Ground color, gray. Head; smaller than first segment; flattened; color, gray with heavy black mottling concentrated across the center of the face. Ocelli, black. Mouth parts edged with black. Antennae, ivory, shading to yellow on the terminal segments. Body; gray, heavily sprinkled with brown and black dots, and streaked with discontinuous sinuate lines. In the mid-dorsal area there is a concentration of the dark markings to form a semblance of a tripled longitudinal band, intensified at each typical segmental juncture by a mark resembling a capital X. the crossing of the latter placed on the segmental line. These marks are most prominent on the 4th to 9th segments. Stigmatally there is a longitudinal band, composed of elongate triangles, the wide portion of each being centered on the segmental juncture, and the tips of the triangles being joined immediately inferior to the spiracles. The a are small, round, and inconspicuous, with yellow centers and black circlets. The abdomen is a uniform gray, mottled with dark dots and sinuous dashes. Legs, prolegs (a single pair). and anal prolegs concolorous with the body. The 10th segment is protruded dorsally, and topped by a pair of papilli- form tubercles. These rest on a whitish base. The setae are short and colorless. Those on the dorsum rise from black tubercles for the most part, but on the lateral surface the setal-bearing tubercles are predominantly gray. Mature larva, observed July 15, 1956; Length 33 mm. The dorsal X marks tend to form a series of triangles, with lighter colored centers. Otherwise the larva is marked much as in the preceding instar. Pupation occurred on July 22, 1956. : Pupa. Length, 16mm. Color, wood-brown, with fine black dashes, and transverse sinuate lines over the wing cases and thoracic appendages, and black mottling on the abdominal segments. The maxillae extend 1 mm. bevond the wing margins, while the antennae reach only .5 mm. beyond the same margins. The cremaster is formed of a pyramidal body from which a single long stout spine or shaft points caudally. This is topped with a recurved tip. The spine bears, near its base, numerous short spicules, which point laterally. The imago emerged August 6, 1956. Halisidota lurida otho (Barnes ) In the Canadian Entomologist for February, 1901, page 53, Dr. William Barnes described “Euhalisidota otho’, naming it for Otho C. Poling, who took the types in the Huachuca Mountains, Arizona. The moth is now listed as a subspecies of Halisidota lurida Henry Edwards. It is very likely that Poling first secured the species in the region near the mining town of Palmerlee, in Miller Canyon. While collecting in this area in 1955 I captured a gravid female of otho on July 24, from which I obtained 43 eggs. These were deposited in regular rows on the cover of a rearing jar, the dates of laying being July 24 and 25, 1955. The egg is a perfect hemisphere, 1.25 mm. in width, and .75 mm. high. Its surface is smooth and glistening, with no apparent reticulations or rugosi- ties. The base is flat, and no visible micropyle is present. It is bright lemon- yellow in color. The eggs hatched August 4 and 5, making a period in ovum of ten days. The young larvae were offered grass, on which they fed through three ‘instars. 181 BuLLETIN, So. Cauue. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 Finst instar LARVA. Length, 3.5 mm. The head is a bright glistening vellow, larger than the body segments. ~ The body is eylindrical, and dull yellow in color, in strong contrast to the head. It bears numerous black papillae, arranged in longitudinal rows, each papillus being topped by a long black hair. Eedysis occurred August 10, 1955. SECOND INSTAR. Length, 4.75 mm. The head is yellow-orange, and the ocelli, black. The body ground color is dull olive-green in the dorsal area from the first to ninth segments, the remainder of body including abdomen being dull yellow. Numerous black papillee occur on the body, arranged in more or less regular longtitudinal rows. Each gives rise to a tuft of long black hairs, those on the first two thoracic and last two caudal segments being the longest. A few very long white hairs occur on the first two segments. The legs and prolegs are colorless and translucent. The anal pair is dull orange. : Ecdysis, August 15, 1955. Turp iNstar. Length, 7 mm. The head is a glistening yellow-orange, and the ocelli brownish black. The adfrontal sutures are black. The an- tennae are white, the clypeus, dull ivory, and the mandibles, black. The body ground color is dull olive above the stigmatal area, and dull yellow below, including the abdomen. The dull olive area bears several longitudinal rows of prominent black papillae, each bearing a tuft of black bristles with an occasional white hair. The first and second segments carry numerous long white hairs, mixed with some shorter black hairs, all of which arch forward over the head. A few long black hairs also occur on the last caudal segment. On the infrastigmatal area there are two longitudinal rows of black papillae (dull yellow at their bases), each of which carries a small tuft of short white hairs. The legs, prolegs, and anal prolegs are dull yellow. The larvae went into hibernation at the end of the third instar, and did not survive the winter. Halisidota mixta (Neumoegen ) Another member of the Genus Halisidota occurring in southern Arizona, concerning which nothing is known of its early stages, is Halisidota mixta Neumoegen. The moth was described in Papilio, Vol. 2, p. 133, 1882, the type locality being “Southeastern Arizona.” Mature larvae were taken in Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, July 27, 1955, feeding on oak. Mature Larva; head, jet black; clypeus edged with dull white; base of antennae, white, the remaining segments black. Body color, mottled gray-green and black, heavily obscured with tufts of yellow and black hairs. There is a mid-dorsal row of short black hairs, lateral to which are tufts of short yellow hairs. Below these occurs a series of black nodules bearing mixed black and white or black and yellow hairs. On the first two segments there are many long mixed yellow and black hairs arching forward over the head. On the fourth segment there is a pair of long black straight hair pencils pointing dorso-laterally, and a similar pair occurs on the ninth segment. Legs, black; prolegs and anal prolegs, burnt orange. Notes were not made of the pupa. Two moths emerged August 12, 1955. 182 BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY of SCIENCES Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California Subscription—$3.50 per year Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00) Publications of the Southern California Academy of Sciences The Academy has published to date the following: PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6. MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri- cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers. All issues of the above are now out of print. Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 — one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) in 1920. The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August, Vol. XX, No. 3, December. The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September. The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July. The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March- April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October; No. 6, November-December. From 1925 to 1956, including volumes XXIV to 55, three numbers were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2, May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume. MEMOIRS Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1, 1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949. Vol. 3, Part 3, 1956. 183 BULLETIN, So. CAutir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BULLETIN «<< Vol. 55, Part 3, Publications of the Southern California Vol. 8, No. 7, ieee: Amato Gio e: Ul, r I (sates le OFC 25 Oe ale ON 2 15e 2s 1 ee ih? Rasen Lge SA: Wi = Oe DY = we ll OS IG JONumanos QO Rr ie Dilewen, Ade 28, i 1 BO). IL, Sil oe al BO ie le Sones Cate ele Siler: S65 05 Sicieece le Biogen ad bs SO mina: AD cit Alege nla: ADS pera Agee 44. * I, A ele AG yale AGM alts ANS oS M AQT ir 500 ale to etek be ae ML 5 Ouneaane |e pl Sl. Boer a ieee Academy of Sciences For Sale at the Appended Prices z SNAG O24a (each) pee OS O25 (each) eee O. 1927 (each) S222 ae ee 2 Se O28 3 (each) tas enc ee Pe. 1929 (edch) 2 eee. 2S 9 SMa (Each) eee ee ee Di N98 2a (ea@hy) een wees tee Ear ee D988 (each) ee Ss ee 1934 "(each)) ee ae 2319355 (each) 2a ae es ee 19 36n(each) = eee O37 (each) eae 9 S38a(each) ae 1989. Geachiies 22s eae ’ ’ co” Se iphc eo re WGQYNL (GRYCNN)) rece ind) Sa LOAD. Geach) i= Sante L943). Geach)..2:-2.25) 2 ” 1944 (each) wand 8 W945 (each) -.2 ee Se ae V9IAG(Cach))2 52 ee NO ATM (eac hh) Reset eee a ee NOASh (Each) ee ee 3, 1949 (each) 222’ ae 9508 (each) aes i [O51 (Each) Se Se ee 952 (ea hy) eee LO a SM(Each)) se ns eee i O5A4g (each) eso ee 11955: each). = ese eee AOS GR Geach} keen te een eee (Continued on next page ) . SA ek ae ee . OP SERIES Or -) o) oo 69 69 Go ¢ -) SN NNNNHNHMNNYNNNNNrENNNW ty Sy v to bo 09 69 OO . 184 To To Members Me BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 PUBLICATIONS (continued) To To Non. | MEMOIRS Members Members WollelOSS paper COVEN ic.-22.225.c22.2denqeeccceeneesseeelocececes $2.00 $4.00 [a ap rintea on one side of paper... 3.00 5.00 Wole2Nonlel939—paper COVEN --....-2.:-0:<020c-20cs-cceeee-2- 125 2.50 i. printedson) one side of page... ess 3.50 pment Ol 944—“naner COVED -...--.02.:-c2.ce0cc-e--aceceesee wD 1.50 eet ome 47 AEL COVER <2. -c2cncs--sncesceseoseceeess 1.00 2.00 eam minn 1949 naner COVED ciccscescc oc occs bees escceeetee 1.00 2.00 eet weet SOLO DO—PAPeL COVEN: <..<.<2c-css-cecls0c-<0 ei ooeass 1.50 3.00 Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or Co-operating Organizations orqumia—Vols, 1 2) (all published ).............-.2---2..522------ unbound $1.00 Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published), chrehysentomological, I color plates...) 0-.0-se eee 1.00 Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall................ 1.00 A List of North American Lepidoptera in the Los Angeles County Museum. Part I Butterflies (Suborder Rhopalocera), Lloyd M. Martin and Fred S. Truxal. L.A. County Museum Science Ser. #18. Zool. #8, 1955. Price $1.00 (add 15 cents for tax and mailing). _ Reprints: Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfamilies Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed on one side of page only, to allow of additional notes), Wm. Barnes ANGeHoOstemaeBbenjamin, 190%. $ 50 The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County, New MexicomlOsinmiHe Rogbosbergs.! 300 7a ie ae 25 Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United State of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on white bristol board, one side of page (without index) suitable for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-members.... 3.00 A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes of their habits and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis_............. 50 A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA, 32 pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm. M. VODET ETD, cpcesccsics te eee es ee a es ee 00 Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum — CHANNEL ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33.................. 3.00 Fauna and Flora of E] Segundo Sand Dunes. Papers 1-16............ 1.50 AppDRESs ALL INQUIRIES TO SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A. 185 BuLLeTIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 55, Part 3, 1956 The SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES announces the issuance of VoutumMe IIT, Parr III or irs MEMOIRS This contribution is devoted to a comprehensive treatment of MITES OF CITRUS TREES IN CALIFORNIA and will be of value to all persons and institutions having an interest in citriculture, It will contain 44 pages, including 11 full page plates and 3 text figures. Of particular interest is the consideration given to predaceous, and hence beneficial species. Members of the Academy in good standing on the date of publication are entitled to a copy without charge, and to additional copies at half price. The charge to non-members will be $3.00 per copy Orders should be addressed to THe SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7 California, U.S.A. 186 Southern California Academy of Sciences Volume LV, 1956 INDEX OF SUBJECTS A New Cantacaderid from Basile a TUR ee 17 A New Species of Amnicolid Snail from Chihuahua, Mexico 44 A New Host and Locality Rec- ord for Ixodes jellisoni Cooley & Kohls__...............000...... A New Species of Stegocepha- lus (Amphipoda Gammaridea) from California .......................... 28 A Remarkable New Rhagovelia from the Dominican Republic 14 Academy Proceedings _.......... 54,117 Alliot, Laurena Moore................. 50 Amblyseius limonicus Garman Ge MGGReSOr occ. ecco cheese 11 Ameroseius californicus Gar-.. man & McGregov...................... 13 Amnicolid Snail, A New Species of, from Chihuahua, Mexico... 44 Amphipods, Two Rare, from Calitonni ages ee 35 An Introduction to Early West- ern American Prehistory........ 61 Analysis of Variation in a Re- cently Extinct Polymorphic Lycaenid Butterfly, Glaucop- syche xerces (Bdv.) with Notes on its Biology and Taxonomy 153 Atylus levidensus Barnard..._...... 38 Biological Observations on Pti- lothrix sumichrasti (Cresson) and Some Related Groups of Emphorine Bees Brief Notes on the Life Histo- ries of Three Arizona Moths. 180 Cantacaderid, A New, from rASilmmpeetes sees ge te 17 Cicindela amargose nyensis SE RSTUTIA DD fig eet a ne 140 Cicindela willistoni TEREUITY A Teg echt tee re ee Description of a New Subspe- cies of the Megathymus yuc- ce (Bdv. & LeC.) Complex... Elsinore Lake Basin, The Origin (Op iia hee ete ant areas nian Diewlea haeak Pai eae Euclidimera diagonalis Dyar......... Fish Records from the Pleisto- cene of Southern California. Four New Predaceous Mites (Acarina, Phytoseiide) __.. care Garmania lewisi Garman & Mc- Gregor Halisidota lurida otho (Barnes).. Halisidota mixta (Neum.) ............. How an Oil Field Works............ Isomira comstocki Papp_........... Isomira quadristriata Coop............ Is this a New, and Giant Clothes Moth Litoprosopus coachella Hill............ Los Angeles Museum Brazilian Expedition Lyrodes hertleini Drake... Megathymus evansi Freeman... preedicta Megathymus yuccz martini Stallings & Lurner Megisto rubricata cheneyorum Cherm Mites, Four New Predaceous...... Munidopsis depressa Faxon_...... Nassarius hildegarde Kanakoff Nassarius stocki Kanakoff...._.... Notes on Metamorphoses of the Giant Skippers (Lepidoptera, Megathymine) and the Life History of an Arizona Species f 181 182 55 147 148 51 51 19 Notes on the Genus Isomira (Alleculide) and a New Spe- cies from Arizona..........____... 145 Notes on the Life Histories of Two Southern Arizona But- eT fi CS mere ce ee 171 Notes on the Life History of a Rare Arizona Sphinx Moth, Xylophanes falco Walker... 102 Notes on Two Anomuran Crus- taceans New to California \WYVGRESIAS cae 79 Parapleustes bairdi (Boeck) __.. 35 Pleistocene Flora of California with Emphasis on Taxonomic Problems in the Rancho la SC AWE OG Ae 2 eee ee 123 Polyonyx quadriungulatus Glassell 80 Procherodes forficaria Gn. 180 Pseudoscorpions, a Natural Con- trol of Siphonaptera in Neo- toma Nests BR eit ee 1 Ptilothrix sumichrasti (Cresson).. 53 Pyrrhopyge araxes arizonze G.& S. 172 Rhagovelia, A Remarkable New, from the Dominican Republic 14 Rhagovelia secluda Drake & Maldorado-Capriles 14 Schizaster morlini Grant & ICT CGI ieee oe 107 Schizaster morlini, A New Spe- cies of Echinoid from the Pli- ocene of Imperial County, Californias e 4. 107 Scientific Notes : 51,181 Stegocephalus hancocki Hurley 28 Sylvatic Trypanosoma cruzi in Triatoma from Southern Utah 180 Tadarina molossa, A Second Record of, from Arizona......... 51 The Larva of Euclidimera di- GZLONA SHO Viale 115 The larva of Stenoporpia grise- GROG Tike see eee 116 The Major Features of Lizard ET VOU @ 11 eee ne ii 7/ The Origin of Elsinore Lake New species and subspecies in bold face type. INDEX OF AUTHORS Bernard, J. Laurens................ 35 Comstock, John Adams................ it 19, 51, 102, 115, 116, 171, 180 WOWwMe VAC GS. 153 Drake. (©; Siecc ieee. Ped Masa 14,17 Drake; Robert. J.........2 44 Carman ehilipy 22 7 Giravare, 10 Sis 10 107 TRIG IIES, IY ONS) oe ee 79 Hertlein, Leo George... 107 TRUE ERY. S15), 10 eee 28 Kanakoff, George P.... 47, 110 Knudsen, Jens W........................... 1 WOME, EV. -JYee. 153 WeemRobert, D:...2 115 HOIST VAmB Yn Gee 2. ccc ese 3 IBS 21S fires ss eeu ean Sa epee 72 Tiger Beetles of the Genua Cicindela in Southwestern Nevada and Death Valley, California, and Description of Two New Subspecies... iL33iL Two New Species of Nassarius from the Pliocene of Los An- geles County, California... 110 Two Rare Amphipods from Cali- fornia with Notes on the GenuseAttyliispe ee 35 Typhlodromus citri Garman & MiG GEC 2 OTe rie) ee eo eaten ee 8 Xylophanes falco Walker............ 102 Zetekella pulla Drake & Plau- TMEV YONTD 8 eal a ee a WY EIEN SS Swick Lira es) VV eee 3 Maldonado-Capriles __.................- 14 AV Ereayraira aed Tatras Hye se eee eee Ul IMIG] AROEOIE, UDG Fs 7 Rapp Charles hae 145 TPG DITAE OND, LM, | apo cmeesomancseneetatcces 17 RIM fe NORM ane eee 131 Savage Vaya sere ees Tle Simpson, Ruth DeHtte....... 61 SHOUTED OY, TREN Uo ene cnecneneseteee 83 Stalin sas) One eeeeeeneeeeneeaa 150 Stager, Kenneth H.........-........ fee Hal Mavic Si Miaixes ics ee eh ee 55 Templeton, Bonnie Cy 123 Dib eh al) sur Jeo newer see e ees. Sole Ee a 150 \WVovorel, SHOE NOY Tae 180 ‘ ‘he {\ iy ae of aeittle accepted for publiesaen in ie ould order reprints, if desired, when they return galley proof itor. They may be ordered through the Editor at the following ‘Com: onwealth Press, 1140 Venice Blvd., Los reels ee pee for : all his haa | > Kl WITHOUT COVERS) iY 12pp. 16pp. 20pp. -24op. 28pp. 32pp. $7.00 $10. 25 $12.50 $14.25 $16.25 $19.25 $21.00. 9.00 12.75 15.50 17.75 20.50 2400 2625 00° 15.25 18.50 22.25 24.75 28.75 31.50 ETT, (20:80 25.75:'29:00° 33.50... 36.75 O 20.25 24.50 29.25 33.25 38.25 42.00 mieeet oe 90. S299). 350 43.00. 47,25 dditional covers 1 Y2c each. ; ax te be ngded if f delivered within the state. oe mbership Ss open te alll scientists of all peaches and. to any. on i nte astec the wed eae of SCIENGEsn 242. =] -| =| =I} So fF Y) BOt mole TIN OF THE Southern California Academy of Sciences LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA quai, CONTENTS Head Muscles of Salamanders. RTE TTIDM RELA LO TUG ek Ma ee ees el ie 1 New Bathypelagic Amphipods of the Genera Rhachotropis and Lepechinella with Keys to the Genera. RMON TIEDUTTIUTT © ta ee Ne eg 2 hs Ne eS 14 Two Species of Bryozoa Ctenostomata from the Salton Sea. Ti De Seca SEN oe Se Se ee 2 Pees 21 Four New Porcellain Crabs from the Eastern Pacific. VERGE LRIGW Sais OE A 0 Ne OS ME Ye A, A 31 Notes on the Early Stages of Two Western American Moths. Bene Aas ITS MGOMISTOCK 2) 2 2 a 42 Two New Species of Rhagovelias (Hemiptera: Vellidae). Coad th pelea SS Ben EN 5 SSO eae Sens OS PC Se 47 Commander Charles Montagu Dammers. 1878-1956..................... 50 Scientific Notes: Conenose Bug and Trypanosome Observations for 1955-56 from Southwestern National Monuments. Sherwin F. Wood Issued May 13, 1957 OFF ICERS AND DIRECTORS Mn. KENNETH E, STAGER...........00---0--+2-- , ee ae Dr. HitpeGARDE HOWARD.......-..1000-0-00000000----0- ee Miss GRETCHEN SIBLEY.....-..--c--sceeecoeeeo-- MRLLOYD M. MARGIN, 02 -nc--nnnusenn nn Es f BOR, Wed WIGE DS PRR Ciscoe tereweartrsnemnne cafes Dr. Dr. A. WEIR BELL ; Dr. Joun A. Comstock Dr. THEODORE Downs Dr. HipEGARE Howard ~— | R,! Mr. Lioyp M. Martin : Dr. Dr. SHERWIN F, Woop ADVISORY BOARD Pror. J. STANLEY BRODE Dr. THoMAs CLEMENTS Dr. Howarp R. Hot. yr. I Dr. Carroii L. Lanc Ss _ Dr. Louis C. WHEELER © Aiss_ Rura DrEx Section on Entomology Shonon on Health ‘z Dr. WALTER EBELING, Chairman Dr. THoMAs | y) Section on Anthropology Mr. GERHARD BAKKER, jr., EOHING Dates, Cc Chairman : Section on Botany Dr. Joseru B Dr. Cuarces Burcu, Chairman Chairman Section on peace STANDING COMMITTEES — Finance Publication W. Dwicur Pierce, Chairman — Jonn A. Comsroce, Joun A. Comstock WILLIAM H. Eas Joun R. PEMBERTON Hoy GRETCHEN SIBLEY SHERWIN Woop GrorcE R. Jor Wru1aM V. VER: ALLEN STEUART, Auditor — Rura D. Srmrso Conservation, : = Dr. Ross Harpy, Chatnian Program ; H ospitality ; KENNETH E. STAGER, Chairman DonaLp Drake; Chairman Membership : Library - ca ee Wirtt1aM V. Mayer, Chairman Mrs. Lioyp M. Marrin, Ch OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY mrs iy Los te County Museum, Exposition eS hes Angeles 7, “ x a , Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences VOLUME 56 - - - - - PART ele Gai HEAD MUSCLES OF SALAMANDERS by Witu1am A. Hixton, Department of Zoology, Pomona College The adults of eight and the larvae of six families were studied and in these the majority of the world’s genera were involved in the observations of the muscles. It was found that there was a greater uniformity in the struc- tures than the terminology employed in the past. As far as possi- ble the classification of Francis 34, is followed with a more critical study of the nervous system and nerve distribution left for an- other time. The muscles of the head and particularly of the throat have been the subjects of numerous, sometimes conflicting accounts. No other part of the body has been more difficult to understand and describe. Many early observations before 1850 give information about the head muscles, such as Funk 1827, Carus 1828, Dugeés 1834. Rusconi in 1854, was about the first to discuss the changes of muscles during metamorphosis. Later works are those of Wilder, 1892-6, Goppert, 1894-8 and Driiner, 1901-4. Other very valuable contributions were by Luther, 1914, Edgeworth, 1920, Smith, 1920, and more recently those of Eaton, 33-36, Francis °34 and Piatt “35-40, as well as a number of other writings dealing with special topics connected with amphibian muscles. M. LEVATOR MANDIBULAE ANTERIOR, Edgeworth ’20, Francis °34, Eaton 36; temporalis, Funk 1827, Cuvier 1835, Fischer 1843, Lubosch 1914; pterygoidien, Rusconi 1854; pseudo-temporalis, Luther 1914. This is a triangular muscle from the frontal and perhaps parietal bones, inserted on the lower jaw. It is supplied by branches of the fifth cranial nerve. It helps to close the mouth. M. LEVATOR POSTERIOR, Edgeworth ’20, Francis 34, Eaton 36; cranio-mandibularis (part), Lubosch 1914; aductor mandibulae posterior, Luther 1914. It is from the frontal and the parietal bones to be inserted in the lower jaw back of the eye. It is sup- ec PY a branch of the 5th cranial nerve. It aids in closing the mouth. M. LEVATOR MANDIBULAE PROFUNDUS, Eaton 386; M; levator mandibulae (deep portion) Edgeworth ’20; frontales, Funk 1827; i BuLLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 pterygoideus, Cuvier 1835, Fischer 1843, Owen 1866, Driiner 1901, Lubosch 1914, Luther 1914; pterygoidien, Rusconi 1854; ptergo-maxillaris, Hoffman 1873-4. This muscle under the super- ficial muscles mentioned above in many cases seems a part of them. It is variable in position and distribution among. sala- manders. It is supplied by branches of the fifth cranial] nerve. It aids in closing the mouth. Prerycorweus, Eaton °36, Lubosch *14 and others. This small muscle covered with the larger more superficial ones is from the pterygoid region of the skull to the lower jaw. It is supplied by the fifth cranial nerve. It helps close the mouth, All these levator muscles just mentioned are really part of one system and distinctions between them are not always sharp. They vary in different forms. M.LEVATOR MANDIBULAE EXTERNUS, Edgeworth, 20, Francis °34, Eaton ‘36; masseter, Funk 1827, v. Siebold 1828, Fischer 1843, Rusconi 1854, Schmidt, Goddard, van de Hoeven 1864, Owen 1899, Mivart 1869, v. Pessen and Rabinowicz 1891, Driiner 1901, Coghill 1901-6, Osawa 1902; temporal, Cuvier 1835; pre-tympano- maxillaris, Hoffman 1873-8; mandibularis externus, Lubosch 1914; aductor mandibulae externus, Luther 1914. This has its origin from the anterio-lateral edge of the squamosal and the anterior wall of the otic capsule. It is inserted on the posterior end of the dentary and lateral face of the coronoid process of the pre-artic- ular region and in some cases to the skin of the corner of the mouth. It is served by the fifth cranial nerve. It aids in closing the mouth. M. DEPRESSOR MANDIBULAE, Edgeworth ’20, Francis 34; depres- sor maxillae inferioris, v. Seibold 1828; temporo-angulare, Duges 1834; digastricus, Fischer 1843; Stannius 1854-6, Osawa 1902; digastrique, Cuvier 1855, Rusconi 1854; occipito-mandibularis s. digastricus mandibulae, Owen 1866, digastris, Mivart 1869; digas- tric et depressor mandibulae, Humphrey 1872; cephalo-dorso- maxillaris s. digastricus maxillae, Hoffman 1873-8; c2md, Ruge 1897; cephalo-dorso-mandibularis, Driiner 1901. This is a large muscle arising from the posterior edge of the squamosal and ear capsule and anterior portion of the fascia cephalo-dorsalis of Driiner and inserted on the end of the lower jaw below. It is supplied by a branch of the 7th nerve. It opens the mouth. It is interesting to note that in many cases the closing muscles of the jaw are larger in total bulk than the opening ones. In some larvae and adults, a division of the depressor mandi- bulae runs back to the ceratobranchial and is sometimes called ceratomandibularis. Such a division is found in Proteus, Necturus, Typhlomolge, Amphiuma. In Siren this is attached to the tip of 2 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 the ceratohyal. This connection to the ceratohyal I found in the larvae of Ambystoma, Dicamptodon and Rhyocotriton. It may occur in others, but I have not noticed it. THROAT MUSCLES SUPERFICIAL LAYER M. INTERMANDIBULARIS, E;\dgeworth ’20, Francis 34; mylohyoid- eus, v. Siebold, Carus 1828, Stannius 1854, Owen 1866, Coghill 1901-6; mylohyoideus et interhyoideus, Ealter 1887; mylohyoideus et interhyoideus posterior, Funk 1827. This is a sheet of muscle across the floor of the mouth just under the skin. In the larva it consists of a small anterior, M. intermandi- bularis anterior as the M. i. posterior. Kesteven ‘41, prefers the name submentalis for the anterior portion, which seems better. M. INTERMANDIBULARIS POSTERIOR, Driiner 1901, Luther 1914, Edgeworth 1920, Francis 34 and others. It arises from the inner or mesal edge of each side of the mandible in its middle portion. The fibers extend towards the middle line from each side to join a broad or narrower aponeurosis in the center. It is supplied by the N. mandibularis of the fifth cranial nerve. It elevates the throat in breathing. M.INTERHYOIDEUS, Edgeworth 1920, Francis ’34, Piatt °35; M. constrictor pharyngis internus, v. Siebold 1828; mylohyoidien (middle part) Rusconi 1854; C2hv, Ruge ’97; inter-os-quadrata, Driiner ’01. In adult Hynobiidae and Salamandridae this has been described as two muscles. Piatt *40, suggests that the more anterior should be known as the sub-hyoideus and the posterior the inter-os- quadrate, but in other families it may be called interhyoideus. So far as I have seen there are not two muscles in all Hynobiidae or Salamandridae and there may be two in other groups. Also the use of the name sub-hyoideus would merely add to the already great confusion as a well defined muscle in another place has been given this name. This interhyoideus arises from the postero-mesal edge of the quadrate to spread out broadly over the caudal part of the mouth floor. Sometimes by means of fibers or a rather separate division it may reach quite cephalad under the fibers of the M. interman- dibularis posterior. It is supplied by branches of the R. jugularis of the 7th cranial nerve. It constricts the hyobranchial skeleton and the back part of the mouth, assisting in respiration and swallowing. M. INTERHYOIDEUS POSTERIOR, Edgeworth ’20, Francis ’34; con- strictor pharyngis externus, v. Siebold ’28; myo-hyoideus (poster- ior part ) Rusconi 1854; mylosternoideus, Walter 1887; C2vd, Ruge ‘97; quadrato-pectoralism Driiner 1901. 3 Butvetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 In the Plethodontidae in the adult two muscles may arise from this, or at least occupy this region; the quadrato-pectoralis whose origin may run over or near the angle of the jaw and a muscle said to be distinctive of this family, the gularis as recog- nized by Smith 20, The name interhyoideus inferior may be con- sidered the right one in all groups but Plethodontidae and here it may be said to have a quadrato-pectoralis portion which is nearer the angle of the jaw and the gularis which takes origin farther back from fascia on the side of the neck. The insertion is into the connective tissue region of the gular fold. It is supplied by the gular branch of the 7th cranial nerve. The function is to constrict the pharynx, aid in respiration or depress or tip the head to one side or the other. M. GeENIO-GLossus, v, Siebold 1828, Fischer 1843, Mivart 1869, Driiner 1901, Francis ’34 and others. This muscle at the mandibular symphsis takes origin from this area and is inserted into the tongue. It may have median and lateral portions. It may show from the surface before the other muscles are removed or be represented by a few deep fibers or be entirely lacking. Free tongued forms do not have it as in some of the Plethodontidae, while others in this group may have it poorly developed. In some families it is found in some species but not in others. It is supplied by branches of the spinal nerve which is sometimes called the hypoglossus. If the tongue is at rest, the muscle may draw it to the front of the mouth and arch its surface, but if the tongue is fully extend- ed the contraction of the muscle tends to retract it into the mouth. When the tongue is drawn towards the front of the mouth the muscle may press out a sticky mucous from the tongue for the pur- pose of capturing insects or other live food. DEEP MUSCLES M. genio-glossus sometimes seen near the surface is frequently either absent or deeply buried under other muscles. M. GENIO-HyomEuS, Carus 1828, Fischer 1843, Mivart 1869, Osawa 1902, Francis °34; rectus linguialis, Funk 1827; levator maxillae inferioris s. geniothyroideus, von Siebold 1828, Stannius 1854-6; levator maxillae inferioris longus, Schmidt, Goddard, van de Hoven 1864; genio-branchial, Humphrey 1872; maxillo-hyoid- eus, Hoffman 1873-4; genio-hyoideus s. rectus superficialis hypo- branchialis anterior, Driiner 1901. This is a pair of strong longitudinal muscles arising from the inner edge of the lower jaw either side of the middle line and inserted for the most part into the os triangulare and to some ex- tent to the tissue near or in the central region when there is no os triangulare. The hypoglossal nerve supplies fine branches to these muscles. BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 The action of these muscles is to depress the jaw, or whole head or pull forward the os triangulare and the heart region. M. GENIO-HYOIDEUS TERTITUS, was described by Driiner in 1901 as an abnormality, where a few lateral fibers pass from the jaw to the posterior end of the ceratohyal. A similar condition has been described where fibers pass from the posterior cornu of the hyoid to the anterior part of the lower jaw, according to Francis 34. He suggests also that this may represent the M. genio- hyoideus lateralis described by Smith ’20, in Eurecea. The muscles under the name of M. genio-hyoideus tertius have the same nerve supply and same general function as M. genio- hyoideus. In a number of cases fibers run from the mandible not far from the middle line, under the M. genio-hyoideus and end at or near the upper end of the ceratohyal. This may or may not be the muscle given the name M. genio-hyoideus tertius. To me it seems a slip from M. genio-hyoideus of Smith. M. susHyomeus, Druner, ‘04, Francis °34; ceratoglossi externi, Funk 27; os hyoides protrahens, Carus 1828; geiohyoideus later- alis, Driiner 1901; genio-hyoideus lateralis, of Smith. Lateral to the genio-hyoideus on each side is this variable muscle about which there is some confusion with the subhyoid- eus or genio-hyoideus lateralis. , Although a muscle in this position, lateral to the M. genio- hyoideus is found in salamanders generally; its form and connec- tions are variable and different perhaps also as to homology and origin and should perhaps have the name applied to it depend upon the group to which the animal possessing it belongs. In general it arises from the posterior end of the cerato-hyal which it may partly enclose and run slightly diagonally forward to be inserted on the dorsal side of the aponeurosis of the M. intermandibularis. Driiner ’01, describes a slip from this muscle to the lower jaw; in another of the Hynobiidae, Salamandrella, I found fibers running in that direction but not connecting with the jaw. In Hynobiidae and Salamandridae this muscle is supplied by the jugular branch of the 7th cranial nerve. It seems to be derived from the interhyoideus of the larva as its nerve supply might in- dicate. Smith ’20, in a plethodont Eurecea describes the develop- ment of a muscle here called M. genio-hyoideus lateralis, derived not from the interhyoideus, but from the M. genio-hyoideus, whose nerve supply is not from the 7th cranial, but from the first spinal. ‘Piatt ‘40, has investigated the nerves of this muscle in a number of the plethodontidae and finds the first spinal nerve is concerned in every case. According to Piatt then, the muscle in Salamandri- dae and Hynobiidae should be called subhyoideus and the term -genio-hyoideus lateralis should be restricted to Plethodontidae. | | 5 Bunietin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 * The genio-glossus lateralis of Ambystomidae is said by Piatt to be homologous with the genio-hyoideus lateralis of Plethodon- tidae, but its relations are different, so the name genio-hyoideus lateralis need not be used, \M[. sUBARCUALIS RECTUS, Edgeworth ’20; cerato-glossi-interni, Funk 1827; ceratoglossus, v. Siebold 1828; pre-stylo-peribranchial, Duges 1834; cerato-hyoideus-internus, Fischer 1843, Mivart 1869, Hoffman 1873-8, Walter 1887, Driiner 1901; protacteur de la corne hyoidienne posterieure, Rusconi 1854; cerato-hyoideus, Stannius; cerato-hyoideus externus, Osawa 1902. This arises from the posterior end of the first cerato-branchial cartilage, enclosing it in a muscular sheath. The fibers are inserted into the ventro-anterior border of the anterior end of the cerato- hyal, in this way connecting extreme ends of the two cartilages. It is supplied by branches of the 9th and 10th cranial nerves. Its contraction advances the branchial arches and associated parts connected with the copula in the extrusion of the tongue. It is a characteristic muscle in adults that have passed the larval period and is quite similar in appearance and position in Hynobiidae, Salamandridae, Ambystomidae and Plethodontidae. M. sTERNO-HYOWEUS, Smith ’20; rectus v. Siebold 1828; sterno- hyoideus superficialis, Furbinger 1873; rectus superficialis hypo- branchialis s. sterno-hyoideus, Driiner 1901; with rectus abdominis superficialis or abdominus musculus rectus, Carus 1828; rectus cervicus superficialis, Edgeworth °20. A thin layer of muscle arises from the sternum and fascia near. This passes forward dor- sally to the coracoids and ventral to the pericardium as a broad sheet with several insertions such as the following: at the junction of hypobranchial 1 and copula; on the tendon of the profondus portion of the muscle; more ventrally and mesially to the triang- ulare. Part of it is attached to the pericardium and sometimes fibers go on beyond the os triangulare to be inserted into the hypo- branchial skeleton ventro-medially. It is supplied by branches of the first three spinal nerves. Its central fibers support the M. genio-hyoideus and its lateral fibers assist the abdomino-hyoideus in retracting the tongue. M. ABDOMINO-HyOIDEUS, Smtih ‘20, Piatt *40; rectus cervicus profundus, Edgeworth ’20, Francis ’37; hebosteoglossus, v. Siebold 1828; sterno-hyoideus profundus, Furbinger 1873; rectus hypo- branchus profundus s. abdomino-hyoideus, Drurer 01; with rectus abdominus profundus, M. epischio-hyoideus, Carus 1828; rectus cervicus profundus, Edgeworth ’20, Francis ’34. 6 BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 This muscle forms the direct forward continuation of the M. rectus abdominus profundus. It passes forward about the lateral parts of the pericardium, mesial to the thyroid gland and between the hypobranchial cartilages 1 and 2, to be inserted on the dorsal side of the copula by a tendon. It may have an outer rather distinct slip which may be partly inserted into the first and second ceratobranchials as it passes between them. It is supplied by branches from the upper spinal nerves, or from the first, second and third. It may retract the tongue or depress the head. It is convenient to discuss some variations in the last two mus- cles at this time. In Salamandrella of Hynobiidae, the sterno-hyoideus for the most part ends cephalad of the heart towards the middle line about the level of the os triangulare with a slip forward to the hyobranchial region. The abdomino-hyoid sends a mediam slip to the region of the os triangulare and another to the median por- tion of the hyobranchial apparatus while much of its substance passes between the first and second epibranchial to end on the dorsal side of the copula. In Ambystoma maculata, the broad sterno-abdominalis ends fer the most part in the middle line on the Os triangulare. The abdomino-hyoid sends a small slip to the os itriangulare with little indication of terminations in the middle line. until it terminates on the dorsal side of the copula. In Rhyoco- triton, the abdomino-hyoid sends a small slip to the caudal sur- face of the os triangulare and several slender strands to the ven- tral side of the basibranchial and hyoid apparatus, but as in many others, most of its fibers end dorsally on the copula. In Salaman- dra, most of the abdomino-hyoid fibers end dorsally on the copula, but a few cross over to end ventrally and a few terminate on the Os triangulare. The sterno-abdominalis broadens out to end large- ly in the region of the pericardium. In Diemictylus viridescens, sterno-hyoid fibers end in large numbers towards the middle line on the hyobranchial apparatus. The abdomino-hyoid with little indication of fibers on the os triangulare has a conspicuous small bundle which comes from underneath to end in the middle line of the copula. In Cynops pyrogaster the condition is much the same. In Taricha torosa there is a lateral slip to the os triangulare but none to the central ventral surface of the basibranchial. In Plethodon glutinosus, as the two muscles pass to the os triangulare, a lateral slip is sent to the latter and a small one to the median dorsal surface of the copula. The central part of the sterno-hyoid is broad. Aneides and Pseudotriton are similar with the median part of the sterno-hyoid broad from side to side. 7 BULLETIN, So. CALtir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 .M. CERATOHYOIDEUS EXTERNUS, Piatt ’40, Easton °37. This is often a large muscle from the ventral and basal end of the ceratobranchial. It is supplied by branches of the 9th and 10th cranial nerves. It moves the ceratobranchials and the ceratohyals. It is found in some gilled adults and in the larval forms of all groups. It is lost in adults without gills. The other muscle often considered with it, is the subarcualis rectus 1, also found in gilled adults, larvae and adults without gills is often more prominent in the adult, where it replaces the M. ceratohyoideus externus. It is convenient to call this M. cerato- hyoideus internus in comparison with the externus. M. pecrori-sCAPULARIS, Edgeworth 1920, Francis 1937; omo- hyoideus, Meckel 1869, Humphry 1872, Hoffman 1873-4, Osawa 1902; scapulo-post-hyoiden, Dugés 1834; pectori-scapularis in- ternis, Furbinger 1873; pectori-scapularis s. omohyoideus, Walter 1877, Drurer 1901. This is a small muscle which arises from the mesial surface of the ventral end of the scapula and is inserted at the lateral edge of the superficial part of the sterno-abdominalis. It serves to strengthen or brace the sterno-abdominalis. M. uyoctossus, Fischer 1843, Driiner 01, Smith ’20, Francis ‘37, Piatt 40. This small muscle has fibers from the dorsal side of the forward end of the copula into the tongue substance. It is sup- plied by branches of the first spinal nerve. It may compress the tongue, or change its shape slightly. M. SUPRAPENDICULARIS, Smith °20, Piatt °40. It arises from the medial border of the ceratohyal on each side. It is probably supplied by the first spinal nerve. it helps to force the tongue forward on contraction. It has been described espe- cially in free-tongued forms among the Plethodontidae but is also found in some others. MUSCLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE GILLS M. CERATOHYOIDEUS EXTERNUS and INTERNUS, already mentioned. SUBARCUALIS RECTI MUSCLES, Edgeworth, 1920, Eaton °36, Piatt ‘40. These are usually two in number, the longest connects the first and last branchial arches and the second usually joins the last two arches. They are probably supplied by branches of the 9th and 10th cranial nerves. By their contraction the gill arches are brought together. M. sUBARCUALIS OBLIQUI, Edgeworth, 1920, Eaton 36, Piatt “40. These usually run from their origin on median muscles to be at- tached to the second or third arches or the last two arches. Prob- ably supplied by the 9th and 10th cranial nerves. They help pull the arches forward. M. PROTRACTOR ARCUS ULTIMI, Hoffman 1878, Wilder 1891. In Siren and Proteus, from the base of the last ceratobranchial to the posterior side of the hypobranchial. 8 BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 M. LEVATORES ARCUUM, Fischer 1864; levatorarcus branchialis 1-4, Emerson ‘05, Eaton 36. These muscles vary in different larvae and adults in number and position. L.A.1 may arise from the posterior side of the squamosal and others up to 4 or 5 may form a fan-shaped group of muscles and fascia on the side of the body to be inserted at the base of the gill region. Probably supplied by branches of the 10th cranial nerve. They may pull the whole gill region closer to the head. M. oMo-aRcuaLIs, Piatt 36; prococoraco-branchialis, Wilder ’91. This arises from the anterior angle between scapula and procora- coid and runs forward to be inserted on the last gill arch near the gill. It has been found in Proteidae, Sirenidae and the larvae of Hynobiidae. I have found it in Proteus, Necturus, Siren and Pseudobranchus adults. Girt MuscLes (following Piatt ’38 ) There are two sets of delicate intrinsic gill muscles. The dorsal are the ievatores branchiarum and the ventral the depressor branchiarum. MUSCLE CHANGES FROM GILLED LARVAE TO ADULTS THAT LACK GILLS The intermandibularis anterior, or as Kesteven prefers it, the submentalis in some salamanders disappears in the adult, espe- cially in the Hynobiidae, Salamandridae, Ambystomidae and Plethodontidae. In the larva the large ceratohyoideus is lost when the adult stage is reached and in many cases the smaller internus becomes larger in many cases. The thoracico-hyoideus of the larva transforms into the ab- domino-hyoideus and the sterno-hyoideus of the adult. In the larva the muscle has a proliferation and an anterior growth of fibers which brings the origin on the dorsal surface of the first basibranchial to make the beginning of the abdomino-hyoideus. There is also a breaking down of the median portion of the thor- acico-hyoideus and a differentiation of the ventral slip of the larval muscle into the sterno-hyoideus. (partly after Smith °20). In some Plethodontidae there may be proliferation of the an- terior end of the genio-hyoideus laterally, but this does not al- ways last after transformation. The subarcualis rectus muscles disappear in the adult when the gill arches are lost. Possibly some may be transformed into pharyngeal muscles. The subarcualis obliqui of the larvae disappear in land stages. The levator archum muscles disappear as such in the adult to become dorsal pharyngeal muscles or contribute to them. 9 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 -In several families, the so-called interhyoideus posterior or quadrato-pectoralis becomes two muscles, Piatt ’40, considers those in Hynobiidae and Salamandridae to be sub-hyoides in front and the posterior portion the inter-os-quadrata. In Pletho- dontidae the two parts in the adult are a more ventral part of the quadrato-pectoralis and the gularis with fascia connections dorsal- ly. These two differ in degree and form in various genera and species. A cerato-mandibular division of the depressor mandibulae found in some larvae disappears in the adult. Muscles found in the adult, gill lacking forms are as follows: In some with attached tongues the genio-glossal may occur. In some Plethodontidae which have a small lingual cartilage such as the genera Eurecea, Manculus, Pseudotriton and Gyrinophilus, there is the small hypoglossus muscle. In most free tongued Plethodontidae the surpapendicularis runs across the border of the tongue between the ceratohyals. LARYNGEAL MUSCLES M. DILATOR LARYNGEUS, Edgeworth 1920, Francis 1937; dilator aditus laryngis, Henle 1839: dorso- laryngeus et dorso- trachealis, Fischer 1843, Wilder 1892-6; dorso-pharyngeus of dorso- laryngeus und dorso - trachealis, von Gop pert 1894-8; dorso - laryngeus, Driiner 1901, Osawa 1902. From the dorsal fascia, inserted on the lateral cartilage of the larynx. Supplied by branches of the 10th cranial nerve. M, LARYNGEUS DORSALIS ET VENTRALIS, Edgeworth ’20, Eaton °36 and others. Eaton recognizes a muscle each side of the larynx from the arytenoid cartilages with attachments to the ventral end of the last muscle. They dialate the larynx. M. CONSTRICTOR LARYNGIS, Edgeworth '20, Eaton ’36, Francis °37; constrictor aditus laryngis, Henle 1839, Fischer 1843, Driiner ’01; Ring of periartenoideus dorsalis, Wilder 92-6; spincter laryngis, Goppert 1894-8. This is a ring of muscle about the larynx ventral to the glottis. It receives branches from the 10th cranial nerve. It closes or restricts the cavity of the larynx. iomngioe BuLLETIN, So. Carir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 BIBLIOGRAPHY Carus, C. G. 1828. Tabulae Anatomiam Comparativum illustrantes, Paris 1, Lipsiae. Driiner, L. Keimenbogen und Kehlkopfsmuskulatur der Urodelen. I Theil. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. Anat. 15:435-622. 1903. Ueber die Muskulatur des Visceralsketts bei Urodelen. Anat. Anz. 23° 545-01 1. 1903. Ueber die Muskulatur der Visceralbogen der Uradelen. Verh. Anat. Ges. 17:142-144. 1904. Studien zur Anatomie der Zugebein-, Keimenbogen und Kehlkopf- muskulatur der Urodelen II Theil. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. Anat. 19:361-690. Dugés, A. 1834. Recherches sur 1’ osteologie et la myologie des batraciens a leurs différent ages. Pt. II, p. 155. Paris. Eaton, T. H., Jr. 1936. The myology of salamanders with particular reference to Dicamp- todon ensatus Esh. Jour. Morph. 60:31-75. 1937. The gularis muscle. Jour. Morph. 19:317-324. Edgeworth, F. H. 1920. On the development of the hyobranchial and laryngeal muscles in Amphibia. Jour. Anat. London 44 N.S. 167-316. 1923. On the larval hyobranchial skeleton and musculature of Crypto- branchus, Menopoma and Ellipsoglossa. Jour. Anat. 47:125-162. Emerson, E. T. 1905. General anatomy of Typhlotriton rathbuni. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. 32:43-76. Francis, E. T. B. 1934. The anatomy of the salamander. Oxford press. Hoffman, C. K, 1873-8. Amphibien. In Bronn, Klassen und Ordnung des thierreichs. Bd. 6(2), pp. 1-726. Kesteven, H. L. 1941. Comments on Piatt’s terminology in salamander myology. Copeia 4:152-154. Luther, A. 1914. Ueber die vom Trigeminus versorgte Muskulatur der Amphibien. Helsingf., Acta Soc. Fenn. 44:1-151. 1935. A comparative study of the hyobranchial apparatus and_ throat musculature in the Plethodontidae. Jour. Morph, 57:213-51. 1938. Morphogenesis of the cranial muscles in A. punctatum. Ibd. :63: 531-587. 1939. Correct terminology in salamander myology. I. Intrinsic gill mus- culature. Copeia. pp. 220-224. 1940. Correct terminology in salamander myology. II Transverse ventral throat musculature. Ibd. 9-14. 11 BULLETIN, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 Smith, G. M. 1927. The detailed anatomy of ‘Triturus torosus, Trans. Roy. Soc. of Canada, 3d series 21:451-484. ¢ 9 Wilder, H. H ; 1891. A contribution to the anatomy of Siren lacertina. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. Morph., 4:653-696. PLATE 1 Diagrams of the head muscles of adult salamanders. 1. From above. : irom below. 3. Deeper layer from below. 4. Still deeper layer from elow. 12 ] | BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 LM,Pe D.M.A. ‘ => PLATE 2 5. Adult from the side. 6. Larva from above. 7. Larva from the side. 8. pave from below, superficial muscles. 9. Larva from below, deeper muscles. INDEX TO FIGURES A.H., Abdomino-hyoides; C.H.E., Ceratohyoides externus; C.I., Cera- tohyoides internus; C.M., Ceratomandibularis; D.L., Dialator laryngis; D.M.., Depressor mandibulae; G., Gularis; G.G., Genioglossus; G.H., Geniohyoideus; G.H.L., Geniohyoideus lateralis; I.A., Intermandibularis anterior or sub- mentalis; I.H., Interhyoideus; I.H.P., Interhyoideus posterior; L.A.R., Levatores arcum branchiarum; L.M.A., Levator mandibulae anterior; L.M.E., Levator mandibulae externa; L.M.P., Levator mandibulae posterior; Q.P., Quadrato-pectoralis; $., Suprapendicularis; S.A., Subarcualis obliqui; S.H., Sternohyoideus; S.R., Subarcuales recti. cane Oo 13 Buttetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 NEW BATHYPELAGIC AMPHIPODS OF THE GENERA RHACHOTROPIS AND LEPECHINELLA WITH KEYS TO THE GENERA! By J. LAuRENS BARNARD Allan Hancock Foundation A single tow with an experimental model of an epibenthic dredge made by Mr. Robert Bieri in waters southwest of Catalina Island, off the coast of southern California, revealed two species of amphipods new to science. The equipment used was aboard the research vessel “E. W. Scripps” of Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla, California. These specimens are of importance due to the poorly known bathypelagic amphipod fauna of the eastern Pacific Ocean and the fact that they were recovered on the deeply basined con- tinental shelf where endemic bathypelagic species might occur. However, the precise depth of capture is unknown as the dredge fished from the surface to the bottom. I am indebted to Mr. Bieri, now of Lamont Geological Observa- tory, Columbia University, for the donation of the specimens and to the Allan Hancock Foundation for the use of facilities. Rhachotropis Smith Rhachotropis Smith, 1883, Proc. U.S. Mus. 6: 222. Gracilipes Holmes, 1908, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 35: 526. Below is a key to the existing species of the genus except for the following names: R. elegans Bonnier has been fused with R. grimaldii by K. H. Barnard, 1916, Ann. So. African Mus. 16: 179. R. gracilis Bonnier is poorly known. See Shoemaker, 1930, Contr. Canadian Biol. Fisheries NS 5 (AU a eal7/- R. proxima Cheyreux, 1911, Bull. Inst. Oceanog. 204: 11. The description of the armature of the pleon and pleonal epimera is not clear or lacking. However, this species is closely related to R. faeroensis. Gracilipes multicalceolus Thorsteinson, 1941, Univ. Washing- ton Publ. Oceanog. 4 (2): 85-86 has been transferred to the genus Eusirella by Birstein and Vinogradov, 1955, Trudy Inst. Okean. Akad. Nauk SSSR 12: 271. ‘Contribution No. 185 from the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California. 14 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 go LO bop Gor AAs SOU OU re re Co 16. 16. KEY TO THE GENUS RHACHOTROPIS Pleon segment 4 bears a dorsal tooth or teeth 2 Pleon segment 4 lacks any dorsal teeth 18 Peraeon segment 7 bears a dorsal tooth 3 Peraeon segment 7 lacks a dorsal tooth 1 Pleon segments have more than one mediodorsal tooth ACULEATA (Lepechin) Pleon segments have only one mediodorsal tooth 4 Pleon segment 3 not tricarinate PLATYCERA K.H. Barnard Pleon segment 3 tricarinate 5 Telson not deeply cleft (less than 4) ©LOBATA Shoemaker Telson deeply cleft (more than 4) 6 Peraeopod 5 longer than the body MACROPUS Sars Peraeopod 5 not longer than the body HELLERI (Boeck) Pleon segment 3 lacks an acute mediodorsal tooth 8 Pleon segment 3 bears an acute mediodorsal tooth ll Pleon segment | bears a dorsal tooth ANTARCTICA K.H. Barnard Pleon segment 1 lacks a well defined dorsal tooth 9 Pleon segments 2-4 not tricarinate ANOMALA K.H. Barnard Pleon segments 2-4 tricarinate 10 Telson deeply cleft PAENEGLABER K.H. Barnard Telson not deeply cleft ROSTRATA Bonnier . Pleon segment 3 tricarinate 12 . Pleon segment 3 not tricarinate U7 Telson deeply cleft 13 Telson not deeply cleft 16 Lateral carinae of pleon segment 3 obtuse HUNTERI Nicholls Lateral carinae of pleon segment 3 projecting into points 14 Ventral edge of third pleonal epimeron serrated CERVUS n. sp. . Ventral edge of third pleonal epimeron smooth 15 Eyes small, pigmented, tooth of pleon segment 4 slender LOMONSOVI Gurjanova Eyes unpigmented, tooth of pleon segment 4 stout LEUCOPHTHALMA Sars Pleon segment 4 tricarinate® KERGUELENI Stebbing* Pleon segment 4 not tricarinate INTEGRICAUDA Carausu *The original description and figures of R. kergueleni are unclear as to _ the tricarination of pleon segments 3-4, but Stebbing (1906, Das Tierreich | 21: 349) affirms that they are. 15 BuLLetiIn, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 \7. Peraeopod 5, lower corner of article 2 angular, produced FAEROENSIS Stephensen \7. Peraeopod 5, lower corner of article 2 sloping, unproduced DISTINCTA (Holmes ) 18. Pleon segment 3 lacks a mediodorsal tooth INFLATA (Sars) 1S. Pleon segment 3 bears a mediodorsal tooth 19 19. Telson deeply cleft 20 19. Telson not deeply cleft 21 20. Peraeon segment 7 bears a dorsal tooth OCULATA (Hansen) 20. Peraeon segment 7 lacks a dorsal tooth GRIMALDII (Chevreux ) 21. Peraeopod 5, article 2 with large posterior cusp PALPORUM Stebbing Peraeopod 5, article 2 lacks posterior cusp 22 22. Rostrum short, pleon with small teeth, pleon segment 3 not tricarinate NATATOR (Holmes ) 22. Rostrum long, pleon with large teeth, pleon segment 3 tricarinate SIBOGAE Pirlot Rhachotropis cervus, new species (Plate 3) Diacnosis. — Rostrum short, eyes absent; none of the peraeon segments dorsally toothed or carinate; each ventral corner of per- aeon segment 7 produced backwards into a conical process; pleon segments 1-4 each with an acute, mediodorsal, backward pointing tooth; pleon segments 1-3 tricarinate, each lateral carina produced into a posterior cusp; pleon segment 1 with the lateral cusps but the lateral carinae are not as evident as in segments 2 and 3. Epimera of pleon segment 3 with ventral edges serrated, pos- terior edges smooth. Telson split about % of its length. Peraeopod 5: article 2 slightly serrated posteriorly, lower pos- terior corner not projecting. Antenna | with a minute, uniarticulate accessory flagellum. Male and female differ only by the female brood plates. Ho.oryre. — AHF No. 543, male 7 mm. TYPE LocaLity. — 33° 17’ N, 118° 22’ W, epibenthic dredge, 0-1000 m (0-490 fms), Oct. 20, 1954, coll, R. Bieri. MATERIAL EXAMINED. — Seven specimens from the type locality. Remarks. — This species is related to R. leucophthalma Sars (1893, Crustacea of Norway 1: 429, pl. 151, fig. 2) but differs in 16 BULLETIN, So. CAaLiF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Voli 56) Rartalen 1957 the following respects: (1) the lower edges of the third pleonal epimera are serrated while posterior edges are smooth; (2) the lobe of article 5 of gnathopods 1-2 is slender; (3) peraeon seg- ment 7 projects backward at each ventral edge; (4) the head lobes are more obtuse; (5) the telson is less deeply cleft. The new species is also related to R. lomonsovi Gurjanova (1934, Zool. Anzeiger 108: 124, fig. 2) but differs by: (1) lack of visible eyes; (2) more obtuse lateral head lobes; (3) lack of posterior serrations and presence of ventral serrations on third pleonal epimera; (4) less deeply cleft telson; (5) the posteroven- tral projections of peraeon segment 7; (6) the less acute first coxae. Lepechinella Stebbing Lepechinella Stebbing, 1908, Jour. Linn. Soc. London, Zool. 30:191. Dorbanella Chevreux, 1914, Bull. Inst. Oceanog. 296:1. KEY TO THE GENUS LEPECHINELLA 1. Coxa 1 bifid 2 1. Coxa 1 not bifid 3 2. Head processes long, pleon segments 1-3 with 2 teeth only ARCTICA (Schellenberg ) * 2. Except for rostrum, head processes short or absent, pleon segments 1-3 with 3 teeth each CHRYSOTHERAS Stebbing Peraeon segments 1-7 lack acute dorsal teeth CETRATA K.H. Barnard Peraeon segments 1-7 bear acute dorsal teeth + Peraeon segment | with one short dorsal process DRYGALSKII Schellenber Peraeon segment | with two long dorsal processes Coxa 1 very long and attenuated ECHINATA (Chevreux Coxa 1 moderately long, scarcely attenuated Dorsal pleonal processes much larger than peraeonal, head processes short CURVISPINOSA Pirlot Dorsal pleonal processes similar to peraeonal, head processes long BIERII n. sp. (Sp) OM AON aad Chae) ~~ VIGQ oO Lepechinella bierii, new_ species (Plates 4, 5) DESCRIPTION OF FEMALE. — Head with a medial, erect, and slender rostral process, each side of head bears 2 forward projec- tions; eyes absent. Antenna 1: article 2 about twice the length of article 1, article 3 shorter than 1 and bearing a short, uniarticulate accessory flagellum. *Senior synonym of L. schellenbergi Stephensen 17 BULLETIN, So. CaLir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 PLATE 3 Rhachotropis cervus, n. sp. Female, 10 mm. Fig. a, body; b, maxilla 2; c, g, antennae 1-2; e, h, i, q, peraeopods 5, 4, 3, 2; f, r, 1, uropods 1-3; j, 0, gnathopods 1-2; k, accessory flagellum; m, upper lip; n, mandible; p, coxa 3; s, telson; t, maxilla 1; u, molar of right mandible; v, lower lip, part; w, maxilliped. Male, 6 mm. Fig. d, antenna 2. 18 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 \ Hak \ \ | ot PLATE 4 Lepechinella bierii, n. sp. Female, 6 mm, holotype. Lateral view. Antenna 2 slightly longer than 1, article 5 of peduncle not quite twice as long as 4, flagellum shorter than article 5. Mouthparts similar to the type species, L. chrysotheras Steb- bing, except for the more slender first maxillary palp and the shorter spines on the inner edge of the inner plate of the maxil- liped; the right and left palps of the first maxillae bear different sized spines. Dorsal processes of segments slender. Peraeon segment 1 bears 2 of these teeth while each of the following segments bears one only; the last two segments of the urosome are fused. The processes of the pleon become successively more erect. Epimera of pleon segments 1-3 with lower posterior corners produced into curved, conical processes; lower edges of second epimera noticeably excavate anterior to the process. Coxae 1-2 not bifid, coxae 3-4 bifid, with a web between the downward projecting arms, coxa 5 with a long, conical anterior lobe, coxa 6 slightly bilobed, coxa 7 bearing a ventroposterior, curved process. Peraeopods 3-5 successively longer, seventh articles successive- ly shorter. Ho.oryre. — AHF No. 544, female, 6 mm. Tyre Locauiry. — 33°17’ N, 118° 22’ W. epibenthic dredge, 0-1000 m (0-490 fms), Oct. 20, 1954, coll. R. Bieri. MATERIAL EXAMINED. — Two specimens from the type locality. 19 Butverin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 ‘Remarks. — The undivided, broad and truncated first coxae, the slender peraeonal processes, and the erect rostral process of the head distinguish this species. PLATE 5 Lepechinella bierii, n. sp. Female, 6 mm, holotype. Fig. a, outer plate of maxilliped; b, article 7 of peraeopod 2; c, mandible; d, k, gnathopods 2, 1; e, left and right palps of maxilla 1; f, telson; g, palp article 4, maxilliped; h, uropod 3; i, inner plate of maxilliped; j, accessory flagellum, stippled. 20 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vols 56) Bante Io 957, TWO SPECIES OF BRYOZOA CTENOSTOMATA FROM THE SALTON SEA’ By Joun D. Soute* While in the process of sorting the invertebrate animals col- lected at various stations in the Salton Sea, Mr. Richard H. Lins- ley, biologist with the University of California Salton Sea Labora- tory, noted three collecting bottles covered with colonies of actenostome bryozoan. Upon receipt of this material from Mr. Linsley, it was discovered that not one, but two species of Bryozoa Ctenostomata were represented, namely Nolella blakei Rogick, 1949 and Victorella pavida Kent, 1870. In each instance, the only prior report of the species in the United States had been from the Atlantic coast. The author wishes to take this opportunitv to express his grati- tude to Mr. Richard H. Linsley of the University of California Salton Sea Laboratory for his interest and cooperation in not only providing the specimens, but in also furnishing a faunal list of associated invertebrates. To Dr. Mary D. Rogick of the College of New Rochelle, I acknowledge my appreciation for her generous aid in confirming the identification of Nolella blakei. Nolella Gosse, 1855 Nolella blakei Rogick, 1949 1949 Nolella blakei Rogick, Biol. Bull., vol. 97, no. 2, pp. 158-168, pl. 1, figs. 1-4, pl. 2, figs. 5-8, pl. 3, figs. 9-14, pl. 4, figs. 15-19. Colonies of Nolella blakei were found growing in great profu- sion covering the walls of a test bottle suspended in the Salton Sea for a period of one month at a depth of about one meter. The zoids, or individuals of the colony, are cylindrical, arising from an irregular flattened adnate base. In over-all dimensions, including the basal area, the mature zoids range from individuals as short as 320 microns to those that have attained a length of 1150 microns. In width the variation is not extreme, ranging from 110 microns to 140 microns. The cuticle of the older zoids is al- most imperceptibly covered with a fine grained layer of silt, to the extent of being moderately argillaceous. The basal portion of the younger zoids are decidedly expanded and flattened, exhibit- ing from 6 to 14 lateral branches. Some of these lateral branches ‘Contribution number 186 from the Allan Hancock Foundation. * Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, Calif. 21 ButLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 are short, diminutive and narrow. Others are wider, longer, pro- vided with a diaphragm or septum, and constitute a stolonal con- nection to an adjacent zoid. The longer, older zoids have a much less pronounced basal expansion with a reduced number of lateral branches. The polypide is provided with 8 tentacles. The lower portion of the cardium is expanded immediately before it joins the caecum, to form a grinding organ that is more the nature of a proventriculus than a gizzard (pl. 6, fig. 1). Geographical dis- tribution: Atlantic. Lagoon Pond, Martha’s Vineyard, Massachu- setts. August 1946. Collector, Mary D. Rogick. Occurence: Salton Sea, California, station 6, north end of the Salton Sea, 33° 31’N - 116° 02’W, depth 1.2 meters, Salinity 32.5/00 fairly constant. August 1955. Collector, Richard H. Lins- ley, University of California Salton Sea Laboratory. Victorella Kent, 1870 Victorella pavida Kent, 1870 1870 Victorella pavida Kent, Quart. Jour. Micro. Sci., vol. 10, n.s., pp. 34 - 39, pl. 4, figs. 1-3. 1880 Victorella pavida, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa., pp 561, 562, pl. 79, figs. 4-7. 1885 Victorella pavida, Bousfield, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. 16, pp. 401-407, pl. 12, figs. 1-3. 1887 Victorella pavida, Kraepelin, Abh. Geb. Naturw., Hamburg, band 10, pp. 93-96, pls. 3, 4, figs. 75, 78, 91, 92, 118. 1887 Paludicella Miilleri Kraepelin, Abh. Geb. Naturw., Ham- burg, band 10, pp. 158-160 (footnote), text figs. a & b. 1907 Victorella pavida, Annandale, Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. 1, pp. 200-203 text figs. 3 & 4.. 1908 Victorella bengalensis Annandale, Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. 2, pp. 11-18, fig. 1. 1911 Victorella pavida, Annandale, Fauna Brit. India, pp. 194, 195. 1911 Victorella pavida, Annandale, Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. 6, pp. 196, 197, pl. 13, fig. 5. 1911 Victorella miilleri, Annandale, Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. 6, p. 196, pl. 18, fig. 4. 1911 Victorella bengalensis, Annandale, Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. 6, p. 197, pl. 8, figs. 3, 7 & 8. 1915 Victorella bengalensis, Annandale, Mem. Ind. Mus., vol. 5, p. 125. 1932 Victorella pavida, Osburn, Ohio Jour. Sci., vol. 32, no. 5, p. 445, pl 1, fig. 5. bo bo BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vole 56s Parte loa 1936 Victorella pavida, Vorstman, Flora en Fauna Zuiderzee, supp., pp. 148, 149, text figs. 5, 6. 1940 Victorella pavida, Marcus, Danmarks Fauna, Mosdyr, pp. 329, 330, text fig. 173. 1944 Victorella pavida, Osburn, Chesapeake Biol. Lab. pub. 63, pp. 17-20, pl. 5, and text fig. 10. 1951 Victorella pavida, Braem, Zoologica, Stuttgart, band 37, heft 102, pp. 7-28, pl. 1, figs. 2-8, pl. 2, figs. 10-12, figs. 14-20, pl. 3, figs. 22-35, pl. 4, figs. 36-44. 1951 Tanganella Miilleri Braem, Zoologica, Stuttgart, band 37, heft 102, pp. 23-33, pl. 1, fig. 9, pl. 5, figs 45-58, pl. 6, figs. 54-61, pl. 8, figs. 69, 70. 1951 Victorella pavida forma symbiotica, Lacourt, Expl. Hydro- biol. Lac Tanganika, Res. Sci., vol, 3, fase. 2, pp. 24, 25. 1953 Victorella pavida, Marcus, Arq. Museu Nac., vol. 42, pp. 312, 313, pl. 8, fig. 94. 1954 Victorella pavida, Brattstrom, Lunds Univer. Arsskrift, Avd 2, band 50, nr. 9, pp. 1-29, 1 pl., 4 text figs. 1956 Victorella pavida, Toriumi, Sci. Rep. Tohoku Univer., 4 ser. (Biology), vol. 22, no. 2, p. 82, figs 1-3. The zoaria or colonies of Victorella pavida form a luxuriant tan to yellowish brown colored mat upon the substratum. The speci- mens in this collection were removed from the sides of two test. bottles, each exposed for a period of 30 days in the Salton Sea at a depth of about one meter. In 1944 Osburn described colonies of Victorella pavida from Chesapeake Bay as capable of “spread- ing over almost any sort of substratum on which it can find at- tachment”. The abundance of this species during the warm sum- mer months is enough so as to regard it as a potential fouling organism. The zoids of Victorella pavida are variable in their dimensions, a factor that has been noted by several of the earlier authors (Bousfield, 1885; Osburn, 1944; Braem, 1951; and Marcus, 1953). With regard to those collected from the Salton Sea, short repent, mature individuals with a total length of only 345 microns were found, Within the same colony, many exceedingly elongated in- dividuals were measured. The longest was found to have a length of 4850 microns. In width the variation is not great, rang- ing Som 126 microns to 196 microns. The tall zoids are cylindrical, arising from limited expanded portions of the stolon. The basal expansion may exhibit two, three or even four short lateral branches. A number of the longer mature zoids (primary ) have functional secondary zoids budding directly from the cuticle. While the secondary zoids never at- _tain the maximum length of the primary individuals, in all other anatomical respects they can be considered as normal members ? 23 BULLETIN, So. CaAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 of the colony (pl. 6, fig. 2). Geographical distribution: The only place in the United States from which Victorella pavida has been reported prior to this time is Chesapeake Bay, Maryland (Osburn, 1932, 1944). For an excellant summary of the worldwide distribu- tion of this species see Brattstrom, 1954. Occurence: Salton Sea, California, station 7, south side of Mul- let Island, 33° 13.5’N - 115° 36.5’W, depth 1.0 meters, October 1955. Station 8, .75 miles north east of Mullet Island, 33° 14’N - 115° 35.7’ W, depth 0.8 meters, August 1955. Salinity at stations varies considerably due to the influence of the water from the mouth of the nearby Alamo River. Brackish. Associated invertebrates: Neanthes succinea (Frey & Leuckart), Balanus amphitrite saltoensis Rogers, Brachionus plicatilis Mul- ler, and Cyclops dimorphus Kieter. Taxonomic affinity: As was noted above, the zoids of Victorella pavida exhibit considerable variation in length. The short in- dividuals of the colony, ie the younger zoids, appear to be anatom- ically identical with the zoids of the species described in 1887 by Kraepelin as Paludicella Miilleri, later referred to as Vic- torella miilleri by Annandale, 1911, and in 1951 redescribed by Braem as Tanganella Miilleri. The taxonomic history of Victorel- la miilleri is diverse. While a few authors have accepted it as a well-defined species, the majority are of the opinion it is at least very closely related, if not identical with Victorella pavida. Most authors who have studied the European material have considered the two identical. Brattstrom, 1954, pp. 8-12, summarizes the various views, including the work of Kraepelin (1887) who de- scribed Paludicella Miilleri; Braem, (1911) who at that time con- sidered Victorella miilleri a growth phase of Victorella pavida; Annandale, (1911) who stated that while four “species” can be distinguished in the genus Victorella, it might be better to regard them as varieties or as subspecies of Victorella pavida. Annandale also found with regard to Victorella miilleri, intermediate stages between the “form miilleri” and the Victorella associated with it, V. pavida. Brattstrom (1954) also reviews the work of Vanhoften, (1917) who considered Victorella miilleri a growth form of V. pavida, as did Ulrich, (1926). Marcus (1940) and Valkanov (1943) also considered the two as being identical. Toriumi (1956) stated that Victorella miilleri is a “phenotype” of V. pavida. Although Osburn (1944) did not have the opportunity to dis- cuss V. miilleri, his figures 10c, 10d, and 10f of early growth stages, lend support to the authors who consider the two species identical. The close similarity of Osburn’s figures mentioned and those of Braem (1951), plate 5, fig. 47 of Tanganella Miilleri is unmistakable. Osburn’s (1944) measurements of V. pavida from 24 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 Chesapeake Bay correspond very closely to those given later by Braem for the Greifswald material. Annandale (1911) separated Victorella pavida from V. miilleri on the premise that V. mulleri has parietal muscles present in the distal tip of the zoids, whereas V. pavida does not. Examination of the Salton Sea specimens, as well as slides made by Osburn from the Chesapeake Bay collection reveal Annandale’s assertion to be erroneous. Victorella pavida possesses parietal muscles in the distal tip of the zoids. It seems paradoxical that one author can derive two genera from material considered by other authors to be a single weil known and widely distributed species. Braem (1951) erected the genus Tanganella on the basis of, (a) the morphology of the cardia and the presence of a sphincter muscle in the foregut of the polypide; (b) the small size of the zoids; and (c) the num- ber of the “Kragenfalten”. With regard to item (a) above, Braem, reported a ventricose enlargement of the cardia in V. pavida with the conclusion that it is a grinding mill lacking in dentition ie proventriculus. This agrees with findings of earlier authors such as, Osburn, ‘proven- triculus, (1944); Marcus, ‘tyggemave, (1940); and Bousfield, ‘giz- zard, (1885). With reference to Tanganella Miilleri, Braem makes no mention of a proventriculus, although the sphincter muscula- ture of the foregut is thoroughly discussed. However, two of Braem’s illustrations of T. Muilleri (pl. 5, figs. 49 and 51) show every indication of the presence of a proventricular division of the cardia. Examination of the Salton Sea collection and the Chesapeake Bay specimens, and a comparison with Braem’s work indicates that essentially there is no marked anatomical dissimi- larity that would separate a species miilleri from Victorella pavida let alone warrant the erection of a separate genus. Consider next Braem’s second item, the length of the zoid. As shown by many earlier authors as well as by the examination of the Salton Sea material this is not a valid criterion for the separa- tion of a distinct genus. In a given colony both short zoids of the miilleri type occur in numbers intermingled with the predominate greatly elongated individuals considered typical of Victorella pavida. The miilleri type zoid is to be considered as a growth phase encountered in the younger colonies of Victorella pavida. The third item, the “Kragenfalten” or collar folds, are subject to a high degree of individual variation. There are variations pro- duced in the contraction of individual zoids such as differences produced by various fixatives and preservatives. These variations are much too great to stand as a reliable criterion. 25 BuLiLetin, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 230HU PLATE 6 26 BULLETIN, So. CatirF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 The conclusions of Braem (1951) in view of the above discus- sion seem to be extreme. In my opinion, Victorella pavida Kent, 1870 and Tanganella Miilleri Braem, 1951 are to be considered as identical. In a paper on post-larval development with relation to the classification of the ctenostome Bryozoa, Soule (1954) noted that the specimens of Victorella then available were inadequate for the study of the developing polypide. However, with an abund- ance of new material from the Salton Sea collection, it is now possible to follow the post-larval development of the polypide within the forming zoids. As a result of the study, certain modifi- cations in the ctenostome classification are in order. The scheme of classification as developed in the earlier paper is based upon the sequence of appearance of the three major muscle groups; parietal, retractor, and the apertural, as the polypide is being formed. It was noted in the 1954 paper that there are two basic systems of procedure in the sequence of appearance of the major muscle groups. This divides the ctenostomes into two divisions, the incrusting group called Carnosa, and the stolonate group known as Stolonifera. In the 1954 classification, the genus Victorella was included in the first division, Carnosa, under the family Victorellidae, along with the genera Paludicella, Pottsiella, and Arachnoidia. This must be changed. Upon the examination of Salton Sea specimens, Victorella pavida, it was found that the apertural muscle group appeared first as the polypide developed (pl. 6, fig. 3). The second muscle group to makes its appearance is the retractor, (pl. 6, fig. 4), and a little later the parietal group ap- peared (pl. 6, fig. 5). This sequence of muscle group develop- DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES ON PLATE 6 Fig. 1. Nolella blakei. A portion of a colony illustrating the morphology of three mature zoids. Fig. 2. Victorella pavida. A portion of a colony showing the morphology of four mature primary zoids. Note the variation in length. One primary zoid has given rise to a secondary zoid. Fig. 3. Victorella pavida. Early developing zoid. Note incipient polypide. With regard to the musculature, only the apertural muscle group is in evidence. Fig. 4. Further development of a zoid. Tentacles forming. Polyide assum- ing. characteristic morphology. The second muscle group to make its appearance, the retractor, has been added. Fig. 5. A developing zoid in a yet later stage, exhibiting the addition of third and last muscle group to appear, the parietal. 27 Butietin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 ment is typical of the sequence that occurs in the division Stolon- ifera, obviously ruling out Victorella as a member of the division Carnosa. The classification is modified as follows. BRYOZOA Ehrenberg, 1831 Suborder CTENOSTOMATA Busk, 1852 Division I. CARNOSA Gray, 1841 Family ALCYONIDIIDAE Johnston, 1849 Alcyonidium Lamouroux, 1813 Benedenipora Pergens, 1888 Lobiancopora Pergens, 1888 Family FLUSTRELLIDAE Hincks, 1880 Flustrella Gray, 1848 Elizerina Lamouroux, 1816 Family PHERUSELLIDAE Soule, 1953 Pherusella Soule, 1951 Family CLAVOPORIDAE Soule, 1953 Clavopora Busk, 1874 Family PALUDICELLIDAE Allman, 1844 Paludicella Gervais, 1836 Pottsiella Kraepelin, 1887 Family ARACHNIDIIDAE Hincks, 1880 Arachnidium Hincks, 1877 Arachnoidia Moore, 1903 Platypolyzoon Annandale, 1912 Sundanella Braem, 1939 Anguinella van Beneden, 1845 P Hislopia Carter, 1858 Division Il. STOLONIFERA EHLERS, 1876 Group A. Vesicularina Waters, 1910 Family NOLELLIDAE Harmer, 1915 Nolella Gosse, 1855 Victorella Kent, 1870 Family VESICULARIIDAE Johnston, 1838 Vesicularia Thompson, 1830 Amathia Lamouroux, 1812 Bowerbankia Farre, 1837 Zoobotryon Ehrenberg, 1831 PAvenella Dalyell, 1847 PCryptopolyzoon Dendy, 1889 Group B. Valkerina Silén, 1942 28 BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 Family WALKERIIDAE Bassler, 1953 Walkeria Fleming, 1823 Aeverrillia Marcus, 1941 Monastesia Jullien, 1888 Family MIMOSELLIDAE Hincks, 1851 Mimosella Hincks, 1851 Hypophorella Ehlers, 1876 Family BUSKIIDAE Hincks. 1880 Buskia Alder, 1857 Family TRITICELLIDAE G.O. Sars, 1874 Triticella Dalyell, 1848 Farrella Ehrenberg, 1834 Group C. Terebriporina Soule, 1953 Family TEREBRIPORIDAE dOrbigny, 1847 Terebripora d’Orbigny, 1847 Spathipora Fischer, 1866 Family IMMERGENTIIDAE Silén, 1946 Immergentia Silén, 1946 Family PENETRANTIIDAE Silen, 1946 Penetrantia Silén, 1946 LITERATURE CITED Annandale, N. 1907. 1908. 1911. OE 1915. The fauna of brackish ponds at Port Canning, lower Bengal., part 6, Observations on the Polyzoa, with further notes on the ponds. Records of the Indian Museum, vol. 1, pt. 3, 1907, pp. 197-205, 4 text figs. The fauna of brackish ponds at Port Canning, lower Bengal., part 7, Further observations on the Polyzoa, with a description of a new genus of Entoprocta., Records of the Indian Museum, vol. 2, pt. 1, 1908, pp. 11-19, 7 text figs. Fauna of British India., Freshwater sponges, hydroids and Polyzoa., pp. 1-251, 49 text figs. Systematic notes on the ctenostomatous Polyzoa of freshwater., Records of the Indian Museum, vol. 6, pt. 4. 1911, pp. 193-201, pl. 13, figs. 1-13. Fauna of Chilka Lake. The Polyzoa of the lake and of brackish water in the Gangetic delta., Memoirs of the Indian Museum, vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 121-133, 3 text figs. Bousfield, E. C. 1885. The Victorella pavida of Saville Kent., Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 5th series, vol. 16, no. 96, pp. 401-407, pl. 7, figs. 1-3. 29 BuLLeTIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 1, 1957 Braém, F. 1951. Uber Victorella und einige ihrer nachsten Verwandten, sowie iber die Bryozoenfauna des Ryck bei Greifswald., Zoologica original Abhandlungen aus dem Gesamtgebiete der Zoologie, 37 Band, 3 Lieferung, Heft 102, pp. 1-59, pls. 1-12, 1 text fig. Stuttgart. Brattstrom, Hans 1954. Notes on Victorella pavida Kent., Lunds Universitets Arsskrift, N.F., avd. 2, bd. 50, nr. 9, pp. 3-29, 4 text figs. Hincks, Thomas 1880. .50) W975 ~=20:50.' 24.00 “rs 2 SeOm a -OO)sla:25 “TS:508 22°25 24515 28.15 “pete et Gees OO wlan 2 On 25.75) (29.00% 33:50 6 eerie eee LOO) 820225) 924-500 29.250 33.25. 138.2) Bee cts eee NiOOmm22.05, # 21-50) 32.15) 37.00), 43.00 Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1 Y2c each. California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state. 32pp. | ee copies ........ $5.00 $ 7.00 $10.25 $12.50 $14.25 $16.25 $19.25 $21.00 — 100 26:25 31.50 36.75 42.00 47.25 Classes of Membership in the Southern California Academy of Sciences Membership is open to all scientists of all branches and to any person interested in the advancement of science. LIMITED ANNUAL MEMBERS: privileged to vote and attend 2 eee fayaich a a ee ee annually $3.00 UNLIMITED ANNUAL MEMBERS: also receive all publications..$5.00 LIMITED JUNIOR MEMBERS: privileged to attend all meetings..$2.00 UNLIMITED JUNIOR MEMBERS: also receive all SSS TORS aera oA ee Oe ae mn annually $3.00 LIFE MEMBERS: have all privileges and receive all publications Set Fae Ba De paella eee ee ese a ee $100.00 FELLOWS: elected by the Board of Directors for meritorious services. —_ 2) S *486) | EOE UETIN OF THE Southern California Academy of Sciences LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA VoL. 56 May-Aucust, 1957 Part 2 CONTENTS Pliocene and Pleistocene Fossils from the Southern Portion of the Gulf of California. Leo George Hertlein....................-.-- 57 Micrarionta (Mollusca: Pulmonata) from Northwestern Sonora, Mexico. Robert J. Drake.............---.-...-..1.0------0-0000--00- 76 A New Genus of Haustoriid Amphipod from the Northeastern Pacific Ocean and the Southern Distribution of Urothoe varvarim: Gurjanova. J. Laurens Barnard............-....--------------- 81 Descriptions and Records of Some Cerambycidae from ar @rinitorma. 5. Gorton Lansley. .s.-2..--22--c2-o--x0dooeedeeeecoee-es 85 Life Histories of Two Southern Arizona Moths of the Genus Memeneta long Adams Comstock....-:.....-2--<-+-c0-s0se----soeo--- 88 | Scientific Notes: Sherwin F. Wood. John A. Comstock. SR ftE 1D SL GS ea ee a Een SA i eal PN 97 Academy Proceedings Issued August 31, 1957 Southern California Academy of Sciences OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS Da. SEUEDEGARDE JHOWARD.. 3h. 0 vist rlactes be crea . eae ite «epegeees President Dry baen S).Troxatc0 kh... 8. ee First Vice-President Dr. THEODORE DOWNDG...........:cc0seseeesceeeseseseeceeesessseeseeeeene SECON Vice-President Miss (GRETGHEN SIBLEY 20.22.22. s-20cbsnseseevecks cceae cedeease Nanaia dees Secretary Min: ELOvDSM.. MAR TING o-oo dc cose ones nr cance at ee Assistant Secretary Dr: W. IDwiGhr PrencEe........00c2205.)ocdeneoscae osdoceeceys te eae eee ee Treasurer Dr. JOHN A. COMSTOCK....-2.2c:.000tsc-- ce) cq) QO: ®D BS a2) O 3) re foe o ES) eS Le {4 tj Plate Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences VOLUME 56 - - - - - Parr 2, 1957 PLIOCENE AND PLEISTOCENE FOSSILS FROM THE SOUTHERN PORTION OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA By Lro Grorce HERTLEIN INTRODUCTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This paper is based upon collections of invertebrate fossils, chiefly mollusks, from the east coast of the southern portion of Lower California, Mexico, and from three of the islands in the Gulf of California. These fossils, of Pliocene and Pleistocene age, were assembled on two expeditions, one by Dr. Edwin H. Ham- mond, Department of Geography, University of California (now at the University of Wisconsin), in 1949, the other by Dr. G. D. Hanna, Department of Geology, and J. R. Slevin, Department of Herpetology, California Academy of Sciences, in 1953. Numerous species of Pliocene and Pleistocene fossils have been cited from this general region by Hertlein (1925; 1931), Hanna & Hertlein (1927), Beal (1948), Vokes (1948; 1949; 1955), and Durham (1950). A considerable number of the species repre- sented in the present collections, especially Pleistocene ones, have not been recorded heretofore from this region as fossils. It there- fore appears desirable to list the species from the various locali- ties, their approximate age, together with notes on a few forms of special interest. One such species of special interest is a fossil abalone whose occurrence in late Pleistocene strata in the Gulf of California is recorded here for the first time. The present study indicates that the species represented in the collections apparently lived under the same ecologic and climatic conditions as those prevailing today in the adjacent waters of the Gulf of California. This is in complete agreement with the con- clusions of Hertlein and Emerson (1956) resulting from their study of Pleistocene invertebrate fossils from the Puerto Penasco - in northwestern Sonora near the head of the Gulf of Cali- ornia. The author wishes to express his appreciation to those persons who aided in various ways during the preparation of this paper. Acknowledgments are due Dr. E. T. Hammond, Department of Geography, University of Wisconsin, for collections of fossils and 57 BuLLetin, So, Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 information relating thereto, which he assembled in Lower Cali- fornia; to Dr. G. D. Hanna, Curator of the Department of Geol- ogy, and to Mr. J. R. Slevin, Curator of the Department of Her- petology, California Academy of Sciences, for information con- cerning the collections obtained during their expedition to the Gulf of California on the research Moror Vesset, Orca; to Dr. J. W. Durham, Department of Paleontology, University of Cali- fornia, for the identification of the species of corals in the collec- tion. The photographs used for illustrations on the plate were made by Mr. Charles Crompton, California Academy of Sciences. COLLECTIONS FROM REGION ABOUT LA PAZ Collections from five localities in the general region about La Paz, Lower California, were assembled by Dr. Hammond (1954) during 1949 in connection with his studies of the geomorphology of the Cape region. One additional lot [Loc. 32943 (C.A.S.)] may be of very late Pleistocene age but probably is from | kitchen middens. These fossils were sent to the author for iden- | tification by Dr. Hammond, who generously presented them to the California Academy of Sciences. The localities from which the fossils came, the species represented, and remarks concern- | ing their age follow. PLIOCENE Locality 32946 (C.A.S.). In limy sandstone in side of calera — cut in Tertiary sediments approximately 2 miles southeast of La — Rivera and about 1 mile from the coast of Lower California; E. H. Hammond, collector, 1949. Arca sp. Ostrea heermanni Conrad Ostrea cf. O. palmula Carpenter b Pecten cf. P. modulatus Hertlein Turritella cf. T. imperialis Hanna The specimens in this lot are not well preserved. Comparable species occur in strata at other localities in this region which — Durham and Vokes considered to be of early Pliocene age. i Locality 32948 (C.A.S.). Exposure of fossiliferous shaly con-— glomerate in Arroyo wall 4% miles northeast of Sierra de la Trini- — dad, 9 miles southeast of Santiago, Lower California; E. H. Ham- 4 mond, collector, 1949. Ostrea heermanni Conrad A single incomplete valve appears to be referable to Ostrea heermanni. This species was originally described from Imperial — County, California, in strata believed to be of early or middle Pliocene age. It also has been recorded from beds of Pliocenel age north of Santa Rosalia and from Arroyo Santiago, opposite the town of Santiago, Lower California. 1 5§ ButLetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 PLEISTOCENE Locality 32942 (C.A.S.). In marine terrace sediments 28 to 30 feet above high tide. Obtained from low sea cliff on the south- west shores of Palmas Bay, 2 mile west of the school at Buena Vista, Lower California; E. H. Hammond, collector, 1949. Locality 32944 (C.A.S.). In marine terrace cover about 30 feet above high tide. Obtained from face of sea cliff about 4 mile east of mouth of Arroyo del Coyote, 2% miles southeast of Punta Coyote, 11 miles northeast of La Paz, Lower California; E. H. Hammond, collector, 1949. Locality 32945 (C.A.S.). From side of stream-cut in alluvial terrace about 20 feet above sea level. Obtained about 200 feet from shore at extreme southwest corner of Bahia de la Ventana, 300 yards south of Rancho Miramar, Lower California; E. H. Hammond, collector, 1949. Loc. Loc. Loc 32942 32944 32945 PELECYPODA Arca (Arca) pacifica Sowerby......-.........222+....----2000--2-200000-002-- x Arca (Larkinia) multicostata Sowerby....................-...--.------- 7 x BoiulomruisconGmelnes= 8 x Cardium (Trachycardium) consors Sowerby...................----- x x Chama cf. C. frondosa mexicana Carpenter.................-...----- x Chione (Chione) californiensis Broderip.....................-------- x x x Diwaricella lucasana Dall & Ochsnet...................22222---2222------- x Migeumenms giganteus ReCVe.....-2.-.---cc-.<.c.2--2ce-deeceeeseeeecoe-0-s x x x Glycymeris' cf. G>-maculatus Broderip................-.....22.--------- x Megapitaria squalida Sowerby.............-..-....-..-22200-----2--0------ x x | Ostrea angelica Rochebrune..........................0000022--222200-000----- Xx (AGEL — SD oczeccenckiney ct ae ee OO a Ne x Pecten (Nodipecten) subnodosus intermedius Conrad.......... x | Inecten (Becten) vogdesi Arnold...........2222-...22-2-0eceeee-0eseeee eee x x | Pinctada TILOZALONLCG milan eyes ee eee x x erucmcriaCould a x GASTROPODA _Architectonica nobilis Bolten (A. granulata Lam.)................ x | Cerithium maculosum Kienev..............-.-.----+----+0+2+---0-0+0-00000-0+- x Malo ermata Finds... nee c cece cece cece cece eee eeseeeees x _Hanetia (Solenosteira) pallida Broderip & Sowerby.............. x ‘Harpa GICMULCMESNV ANSON See eee ee ee x slgpponix grayanus Menke....................---..--.2--0----00---000+-e-00e-- x SG PROTCSATE STO) ae (=) ane ne ee x "on siatcatio 3X6 Fi eee ene ne ere x cf. ella dana See x x EEIICCSEAUOCT) N/AleMCINMNES. ...-5:-<--.-<-..--0e-2---s-¢-- -+-2=-sseeeceeeae-0t= x MMII OT SOW CLD naan ctceccceeeccneeeeenneeee x BR ISMB CTO CINOT, (SOW EL DY = 222-2. ca ---cec ccc cen ane scneec se neato cee x Strombus granulatus Swainson...............-.-.---2-0+0<0-0---0----------- x BEF COTTA AM Cy x SMUT IIICLILOSUS” WV OO... 2. --0--22ac2-o0-.ce0-eseeeceecueceeceeoteneceeeeeees x x x RMBMETOMCOCSHUS BIOGELID.....---<.-2----iec00-cnecescceccecereese-ecoeeeteds x x ECHINOIDEA Encope OO rereceentectenee ae EC aE EEE AEE SABE HE CEC EEO EARS EBS O EEE TATE R ERE oa eER SoBe x Butuetin, So. Cauie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 The species represented in this list are all living in the Gulf of California at the present time. All but four of these also are rep- resented in collections from the Pleistocene at Santa Inez Bay or at Carmen Island. These fossils are of Pleistocene age. Locality 32943 (C.A.S.). Shells from ground on top of 200 foot hill immediately behind school at Buena Vista, Lower Cali- fornia. Shells probably on Indian occupation site and not in place; E. H. Hammond, collector, 1949. Glycymeris giganteus Reeve Conus brunneus Wood Oliva cf. O. spicata Bolten Turbo fluctuosus Wood (operculum ) Vertebra of fish These species of mollusks all occur living in the Gulf of Cali- fornia. COLLECTIONS FROM SANTA INEZ BAY AND FROM ISLANDS IN THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA Collections of fossils from seven localities were assembled by G. D. Hanna and J. R. Slevin between March 28 and April 9, 1953, while members of an expedition to the Gulf of California on the research Moror VEssEL Orca, owned by J. E. Sefton of San Diego, California. The localities, species represented, and _ re- marks concerning their age follow. PLIOCENE Locality 34033 (C.A.S.). El Mostrador (also known as Ruffo’s Ranch ), west side of Ceralbo Island, Gulf of California. Fossils in hard rock on the north side of the canyon. The dip is about 20° eastward; G. D. Hanna, collector, March 22, 1953. Pecten (Nodipecten) subnodosus intermedius Conrad Pecten (Plagioctenium) abietis E. K. Jordan & Hertlein Spondylus princeps Broderip Balanus sp. The presence of Pecten abietis at this locality indicates that the strata in which it was embedded are of Pliocene age. Locality 34034 (C.A.S.). Santa Inez Bay, east coast of Lower — California. From hard brownish, limy, sandy strata in low hills — back of the bay which, toward the beach, are overlain by Pleis- tocene terrace material; G. D. Hanna and J. R. Slevin, collectors, April 9, 1953. PELECYPODA Ostrea cf. O. angelica Rochebrune Ostrea cf. O. heermanni Conrad Pecten (Chlamys) cortezianus Durham Pecten (Euvola) keepi Arnold 60 BuLLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Pecten (Pecten) carrizoensis Arnold Pecten (Plagioctenium) circularis calli Hertlein Pecten (Plagioctenium) mendenhalli Arnold ECHINOIDEA Agassizia scrobiculata Valenciennes All except one of the species of pelecypods represented at this locality are extinct forms, known to occur only in strata of Pliocene age. The present assemblage appears to be of approxi- mately the same age as that of the Imperial formation in Imperial County, California, which recent workers have considered to be of early Pliocene age. Locality 34035 (C.A.S.). South Anchorage, San Esteban Island, Gulf of California; G. D. Hanna, collector, April 2, 1953. Pecten (Plagioctenium) circularis Sowerby (juv.) The preservation of the specimens as well as the field observa- tions concerning the enclosing strata suggest Pliocene age for the fossils from this locality. PLEISTOCENE Fossils of Pleistocene age were collected at four localities by Dr. G. D. Hanna and J. R. Slevin while on the expedition to the Gulf of California on the Orca. These were from Santa Inez Bay and Point El Pulpito, Lower California, and from Carmen Island in the Gulf of California. The total number of species and sub- species from the four collecting stations is 129, representing - Pelecypoda (66), Scaphopoda (1), Gastropoda (56), Echinoidea _ (4), Anthozoa (2). The class Cirripedia is represented by one un- identified species of barnacle (Balanus). The largest number of species and subspecies (86) taken at one station was at Santa Inez Bay, a locality which has attracted the attention of other collectors. An expedition from Stanford Univer- _ sity under the direction of W. W. Valentine and L. W. Wiedey in 1928 assembled collections at Santa Inez Bay and at Point E] _Pulpito, but no general report on those collections was published. William Beebe (*) visited Santa Inez Bay while on an expedition to the Gulf of California in 1936 on Templeton Crocker’s yacht, Zaca, and remarked on the abundance of fossils occurring in the cliffs at that locality. A paper by Durham (1950; see also Ander- son, 1950) contains the results of a study of fossils collected in the Gulf of California during a cruise on the E. W. Scripps during 1940, also a discussion of the geologic features noticed at various localities. Species were cited by Durham from some of the same (or nearby) localities mentioned in the present paper. (*) Beebe, W. Zaca Venture (under the auspices of the New York Zoolo- gical Society. Harcourt, Brace & Co.: New York), pp. 109-110, 1938. 61 Buiterin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 The localities and list of species collected by Hanna and Slevin follow. Locality 34036 (C.A.S.). Point El Pulpito, east coast of Lower California. Top layer of fossiliferous beds exposed in arroyo about 1 mile northwest of the coast; G. D. Hanna and J. R. Slevin, col- lectors, March 31, 1953. Locality 34163 (C.A.S.). Santa Inez Bay, east coast of Lower California. Pleistocene elevated beach extending inland about % mile. The section is about 6 (or more) feet in thickness, overlying brown, limy beds of Pliocene age; G. D, Hanna and J. R. Slevin, collectors, April 9, 1953. Locality 34164 (C.A.S.). Point El Pulpito, east coast of Lower California. Fossils from strata lower in the section than those mentioned for Locality 34036 (C.A.S.); G. D. Hanna and J. R. Slevin, collectors, March 31, 1953. Locality 34165 (C.A.S.). Coral reef exposed at the south end of Puerto Ballandra, Carmen Island, Gulf of California. This oc- curs from sea level to an elevation of about 50 feet; G. D. Hanna and J. R. Slevin, collectors, March 28, 1953. Sta. El Pulpito Carmen !d. Inez Uppermost Lower 34163 34036 34164 34165 PELECYPODA Anatina (Raéta) undulata Gould........................ x Anomalocardia subimbricata tumens Verrill.... x x x x Antigona (Periglypta) multicostata Sowerby.... x x Apolymetis cognata Pilsbry & Vanatta__.......... x Arca (Acar) gradata Broderip & Sowerby.........- x Arca (Arca) pacifica Sowerby................------------ x Arca (Barbatia) reeveana dOrbigny................ x Arca (Larkinia) multicostata Sowerby..........-...- x x Botula fusca Gmelin (Mytilus cinnamomenus Chemnitz) aGiracmen ty) sss ee x CarditatafininiG Ban dams ee x Cardita megastropha Gray... .2-2.- 22 sceete eee x Cardium (Americardium) biangulatum Broderip cc (Sowerbys- eee x x x Cardium (Laevicardium) elatum Sowerby........ x x Cardium (Laevicardium) elenense apicinum G@arpenter wees. eet sere te ens ero mes ane x Cardium (Mexicardium) procerum Sowerby... x Cardium (Trachycardium) consors Sowerby... x x Ghamay frondosa’ Brodenp = x Chama frondosa mexicana Carpenter..............-- x Chama squamuligera Pilsbry & Lowe............---- x x Chione (Chione) californiensis Broderip.......-.... x Chione (Chione) undatella Sowerby.........---....- x x Chione (Chionopsis) gnidia Broderip 6 {SOW ELD yz eee es ee x Codakia distinguenda Tryon................---.--.------- x me BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Sta. El Pulpito Carmen Id. Inez Uppermost Lower 34163 34036 34164 34165 Corbula bicarinata Sowerby............------------------ x x Crassatellites (Hybolophus) digueti Lamy........ x Gicnasmexicana Walle x x Diplodonta inezana Hertlein SCOOT ee Xx Diplodonta subquadrata Carpenter.................- x Diwaricella lueasana Dall & Ochsner.................- xX x Dosinia (Dosinia) ponderosa Gray................--.- x x x Glycymeris (Axinactis) delessertii Reeve..........-- x Glycymeris giganteus Reeve............--..s------------- x x x Glycymeris maculatus Broderip................-...------ x Glycymeris multicostatus Sowerby.............------- x x Isognomon janus Carpentet................-...--.--------- x Lithophaga attenuata Deshayes................-------- x Lucina (Cawvalinga) lampra Dall..................-..... x Lucina (Cavalinga) cf. L. (C.) lingualis (Gani Ute tae ee Slee ce hc ccuse coved ode sox d ies Xx Xx Mactra nasuta Gould.....................---2200-2-22--------- x Megapitaria aurantiaca Sowerby............---------- X Megapitaria squalida Sowerby.......................--- x 5K x Moalihas xantusi Walia. x Milodiolusvcanax CONTAC. <2. -<225s2.2--2--seeecceeess aes x Ostrea angelica Rochebrune....................---..----- x x Ostrea cf. O. corteziana Hertlein...................... x SiCHMmSH CT mallee x Ostrea megodon Hanley..................2.-.------------- X Pecten (Nodipecten) subnodosus MADEC TINCT SHAS ONITAG 5 oes oo nc aee x x Pecten (Pecten) vogdesi Arnold........................ x 5K Pecten (Plagioctenium) circularis Sowerby...... x x x Pinctada mazatlanica Hanley.........................-.- x x Plicatula cf. P. inezana Durham..............-.......-- x Pseudochama saavedrai Hertlein & Streng...... Xe Semele corrugata californica A. Adams...........- x Semele flavescens Gould..............:...-2-----20------0-- x x Septifer zeteki Hertlein & Strong.................-.... x Bulccardia eburnea Conrad................----.--.-20----- x Spondylus princeps Broderip................---.-------- x x Tagelus (Tagelus) affinis C. B. Adams.............- x Tagelus (Tagelus) californianus Conrad............ Xx Tellina (Eurytellina) simulans i, 183, JA Gla rat 2 Se ee x Tellina (Merisca) meropsis Dall.......................- x Tellina (Scrobiculina) ochracea Carpenter........ x _ Tellina (Tellinella) cumingii Hanley................ x GLC, Gbigaee {Choa 2c |e eee ee x Miwela byronensis, Gray.........--.--20.---2200---20----= x x SCAPHOPODA Dentalium inversum Deshayes............-.....-------- x GAsTROPODA _ Acanthina muricata tuberculata Gray PESOS C TDN ee sl Re x x Maemaca atrata Carpentet................-.-.---.-------.-- x Architectonica nobilis Bolten....................-------- x ea | | 63 | | BuLLeTin, So. CAtirF. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 34163 34036 34164 34165 Inez Uppermost Lower Sta. El Pulpito Carmen Id. Bulla punctulata A. Adams..................-------------- x Cassis (Levenia) coarctata Sowerby Xx Cerithidea cf. C. mazatlanica albonodosa Warpenten tyes cece ostuee econ soe teen ee eae ee x x Cerithium maculosum Kienet.....................------- x x x Cerithium uncinatum Gmelin.... x Glavarcemmatas Ends ee x x x x GOnISHD TINGE DS lol a CUSseaee ease eee ee x Conus purpurascens Broderip................--..-------- x x x Gonusiregularts, Sowerbye i cccet eee eee x x Conus scalaris Valenciennes................-------------- x GOnUISEXUMUN eS) Graves x x Crucibulum scutellatum Wood............-.....------ x x Crucibulum umbrellum Deshayes..... x Gupracajalbiugiunosay Gray x Cupracamannetiaca alle ene x Diodoraaltal CaBe Adams =) ee x Diodora inaequalis Sowerby.......................-.--- x Enaeta cumingii pedersenii Verrill....... mis, SN x Rusinus ambustas) Goulds. x Haliotis cf. H. fulgens Philippi..........2.77.-_..-. x Hanetia (Solenosteira) pallida BLOC ERD ECcES OWL Dy setae ee net ee x x cf. Heliacus robertsae Durham......................------ x Hipponix antiquata serrata Carpenter.............. x x Knefastia funiculata Valenciennes x x x Liocerithium sculptum Sowerby....... sss aX: Mitra sulcata funiculata Reeve.................-.......- x Murex erythrostomus Swainson.................--.---- x Muricopsis squamulatus Carpenter..................- x x Nassarius tiarulus Kiener................ ee ela Tee ee x INGtCOaS pees ie ee le CES oe ae ale eed x Oliva incrassata Solander:.__.. x OlivagspicatasBolten ee eee x x x x Oliva cf. O. spicata polpasta Duclos x OlicellagdamagMaweres = a eee ee x x x x Olivella gracilis Broderip & Sowerby................ x Polinices bifasciatus Gray.............- ioe hela Be x cf, Polinices reclusianus Deshayes..................------ x Polinices uber Valenciennes.....................----..--- x PUTCNes fUSCOLME SOW CLD YS x x x Strombus galeatus Swainson................------------ x x Strombus gracilior Sowerby............--...------..> setter < x Strombus granulatus Swainson...............---......-- x x he culae nani and) al eeeeeere eee enna ae eee: x x Terebra strigata Sowerby............----..---------------- x lene brasvanegataa Gray en ee x 5 x Thais haemastoma biserialis Blainville.... x ETiOia ssolandry | Gray ee ea ee cf. x cf. Turbo: fluctuosus Wood... x x x Turbo squamiger Reeve.......---.-------2--000---------- Xx x Turricula maculosa Sowerby.....-.-..-.------------------ x Turritella gonostoma Valenciennes aX x x x ihurritelia: nodulosa King ee x Wasumucaestusa Brodenp x x Vermetus cf. V. centiquadrus Valenciennes...... x 64 BuLLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 34163 34036 34164 34165 Inez Uppermost Lower Sta. El Pupito Carmen Id. ECHINOIDEA @lupeaster, speciosus Verrill.___..........22.t2.2-.2:. x x Emcope californica Verrill:.......-...-..2---..2-.-- x x Encope grandis inezana Durham...................... x 5% Eucidaris thouarsii Valenciennes (spines).......- x x ANTHOZOA Porites californica Verrill........................-.2.------- x x x Porites nodulosa Verrill................2222.....------------- x CrmriIPEDIA BAGROS Spcte ccc oe ee ee ee en x x Only one species and one subspecies in the preceding list are, so far as known, extinct. These are: an echinoid, Encope grandis inezana Durham at Santa Inez Bay, and a gastropod, Heliacus? robertsae Durham, at Carmen Island. One pelecypod, Plicatula cf. P. inezana Durham, from Carmen Island, is represented in the Recent fauna of the Gulf by an identical or a very similar form. All the remainder of the species except one, Haliotis cf. H. fulgens Philippi, are now living in adjacent waters or in other portions of the Gulf of California and that species of abalone is known to occur at Cape San Lucas. The very few extinct forms, 1 of 86 at Santa Inez Bay and 1, or possibly 2, of 54 at Carmen Island, are indicative of late Pleisto- cene age for these assemblages. This age is substantiated by their geologic occurrence in low cliffs of loosely consolidated sediments and as terrace deposits adjacent to the shore. The species rep- resented as well as the sediment in which they occur suggest that they were deposited in warm, shallow water under conditions similar to those adjacent to the localities at the present time. A short list of species and subspecies cited by Vokes (1948; 1949; 1955) from the Santa Rosalia formation of Pleistocene age, in the Santa Rosalia area, contains among others only five or six forms not represented in the present list. At least 75 species in the present list also occur in the Pleistocene deposits at Magda- lena Bay , Lower California. NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF SPECIES Class Pelecypoda Ostrea fisheri Dall Ostrea jacobaea Rochebrune, Bull. Mus. Nat. Hist. Nat. Paris, Vol. 1, No. 6, p. 241, 1895. “Iles de la Baie de la Paz.” — Con- treras, An. Inst. de Biologia, Vol. 3, No. 8, p. 210, figs. 22, 23, 1932. Islands of San José and Espiritu Santo, Gulf of California. Not Ostrea jacobaea Linnaeus, 1758. Ostrea fisheri Dall, Nautilus, Vol. 28, No. 1, May, 1914. “Gulf of California.” New name for Ostrea jacobaea Rochebrune, not 65 BuLLeTIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 QO. jacobaea Linnaeus. — Lamy, Journ. de Conchyl., Vol. 73, No. 4, p. 239, 1930. Gulf of California. — Hertlein & Strong, Zoologica, New York Zool. Soc., Vol. 31, Pt. 2, p. 54, 1946. Gulf of California to the Galapagos Islands. Ostrea fischeri Dall, Durham, Geol. Soc. America, Mem, 43, Pt. 2, p. 59, pl. 6, figs. 1, 4, 1950. Various localities in the Gulf of California from early Pliocene to Recent. Type Locality: Of Ostrea jacobaea, Islands in the Bay of La Paz. Of O. fisheri, Gulf of California. Range: Pliocene to Recent. Recent from San Luis Gonzaga Bay, Gulf of California, to Atacames, Ecuador, and the Galapagos Islands. Several valves of this species are present in the collection from the coral reef in Ballandra Bay, Carmen Island. The largest speci- men measures approximately 200 mm. in length from beak to base. This species has been cited in literature dealing with oysters in the Gulf of California under various names, including Ostrea jacobaea Rochebrune, O. sinensis Gmelin, O. sinensis var. cum- ingiana Dunker, O. turbinata Lamarck, and O. hyotis Linnaeus, as well as O. fisheri Dall. Apparently Ranson’, who has devoted considerable time to the study of Recent oysters, considers this species to be identical with the western Pacific Ostrea hyotis Linnaeus. However, until this identity is definitely established, it appears best to retain the name O. fisheri for the eastern Pacific form. The resemblance of Ostrea fisheri to the Floridan O. thomasi McLean was pointed out by Hertlein & Strong. According to Abbott’, that Floridan species also is considered by Ranson to be identical with O. hyotis. The description and illustration of Ostraea solida Sowerby lead me to think that this may be an earlier name for the shell named O. fisheri by Dall. (See Conch. Icon., Vol. 18, Ostraea, sp. 28, pl. 14, fig. 28, February, 1871. “Hab. Gulf of Panama.” ). Spondylus princeps Broderip Spondylus princeps Broderip, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, May 17, 1833, p. 4. “Hab. ad Insulam Platam Columbiae Occidentalis.” “Found attached to coral rocks at the depth of seventeen fath- oms.” — Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. 9, Spondylus, sp. 9, pl. 2, fig. 9, 1856. Original locality cited. — Hertlein & Strong, Zoologica, New York Zool. Soc., Vol. 31, Pt. 2, p. 62, 1946. Spondylus pictorum Schreiber, Abbott, Amer. Seashells (Van Nostrand Co.: New York), p. 370, pl. 36, fig. a (four figs. ), 1954. Gulf of California to Panama. Type Locality: Island of La Plata, Ecuador, in 17 fathoms, at- tached to coral rocks. 66 = BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Range: Pliocene to Recent. Recent, from Scammon Lagoon, Lower California, to Punta Colorado near Guaymas in the Gulf of California and south to Negritos, Peru. Some of the earlier names applied to this species were discussed by Hertlein & Strong in 1946. Abbott recently cited it under the name of Spondylus pictorum Schreiber*. This appropriate name also was applied to this beautiful species by Chemnitz. Unfor- tunately, there is doubt as to whether or not the work by Schreiber is nomenclatcrially valid, as pointed out by Cox*. The specific name applied to the species by Broderip is applicable at least until there is definite agreement concerning the validity of the names applied by Schreiber. Durham (1950, p. 68, pl. 15, fig. 3) recently referred certain fossil specimens from the Pliocene of Carmen Island and Pleisto- cene of Coronado Island in the Gulf of California to Spondylus victoriae Sowerby. There is variation in a series of specimens of S. princeps, and it appears that the fossils illustrated by Durham fall within the variation of this species. In any case, the name Spondylus victoriae does not seem applicable to a west American species because E. A. Smith®, who presumably had available Sowerby’s type specimen, stated: “The description given of this species by Sowerby is very insufficient, and his locality, ‘Gulf of California’, incorrect.” Smith cited it from New Caledonia and from Flinders and Clairmont Islands, northeast Australia, as well as from Port Molle and Port Nicol, Australia. Fulton® also cited it from the two island localities. The great variability shown by a series of specimens of Spon- dylus, especially if imperfectly preserved fossils, was mentioned by Palmer’, who pointed out that Dall placed more than 20 speci- fically named forms in the synonymy of the Recent east American Spondylus americanus Hermann. *See Min. Conch. Club South. Calif., No. 99, p. 9, April, 1950. See also Ranson, Bull. Mus. Nat. d’Hist. Nat. (Paris), Ser. 2, Tom. 13, No. 2, pp. 91-92, February, 1941. | “Abbott, R. T. American Seashells (D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc.: New York), p. 374, 1954. | *Spondylus pictorum Schreiber, Versuch einer vollstaendigen Conchy- _lienkenntnis, nach Linnes System, Th. 2, p. 158, 1793. References to Mar- tini, Conchyl. Cab., Bd. 7, Tab. 69, figs. E, F.; Knorr, Vergniig., Th. 6, jad. 12> fie. 3: Schroter, Einleit Conchyl., Th. 3, p. 218, nr. 16) Tab. 8) tiigs. 14, 15. *Cox, L. R., Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, Vol. 18, Pt. 5, pp. 251-254, 1929. __ *Smith, E. A. Report Zool. Coll. Indo-Pacific Ocean during voy. “Alert”, | 1881-2, Moll., p. 114, 1884. (Publ. Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist.). Pmalitone tes jour. Conch. Vol.14, No, 11, p, 385, 1915. _ ‘Palmer, kK. V. W. Neocene Spondyli from the Southern United States and Tropical America. Palaeontogr. Americana, Vol. 2, No. 8, pp. 145(1)- (162(18), pls. 16(1)-18(3), October 29, 1938. (See especially p. 150(6).) | 67 | | BuLLetin, So, Cauire. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Apolymetis cognata Pilsbry & Vanatta Ciatreela cognata Pilsbry & Vanatta, Proc, Washington Acad. Sci., Vol. 4, p. 556, pl. 35, fig. 5, September 30, 1902. “From Tagus Cove, Albemarle.” Galapagos Islands, Apolymetis excavata Sowerby, Soot-Ryen, Nyt Mag. Naturvid., Bd. 70 (Meddel. Zool. Mus. Oslo, No. 27), p. 321, pl. 2, fig. 10, April 30, 1932. Floreana (Sancta Maria) [Charles] Island, Gala- pagos Islands, Recent. Not Tellina excavata Sowerby, 1867. Apolymetis cognata Pilsbry & NGMEES Hertlein & Strong, Zoolo- gica, New York Zool. Soc., Vol. 34, Pt. 2 , p. 93, 1949. Magdalena Bay, Lower California, to Paita, Peru. Herter & Strong, Es- says in the Natural Sciences in honor of Captain Allan Hancock on the occasion of his birthday July 26, 1955 (Univ. South. Calif.: Los Angeles), p. 123, pl. A, figs. 14, 15, 16, November 8, 1955. Albemarle Island, Galapagos Islands. Apolymetis clarki Durham, Geol. Soc. Amer. Mem. 43, Pt. 23 p. 90, pl. 24, fig. 12, pl. 25, fig. 14, August 10, 1950. “(loc. A3582)” | ( “Pleistocene, Santa Inez Bay, Lower California, From 20-foot — terrace level extending from loc. A3581 to beach.” ). Type Locality: Tagus Cove, Albemarle Island, Galapagos — Islands. Range: Pliocene to Recent. Recent from Magdalena Bay, Lower California, to Punta Penasco in the Gulf of California and south to Paita, Peru, and the Galapagos Islands. A discussion of this species was given by Hertlein & Strong in a paper published in 1949. Later Durham described a species from the Pleistocene of Santa Inez Bay under the name of Apoly- — metis clarki. There appear to be no constant characters present by which shells of that species differ from A. cognata, and it ac- cordingly is here placed in the synonymy of the latter species. Class Gastropoda Haliotis cf. H. fulgens Philippi Plate 1, figure 13 Haliotis fulgens Philippi, Zeitschr. f. Malakozool., Jahrg. 2, p 150, 1845. “Patria.” — Philippi, Abbild. u. Beschreib. Conchyl., Bd. 2, Heft 8, p. 219(11), Tab. 7, fig. la, Tab. 8, fig. 1, April, 1847. “Patria: California?” — I. S. Oldroyd, Stanford Uniy. Publ. Univ. Ser. Geol. Sci., Vol. 2, Pt. 3, p. 233, pl. 89, fig. 1, pl. 90, fig. 1, 1927. “Monterey Bay, California, to Lower California.” [See corrections of plates by Keen, Checklist of West North Amer. Moll. (Stan- ford Univ. Press), p. 83, 1937]. — Bonnot, Calif. Fish & Game, Vol. 34, No. 4, p. 152, fig. 60, 1948. “Farallon Islands to Gulf of California.” 68 ce BuLLeTIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 56; Party?) 1957 Haliotis splendens Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. 3, Haliotis, sp. 9, pl. 3, fig. 9, April, 1846. “Hab. California.” Haliotis planilirata Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. 3, Haliotis, sp. 62, pl. 16, fig. 62, July, 1846. “Hab. — ?” Type Locality: No locality cited originally. “Patria: Cali- fornia?” (Philippi, 1847). Range: Pliocene to Recent. Recent, from Farallon Islands, Cal- ifornia, to Cape San Lucas, Lower California. An imperfect specimen in the collection from the lower beds at Point E] Pulpito appears to be referable to Haliotis fulgens Philippi. The shell of this specimen is thinner than is usual for this form. This species is known to occur in Pliocene and Pleisto- cene deposits on the west coast of Lower California, but this is the first specimen recorded with certainty as a fossil from the Gulf of California. It is known to live at Cape San Lucas, Lower Cali- fornia, but no specimens of it have been found in the Gulf of Cali- fornia by collectors on any expeditions of the California Academy of Sciences. Nassarius tiarulus Kiener Buccinum tiarula Kiener, Spéc. Gén. et Icon. Coq. Viv., Pur- puriféres, Pt. 2, Buccinum, p. 111, pl. 30, fig. 4 (two figs.), 1841. “Habite la mer des Indes sur les cétes de Madagascar.” Nassa tiarula Kiener, Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. 8, Nassa, species 92, pl. 14, figs. 92a, 92b, December, 1853. “Hab. Madagascar.” — Tryon, Man. Conch., Vol. 4, pl. 12, figs. 174 and 175 (only), 1882. Nassarius tegula tiarula Kiener, Demond, Pac. Sci. (Univ. Hawaii), Vol. 6, No. 4, p. 307, pl. 1, fig. 4, 1952. “Puerto Escon- dido, Gulf of California”. Recent. Type Locality: Madagascar originally cited, but this is be- _ lieved to be erroneous. Typical specimens occur at Escondido _ Bay, Gulf of California. Range: Pliocene to Recent. Recent, from Punta Penasco in the _ Gulf of California to Panama. Description: Shell of moderate size, spire acuminate, whorls _subangulate at the periphery where they are coronated with a _ row of nodes which are especially strong on the last whorl; the _ nodes often extend toward the base as weak axial ribs, but the 2 _ or 3 ribs preceding the varicose outer lip are usually obsolete. The entire shell bears subobsolete spiral striae; color yellowish-white _with brown spots between the nodes, especially on the later por- tion of the last whorl, sometimes with slaty-ash bands; callus white. Commonly 15-18 mm. in length and 8-10 mm. in diameter. This species was originally cited from Madagascar by Kiener. Later Reeve also cited it from the same locality, but according to _Carpenter*, this assignment was without authority. Carpenter “Carpenter, P. P., Cat. Mazatlan Shells, p. 496 (footnote), March, 1857. 69 BULLETIN, So, CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 considered it to be a synonym of Reeve’s Nassa tegula, although Kiener’s species was named much earlier. Pease’, after studying west American specimens, also concluded that Kiener’s species was a variety of N. tegula Reeve and that the original locality, Madagascar was probably an error. Tryon, however, considered N. tiarula to be an inhabitant of the western Pacific. More recent- ly, Dautzenberg'’ cited it as occurring in the fauna of Mada- gascar, but he mentioned no localities other than the citations from the literature by Kiener, Reeve, and von Martens. However, he did cite several localities from Madagascar for the similar Nas- sa coronula A, Adams'', a species erroneously cited from west American waters by Pilsbry & Lowe'*, Schepman"*, in his discus- sion of Nassa delicata A. Adams from the East Indies, stated that he considered this species to be distinct from N. tiarula and not identical, as indicated by Tryon. According to Tomlin™, N. deli- cata is identical with N. callosa A. Adams, which was originally described from the Philippine Islands (“Hab. Bais, island of Negros, 7 fathoms, sandy mud (H.C.). Mus. Cuming.” ). A con- sideration of the foregoing facts leads the author, at least for the present, to retain the name Nassarius tiarulus for west American shells. Nassarius tegulus’” Reeve also was originally described without information as to the locality from which it came. As mentioned by Dall'®, it appears to be a similar but generally more northern, darker form of N. tiarulus. It is said to range from Alamitos Bay, California, to Scammon Lagoon, Lower California, and perhaps to Magdalena Bay. The shell described by Carpenter under the name of “Nas- sa Ptegula, var. nodulifera, Phil.” is apparently a form of N. tiaru- lus with strong axial and spiral sculpture. Judging from Reeve’s “Pease, W. H., Amer. Jour. Conch. , Vol. 5, Pt. 2, p. 88, October 7, 1869. x iDanimenbere! P., Faune des Galoniee Francaises, Vol. 3, Fasc. 4, p. 411, 1929. See also J. Giner Mari, Journ. de Conchyl., Vol. 78, No. 1, p. 12, 1934. “Nassa coronula A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1851, p. 96, is- | sued December 7, 1852. “Hab. Corrigidor, Bay of Manila, under stones, low water (H.C.). Mus. Cuming.” — Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. 8, Nassa, species 99, oe a figs. 99a, 99b, 1853. *Pilsbry, and Lowe, H. N., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Vol. 84, p. ie. 1955 (as Nassa coronula C. B. Adams ). **Schepman, M. M., Siboga Exped., Monogr. 49d, p. 322, 1911. “Tomlin, J. R. leB., Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, Vol. 20, pt. 1, p. 42, 1932. *°Nassa tegula Reeve, Conch. Heat, Vol. 8, Nassa, species 98, pl. 15, fig. 98, December, 1853. “ely, = zoDall WH. brocaU. |S: Sy Mus., Vol. 51, No. 2166, p. 577, 1917. ““Nassa Ptegula, var. nodulifera, Phil.”, Carpenter, Cat. Mazatlan Shells, p. 496, March, 1857. “Hab. — Mazatlan; extremely rare; L’pool Col.” 70 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES f Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 illustration, I am uncertain whether or not the shell described by C. B. Adams'* from Panama as Nassa glauca is identical with N. tiarulus or whether it is sufficiently distinct to merit subspecific status. Hidalgo’ considered it to be distinct from N. tegulus but he did not mention N. tiarulus. Specimens of Nassarius tiarulus were dredged by Beebe & Crocker in Santa Inez Bay in the Gulf of California in 10-18 fathoms. It is sometimes found on mud flats. Specimens from San Ignacio Lagoon on the west coast of Lower California appear to be intermediate between Nassarius tiarulus and N. tegulus and might be referable to either. Nassarius tiarulus also has been recorded as occurring in the Pleistocene at Magdalena Bay, Lower California. Genus Enaeta H. & A. Adams Enaeta H. & A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., Vol. 1, p. 167, 1858. Original list of species. “Cumingii, Brod.”, “cylleniformis Sow.”, “Guildingii, Sow.”, “guttata, Reeve”, “harpa, Barnes.” [No type cited]. Also Vol. 2, p. 618, 1858.—Tate in Woodward's Man. Moll., Ap., p. 16, 1868. As synonyms of Lyria Gray he cited, “Harpella, Gray; Enaeta, Gray.” “Types, L. deliciosa, Montf.; L. harpa, Barnes. —Cossmann, Essais de Paleo. Comp., Vol. 3, p. 105, 1899. “Type: V. harpa Barnes.”’—Dall, Smithson. Miscell. Coll. (Quart. Issue, Vol. 3), Vol. 48, No. 1663, p. 351, 1907 — Pilsbry & Olsson, Bull Amer. Paleo., Vol. 35, No. 152, p. 294(24), 1954. Type (virtually designated by Tate, 1868, definitely by Coss- mann, 1899): Voluta harpa Barnes. The genus Enaeta differs from Lyria Gray chiefly in the thick- ened outer lip which is inflected and bears an obtuse tooth upon the middle of the inner margin. This genus is known to occur from Miocene to Recent in the east American region, but only from Pleistocene to Recent in the eastern Pacific where two species and one subspecies live at the present time. Key to west American species of Enaeta _A. Shoulder subangulate; ribs with strong nodes on shoulder Bomopizesmoderately high 2 cumingii aa. Spire high and acute; shell more SleliGeneeets. able eras! (subspecies) pedersenii B. Shoulder rounded; ribs without nodes or only slightly noded; ribs more numerous; spire lowet...........-.-.------------- barnesii PLATE 13, FIGURE 14 “Nassa glauca C. B. Adams, Ann. Lyceum Nat. Hist. New York, Vol. 5, pp. 285, June, 1852, 529, July, 1852, (separate, pp. 61, 305). “Habitat. — Taboga.” — Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. 8. Nassa, species 139, pl. 21, figs. 139a, 139b, December, 1853. “Hab. Taboga, Panama.” “Hidalgo, J. G., Mem. R. Acad. Sci. Fis. Nat., Madrid, Vol. 19, p. 347, — «1893 1 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 . Enaeta cumingii pedersenii Verrill Enaeta Pedersenii Verrill, Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, Vol. 49, No. 146, p. 226, March, 1870. “La Paz, — J. Pedersen. Five speci- mens. — Dall, Smithson. Miscell. Coll. (Quart. Issue, Vol. 3), Vol. 48, No. 1663, p. 352, 1907.— M. Smith, A Review of the Volutidae (Trop. Photogr. Labor., Lantana, Florida), p. 13, 1942. Enaeta cumingii Broderip, Durham, Geol. Soc. America Mem. 43, p. 104, pl. 32, fig. 5, August 10, 1950. Not Voluta (Enaeta) cumingii Broderip. Type Locality: La Paz, Lower California. Range: Pleistocene to Recent. Known Recent only from the type locality. The diagnostic characters separating this species from Enaeta cumingii were enumerated by Verrill as follows: “This species is closely allied to the next /Lyria (Enaeta) cumingii], but is more slender, with the spire more acute, smaller tubercles and costae, a more prolonged and recurved siphon, and more con- tracted aperture. The surface is not smooth and the color is lighter.” A single specimen in the present collection from Carmen Island still retains traces of the color markings and although the outer lip is imperfect, it apparently differs from E. cumingii in the char- acteristics mentioned by Verrill for E. pedersenii. The relation- ship, however, appears to be so close that I am inclined to retain Verrill’s form as a subspecies of E. cumingii. Durham illustrated a specimen from the Pleistocene of Coro-— nado Island in the Gulf of California under the name of Enaeta cumingii, but he noted that it differed from that species in the © more slender form and higher spire. The specimen illustrated by ~ him appears to be referable to the form described by Verrill. BIBLIOGRAPHY Anderson, C. A. 1950. 1940 E. W. Scripps Cruise to the Gulf of California. Pt. 1. Geology of Islands and neighboring Land Areas. Geol. Soc. America Mem. 43, pp. I-VII, 1-53, pls. 1-3, figs. 1-19, August 10. Beal, C. 1948. Reconnaissance of the Geology and Oil possibilities of Baja Cali- fornia, Mexico. Geol. Soc. America Mem. 31, pp. I-X, 1-138, pls. 1-11, December 1. Bose, E. 1907. Sobre algunos Fosiles Pleistocenicos en la Baja California recogidos por el Sr. Dr. E. Angermann. Inst. Geol. Mexico, Paregones, Tomo 2, No. 2, pp. 41-45. Durham, J. W. 1950. 1940 E. W. Scripps Cruise to the Gulf of California. Pt. II, Megascopic Paleontology and Marine Stratigraphy. Geol. Soc. America Mem. 43, pp. I-VIII, 1-216, pls. 1-48, figs. 1-3, tables © 1-10, August 10. 72 ——— BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Hammond, E. H. 1954. A Geomorphic Study of the Cape Region of Baja California. Univ. Calif. Publ. Geogr., Vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 45-112, pls. 4-7, figs. 1-16, maps 1-4, July 8. Hanna, G. D., and Hertlein, L. G. 1927. Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences to the Gulf of California in 1921. Geology and Paleontology. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, Vol. 16, No. 6, pp. 187-157, pl. 5, April 22. Hertlein, L. G. 1925. Pectens from the Tertiary of Lower California. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, Vol. 14, No. 1, pp. 1-85, pls. 1-6, July 21. 1931. Additional Pliocene and Pleistocene fossils from Lower California. Jour. Paleo., Vol. 5, No. 4, pp. 365-367, December. Hertlein, L. G., and Emerson, W. K. 1956. Marine Pleistocene Invertebrates from near Puerto Penasco, Sonora, Mexico. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 12, No. 8, pp. 154-176, pl. 12, 2 figs. in text (maps), June 7, 1956. Vokes, H. E. 1948. [Cited in Wilson, I. F.] Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petrol. Geol., Vol. 32, No. 9, pp. 1780-1784, September. 1948. [Cited in Wilson, I. F.] Univ. Nac. Auton. Mexico. Inst. Geol. Geofis. y Geodes., Bol. No. 53, pp. 33-41. 1949. [Cited in Wilson, I. F., and Veytia, M.] U. S. Geol. Surv., Bull. 960-F, pp. 193-199. 1955. [Cited in Wilson, I. F., and Rocha, V. S.] U. S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 273, pp. 21, 32, 35-37, 39-40. Wilson, I. F. 1948. Buried topography, initial structures, and sedimentation in Santa Rosalia area, Baja California, Mexico. Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petrol. ale Vol. 32, No. 9, pp. 1762-1807, figs. 1-12, tables 1-3, Septem- er. 1948. Topografia sepultada, Estructuras iniciales y Sedimentacion en la Region de Santa Rosalia, Baja California. Univ. Nac. Auton. Mexi- co. Inst. Geol. Geofis. y Geodesia, Bol. No. 53, pp. 1-78, pl. 1, figs. 1-11, tables 1-3. [Translation of the preceding paper by Carl Fries, Jr.] Wilson, I. F., in collaboration with V. S. Rocha 1955. Geology and Mineral Deposits of the Boleo Copper District, Baja California, Mexico. U. S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 273, pp. I-VI, 1-134, pls. 1-11, figs. 1-38 in text, tables 1-33. Wilson, I. F., and Veytia, M. 1949. Geology and Manganese Deposits of the Lucifer District northwest of Santa Rosalia, Baja California. U. S. Geol. Surv., Bull. 960-F, pp. I-IV, 177-233, pls. 37-54, fig. 15. [Also published in Spanish language in Mexico. Inst. Nac. Invest. Rec. Miner., Bol. 25, pp. 1-68, 1949. ] Wisser, E. 1954. Geology and Ore Deposits of Baja California, Mexico. Econ. Geol., Vol. 49, No. 1, pp. 44-76, 5 figs., 2 tables, January-February. 73 cod BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES ON PLATE 18 Fig. 1. Solecardia eburnea Conrad. Hypotype No. 10295 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), from Loc. 34163 (C.A.S.), Santa Inez Bay, Lower California, Mexico, Pleistocene. Length, 23.8 mm.; height, 16 mm. View of exterior of left valve. Fig. 2. Solecardia eburnea Conrad. View of exterior of right valve of specimen shown in Fig. L. Fig. 3. Solecardia eburnea Conrad. View of interior of specimen shown rrov. Urtiker, We Fig. 4. Solecardia eburnea Conrad. View of interior of specimen shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 5. Botula fusca Gmelin. Jlypotype No. 10296 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll. ), from Loc. 32944 (C.A.S.), from Arroyo del Coyote, 11 miles northeast of La Paz, Lower California, Mexico; Pleistocene. Length, 19.5 mm.; height, 10 mm. View of exterior of right valve. Fig. 6. Botula fusca Gmelin. View of exterior of left valve of specimen shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 7. Thracia curta Conrad. Hypotype No. 10297 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), from the same locality as the specimen shown in Fig. 1. Length, 30 mm.; height, 21.5 mm. View of exterior of a somewhat misshapen right valve. Fig. 8. Thracia curta Conrad. View of interior of left valve of specimen shown in Fig. 7. Fig. 9. Mitra sulcata funiculata Reeve. Hypotype No. 10299 ( Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), from the same locality as the specimen shown in Fig. 1. Length, 25.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 10 mm. Fig. 10. Ctena mexicana Dall. Hypotype No. 10298 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), from the same locality as the specimen shown in Fig. 1. Length, 15.8 mm.; height, 16 mm. View of interior of left valve. Fig. 1l. Ctena mexicana Dall. View of exterior of specimen shown in Fig. 10. Fig. 12. Turricula maculosa Sowerby. Hypotype No. 10302 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), from the same locality as the specimen shown in Fig. 1. Length, 42.4 mm.; maximum diameter, 13.1 mm. Fig. 13. Haliotis cf. H. fulgens Philippi. Hypotype No. 10301 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), from Loc. 34164 (C.A.S.), Point El Pulpito, east coast of Lower California, Mexico; Pleistocene. View of exter- ior of an incomplete specimen, length approximately 54 mm.; height, approxi- mately 78 mm. Fig. 14. Enaeta cumingii pedersenii Verrill. Hypotype No. 10300 (Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Geol. Type Coll.), fossil coral reef at Puerto Ballandra, Carmen Island, Mexico, in the Gulf of California; Pleistocene. Length, 25.3 mm.; maximum diameter, 13.2 mm. 74 BuLieTin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY oF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 OL Se - PRO JELANIED, Ig 75 BuLitetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 MICRARIONTA (MOLLUSCA: PULMONATA ) FROM NORTHWESTERN SONORA MEXICO By Roserr J. DRAKE Department of Zoology, University of Arizona Species of the helminthoglyptoid genus Micrarionta are found in northern Baja California, southern California and on adjacent islands, and in southwestern Arizona; about 50 forms have been described. It has long been known that at least one form (Micrarionta rowelli mexicana) occurs in northwestern So- nora, México; however, this form was apparently never illustrated and type material at the time of its description was perhaps in two collections — the holotype (and paratypes?) at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and paratypes in the collection of Herbert Nelson Lowe, then of Long Beach, California. Lowe's entire molluscan collection was deposited in the San Diego Mu- seum of Natural History after his death in 1936 and thus the paratypes of M. r. mexicana returned by Dr. Pilsbry after study are now there. Micrarionta (Eremarionta) rowelli mexicana Pilsbry & Lowe 1934 Pilsbry & Lowe, The Nautilus 48: 67. Description: “The shell is light pinkish cinnamon on the spire and in an ill-defined band below the suture of the last whorl, which is elsewhere paler, nearly white. Shape nearly that of the type of M. rowelli and M. desertorum; subsequent whorls, up to the growth-rest line near the end of the penult whorl, with regu- larly arranged papillae, decidedly more distinct than in M. hutsoni, the last whorl smooth except for light growth ripples. Height 7.8 mm., diam. 14.8 mm.” — Pilsbry & Lowe. Sonora: Near the main travelled road and ca. 12 miles south of Sonoyta (a border town south of Lukeville, Arizona); H. N. Lowe, 27 February 1934 — type material; some alive clinging to undersides of rocks. The Lowe paratypes (San Diego Museum of Natural History molluscan type collection No. 447) are 14shells; they were evident- ly in two cabinet lots, one coming to the museum with the collec- tion and the other donated at another time, perhaps earlier. The paratypes average 7.0 mm. high and 14.0 mm. diam., three of them are illustrated here (Pl. 14, fig. 1). 76 | NEN ah a BuLueTiIn, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Fig. 1 — Paratypes (S.D.M.N.H. No. 447.) x 3 Fig. 2— Topotypes (S.D.M.N.H. No. 38009.) x 8 Micrarionta rowelli mexicana Pilsbry & Lows. PLATE 14 BULLETIN, So, Canuir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 San Diego Museum No. 38009 is for 6 topotypes of M. r. mexicana collected on 1 March 1934 by Mr. Laurence M. Huey, vertebrate zoologist on the Museum staff (then and now), at the type locality ca. 12 miles south of the border and during the return trip from Punta Penasco described by Lowe (1934); two specimens shown (PI. 14, fig. 2). During the 1934 trip with Lowe, Mr. Huey collected 5 shells of M. r. mexicana (S. D. M. N. H. 38010) on rocky hills at Punta Penasco, Sonora; they are illustrated (PI. 15, fig. 1) and measure 5.0-7.0 mm. high and 12.0-15.0 mm. diam. Pilsbry and Lowe (1934) stated the specimens of M. r. mex- icana were very much alike and in that paper first expressed the opinion that Micrarionta hutsoni, M. desertorum, and the Sonora form described were all local races of M. rowelli, making a very widespread distribution with “an astonishingly discontinuous range. Later, and in a monographic treatment of the genus, Pilsbry (1939: 228-230 ) assigned M. hutsoniand M. desertorum and eight other forms in southern California and Arizona to the “group of M. rowelli’ and placed them in the subgenus Eremarionta. Also mentioned was the occurrence of “a smaller form” of M. rowelli “from rocky hills at Punta Libertad”, Sonora, collected by Lowe, “which sometimes shows a weak, narrow band”. Nothing other than the brief reference by Pilsbry (1939: 230), was published regarding Lowe’s findings during a 1935 trip to Punta Libertad and Kino Bay, Sonora. This, according to in- formation kindly given me by Mr. Huey, was a much longer trip than the one to Punta Penasco in 1934 and lasted six weeks. The members of the expedition (Lowe, Huey, M. Bloomfield, and Phil Lichty) entered Sonora at Sasabe, went through Altar to Punta Libertad and remained there from about 28 January to 10 February. They then went again through Altar and then to Her- mosillo and afterward to the coast arriving at Kino Bay on 14 February; they remained at Kino Bay until 27 February and arrived back in San Diego about 1 March 1935. Mr. Huey said that Lowe looked unsuccessfully for land shells at many places during their travels inland; none were discovered in my 1954 study of Mexican things in the Lowe collection. There are 20 specimens of the smaller race of Micrarionta rowelli, and noted by Pilsbry as from near Punta Libertad, in the San Diego Museum (No. 13105). They measure 3.0-5.0 mm. high and 10.0-13.0 mm. diam. and were collected by Lowe in February 1935; four of them are illustrated (PI. 15, fig. 2). Punta Libertad is about 100 miles south of Punta Penasco and lies about half way between Kino Bay and Punta Penasco. Therefore, as now known by the Lowe specimens, Micrarionta extends nearly 200 miles down. the eastern shores of the Gulf of California. From the gen- eral small size of this form as compared to most of the others in 78 BULLETIN, So. CAaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Fig. 1.— Punta Penasco, Sonora, México (S.D.M.N.H. No. 38010.) x 3 Fig. 2—La Libertad, Sonora, México, (S.D.M.N.H. No. 13105.) x 38 Micrarionta rowelli mexicana Pilsbry & Lowe. PLATE 15 tS) BuLLeTiIn, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 the genus and the depression of the spire as illustrated in the few specimens known, it would seem that it would be an old form in the desert area and probably going out with increasing aridity. A north-south cline for size would seem to be evident, as well; aridity factors may not be totally responsible for this. On 3 May 1953, Dr. Albert R. Mead of the University of Arizona Department of Zoology, and I made a search for living specimens of M. r. mexicana in hills east of the paved highway at approximately the type locality 12 miles south of the border. Nothing other than an incomplete shell (University of Arizona Invertebrate Museum No. 207) of the form was found. As the anatomy of the Sonoran representative of Micrarionta is apparent- ly unstudied — at least it is not reported upon in the literature of the area and genus known to me — examination of fresh and/or properly preserved animals of this unique form would be in order for anatomical and thus further phylogenetic study. These notes are partially from study of Mexican pulmonates in Sonora (1951-1952) under Penrose Fund support from the American Philosophical Society; a National Academy of Sciences Bache Fund grant-in-aid made Mexican landshell research pos- sible at the San Diego Museum in the summer of 1954. At that time a report (with illustrations ) on the specimens of Micrarionta was submitted to a journal for publication. The registered en- velope containing the manuscript was delayed in the mails for well over a year; in the lapse of time the journal ceased to function. As the original paper and photographs were not returned to me, it became necessary to again photograph the shells as in some way the negatives had become damaged. In April 1957 Mr. Emery P. Chace, curator of molluscan items in the San Diego Museum, kindly arranged for a loan of the micrariontas for the re-photographing. LITERATURE CITED Lowe, Herbert N. 1934. On the Sonoran side of the Gulf. The Nautilus, 48: 1-4, 43-46. Pilsbry, Henry A. 1939. Land Mollusca of North America (north of Mexico). Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Vol. 1, Part. 1. Pilsbry, Henry A., and Lowe, Herbert N. 1934. Some desert helices of the genus Micrarionta. The Nautilus, 48: 67-68. ee 80 — OE seem aaa aaa ————— BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 A NEW GENUS OF HAUSTORIID AMPHIPOD FROM THE NORTHEASTERN PACIFIC OCEAN AND THE SOUTHERN DISTRIBUTION OF UROTHOE VARVARINI GURJANOVA* By J. Laurens BARNARD While identifying crustaceans collected from the continental shelves off southern California (Hartman 1955, 1956) the writer dissected specimens tentatively identified with the genus Haus- torius. Examination of the mouthparts of these animals showed that they were quite dissimilar to the type species H. arenarius (Slabber) and should be segregated as a new genus, described below. In addition, it was discovered that Urothoe varvarini Gurjanova, another haustoriid, is a widespread inhabitant of this region and is discussed below. The writer is indebted to Dr. Olga Hartman and the Allan Hancock Foundation for aid in this study. Family HAUSTORIIDAE Eohaustorius, new genus Diacnosis. — Antenna 1 not geniculate, accessory flagellum poorly developed, biarticulate; peraeopods 4 and 5 with fourth and fifth articles greatly expanded; gnathopods 1 and 2 with.third article short; maxilla 1 with a very small inner lobe; maxilla 2 with lobes subequal in length and shape; maxilliped with palp article 3 not geniculate; lobes of telson widely separated and attached divergently to the urosome; peraeopod 2 unlike per- aeopod 1, similar to peraeopod 3; pleopods well developed. Type Species. — Haustorius washingtonianus Thorsteinson 1941. Remarks. — This genus differs from Haustorius Muller by the short accessory flagellum, the shape of the maxillae and maxilli- peds, the attachment of the telson and the dissimilar first 2 pairs of peraeopods. Unlike most genera of amphipods the second peraeopod is oriented so that it appears to be a small accessory appendage with a shape similar to peraeopods 3 to 5. The species Haustorius eous Gurjanova 1951 (including the subspecies H. e. robustus Gurjanova 1953) and H. cheliferus Bulycheva 1952 appear to belong to Eohaustorius on the basis of their telsons, accessory flagella, and second peraeopods, al- though their mouthparts remain undescribed. * Contribution No. 193 from the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California 81 BULLETIN, So. CAuLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 In this way the genera Haustorius and Eohaustorius would be composed of: Haustorius arenarius (Slabber). North Atlantic. Haustorius americanus Pearse. Caribbean. Eohaustorius washingtonianus (Thorsteinson ). N. E. Pacific. Eohaustorius eous (Gurjanova). Okhotsk Sea. Eohaustorius cheliferus (Bulycheva ). Japan Sea. The writer is unable to recognize a distinct difference between H. eous and H. cheliferus although article 5 of peraeopod 2 ap- pears slightly different in the drawings of the two species. The first 2 peraeopods of H. cous robustus Gurjanova 1953 were mislabeled. Eohaustorius washingtonianus (Thorsteinson) new comb. (Plate 16) Haustorius washingtonianus Thorsteinson 1941: 61-62, pl. 4, figs. 39-51. Notes. — The figures accompanying this paper obviate the need for a description. The specimens are very close to the figures and description given by Thorsteinson, the presence of an upward pointing cusp on article 2 of peraeopod 5 being a distinctive correspondence. On the second antennae are stiff, stout sensory setae, each inserted into a capsule attached to the surface of the chitin. The mouthparts of H. washingtonianus were confused by Thorsteinson. She figured and labeled as maxillipeds the com- posite of the lower lip and second maxillae which often are re- moved and mounted together during dissection. MATERIAL EXAMINED. — Velero stations 2312-53 (6), 4810-57 (2), 4819-57 (45). DistriputTion. —The amphipods from more than 500 samples taken from depths of 5 to more than 500 fms have been examined. The present species occurred in only 3 of those, indicating that the southern California coast may represent the southern limits of the species described from Washington. Its scarcity may be re- lated also to the sparsity of coarse gray and brown sands on which it has been found. It is of interest that the species was associated with the only two collections taken of a new genus of phoxocep- halid, being described elsewhere. Station 4819 is close to Pt. Conception in 10 fms, Station 4810 is off Santa Barbara in § fms, and Station 2312 is in 7.5 fms, on the San Pedro shelf near Long Beach, about 135 miles south of Pt. Conception. Urothoe varvarini Gurjanova Urothoe varvarini Gurjanova 1953: 219-221 figs. 3, 4. IDENTIFICATION. —Specimens were dissected and compared closely with the figures of Gurjanova. They corresponded in all respects, including the presence of the slightly serrated distal spines on the first 2 peraeopods. BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 a, PLATE 16 Eohaustorius washingtonianus, female 5 mm, station 2312-53. Figs. A-C, peraeopods 3-5; D,E, peraeopods 1,2; F,G, antennae 1,2; H, upper lip; I, mandible; J, lower lip; K, maxilla 1; L, maxilla 2; M, maxilliped; N, O, gnathopods 1,2; P-R, uropods 1-3; S, lobes of telson; T, epimera 1-3; U, base of sensory seta antenna 2. 83 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 _ Remarks. — This species is very closely related to U. elegans Bate and possibly should be a subspecies of that Atlantic form. Its distinction hinges on whether the concentrated grouping of setae on the lower part of article 2, peraeopod 4, was overlooked by Europeans working on U. elegans (see Sars 1893 pl. 47). These setae are easily overlooked, especially on animals which have not been properly cleaned of the debris usually clinging to preserved amphipods. The morphological difference, if valid, may be worth only subspecifie rank. MATERIAL EXAMINED. — Velero stations 2126-52 (6), 2153-52 (11), 2232-52 (3), 2344-53 (1), 2347-53 (9), 2348-53 (17), 2349-53 (4), 2394-53 (1), 2418-53 (1), 2414-53 (1), 2498-53 (13), 2629-54 (18), 2995-55 (4), 2996-55 (1), 2998-55 (29), 3034-55 (1), 3166-55 (1), 3204-55 (1), 3388-55 (3), 3389-55 (12), 3894-55 (17), 3572-55 (5), 3573-55 (10), 3616-55 (9), 4318-56 (27), 4753-56 (1), 4820-57 (2). The ratio of males to females in the above samples was about 1.0:3.6. Distripution. — Urothoe varvarini is known from the Okhotsk Sea and southern Sakhalin. The present materials extend its range several thousand miles south to the southern California coast. It occurs on the continental shelf and slope in depths of 29 to 210 fms, the median depth of the above stations being 50 fms. It is usually associated with shelly, rubbly or gravelly bottoms mixed with silt or sandy silt from Pt. Conception to Pt. Loma, California. LITERATURE CITED Bulycheva, A.N. 1952. Novye vidy bokoplavov (Amphipoda, Gammaridea) iz Japonsko- go Morja. Akad. Nauk SSSR, Trudy Zool. Inst. 12: 195-250, 39 gs. Gurjanova, E. 1951. Bokoplavy morej SSSR i sopredel’njkh vod (Amphipoda-Gam- ee Akad. Nauk SSSR, Opred. Faune SSSR 41: 1-1029, 704 figs 1953. Novye dopolnenija k dal’nevostognoj faune morskix bokoplavov. Akad. Nauk SSSR, Trudy Zool. Inst. 13: 216-241, 19 figs. Hartman, O. 1955. Quantitative survey of the benthos of San Pedro Basin, south- ern California. Part 1, Preliminary Results. Hancock Pac. Ex- peds. 19 (1): 1-185, 2 charts, 7 pls. 1956. Contributions to a biological survey of Santa Monica Bay, Cali- fornia. Final Rept. submitted to Hyperion Eng., Inc., by the Geology Dept., Univ. So. Calif., Hancock Fd., Los Angeles, Calif. (not widely distributed ). Sars, G.O: 1893. Amphipoda. Crustacea of Norway 1: viii and 711 pp., 240 pls., 8 suppl. pls. Thorsteinson, E.D. 1941. New or noteworthy amphipods from the North Pacific coast. Univ. Washington, Publ. Oceanog. 4 (2): 50-96, 8 pls. 84 BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Wolk exe, lente GD, ile ley7/ DESCRIPTIONS AND RECORDS OF SOME CERAMBYCIDAE FROM BAJA CALIFORNIA (Coleoptera ) By E. Gorton LINSLEY University of California, Berkeley The following records and descriptions are supplemental to a more comprehensive treatment of the Baja California Ceram- bycidae published earlier (Linsley, 1942). CROSSIDIUS TESTACEUS [LeConte This species has been taken thirty-two miles south of Ti- juana and thirty-one miles north of Ensenada, August 31, 1934, of flowers of Aplopappus venetus vernonoides by P. H. Timber- lake. It is more finely punctate than C. australis Linsley (from San Quintin, Hamilton Ranch, and Rio San Telmo on Aplopap- pus parishii), and lacks the dark sutural stripe. RHOPALOPHORELLA FASCIATA (LeConte) new combination Gracilia fasciata LeConte, 1873, Smithson. Misc. Coll., vol. 11, no. 264, p. 181. Rhopalophora bicincta Horn, 1895, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., ser. 2, vol. 5, p. 245. New synonymy. The type of Gracilia fasciata LeConte is in the Ulke Collection in the Carnegie Museum at Pittsburgh. Its structural characters will not permit its inclusion in the Graciliini and it seems to be the same as Rhopalophora bicincta Horn, although the above synonymy is not based upon an actual comparison of specimens. Both names were based upon unique specimens from Lower California, although the LeConte type bears the label “Cal.” OBRIUM DISCOIDEUM [eConte Taken at Todos Santos, October 10, 1941 by E. S. Ross and G. E. Bohart. O. discoideum also occurs in southern Arizona where it has been found in Baboquivari Canyon, west side of Baboquivari Mts., Pima Co., July 25-27, 1952, by H. B. Leech and J. W. Green. In these latter specimens the central cloud of the elytra tends to be darker, the enclosed pale area reduced. Obrium dominicum Linsley, new species Obrium constricticolle, Linsley (not Schaeffer ), 1942, Proc. Calif. eid. ser. 4, vol. 24) p. 51. Mate: Form moderately small, subparallel; integument pale brownish-testaceous, elytra sometimes clouded with picious along sides at middle, more rarely also at base and apex, leaving pale 85 BuLLEeTIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 areas in form of a cross; punctation moderately coarse, sparse; cate scence sparse, suberect. Head with a few coarse punctures on vertex between eyes; eyes separated above by about one- sixth of greatest width of head; antennae exceeding elytral apices by about two segments, segments minutely clothed with fine appressed pubescence, with a few larger, coarse suberect hairs on basal segments, scape a little longer than third segment, third segment barely shorter than fourth, fifth segment longer than fourth, subequal to sixth, segments six to ten successively de- creasing in length, eleventh segment a little longer than tenth. Pronotum a little longer than broad, apex nearly one and one- half times as wide as base, moderately constricted in front of lateral tubercle, disk moderately coarsely, sparsely punctate, the punctures as large as those at base of elytra, mostly separated by several diameters, each bearing a long, coarse, erect hair. Elytra about two and one-half times as long as basal width; surface moderately coarsely punctate near base where punctures are mostly separated by about two diameters, a little coarser and denser near middle, apex almost impunctate, each puncture bear- ing a sub-erect hair; apices separately rounded. Legs with pos- terior femora moderately clavate, very sparsely punctate, with a few long suberect hairs. Abdomen shining, sparsely punctate; fifth sternite broadly truncate and shallowly enageitaee at apex. Length, 4.5 mm. FEMALE: Eyes separated above by one-third of greatest width of head; antennae barely attaining elytral apices; abdomen abbreviated and modified. Length, 6 mm. Holotype male (Calif. Acad. Sci., Ent.) from San Domingo, Baja California, July 19, 1938 (A. E. Michelbacher and E. S. Ross), allotype female (Calif. Acad. Sci., Ent.) and eight para- types, same data. This species was previously identified by me as O. constricti- colle Schaeffer. However, the recent acquisition of represen- tatives of the latter species from the mountains of southern Arizona has revealed that two species are involved. O. constric- ticollis is wholly piceous or brown, with the pronotum very sparsely punctate, the punctures being much smaller than those of base of elytra, and the pronotum is more strongly constricted before the apex. O. peninsulare Schaeffer, described from Santa Rosa, Baja California, is larger than O. dominicum (7-7.5 mm. as compared with 4.5-6 mm.), with the elytra more evenly coarsely, and closely punctate, the punctures averaging less than two diam- eters apart, the abomen dullish and tessellate, and the eyes more narrowly separated above in the male. 86 BuLLeTIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2,. 1957 Compsa lecontei Linsley, new species Mate: Form elongate, subparallel; integument piceous, dull; pubescence very fine, short, appressed, with scattered long erect hairs on pronotum and about three rows of such hairs on elytra. Head very finely, densely punctate above, with scattered coarse punctures; inner emargination of eyes, densely clothed with ap- pressed white pubescence; antennae exceeding elytral apices by about four segments, segments three to seven thickened, carinate, three and four ciliate internally, third segment more than twice as long as scape, much longer than fourth, fifth segment longer than fourth, shorter than third, sixth segment longer than fifth, segments six to ten successively decreasing in length, eleventh segment longer than tenth. Pronotum less than twice as long as basal width, sides very feebly arcuate, surface very finely punc- tate above, clothed with fine appressed pubescence except for a median longitudinal smooth line and a pair of vague anterior discal calluses, sides finely, closely striate; prosternum impressed in frout of coxae and very finely punctate and pubescent, smooth anteriorly; meso-and metasternum dull, finely, densely punctate, moderately densely pubescent. Elytra more than three and one- half times as long as basal width; surface finely, densely punctate and pubescent, with coarse punctures superimposed, and about three sparse rows of coarse erect hairs; apices separately rounded. Legs with femora clavate, finely punctate and pubescent; pos- terior tibiae not carinate. Abdomen dull, finely densely punctate moderately densely pubescent; fifth sternite broadly truncate at apex. Length 9.75 mm. HOLOTYPE MALE: (Calif. Acad. Sci., Ent.) from six miles north of Triunfo, Baja California, July 15, 1938 (A. E. Michelbacher and E. S. Ross). This species bears a remarkable superficial resemblance to C. puncticollis LeConte, with which it was attracted to light at the same locality. However, it is very distinct in the very finely punctate and pubescent pronotum with its glabrous dorsal cal- luses, finely punctate prosternum in the male, dull, densely punc- tate meso- and metasterna and abdomen, and the more slender form with the elytra more than three and one-half times as long as basal width. In C, puncticollis the pronotum is rather coarsely, contiguously, and to some extent confluently, punctate, without dorsal calluses, the prosternum is coarsely densely punctate in front of the coxae in the male, the thoracic sterna and abdomen are shining and sparsely punctate, and the elytra barely more than three times as long as basal width. LITERATURE CITED Linsley, E. G. 1942. Contributions toward a knowledge of the insect fauna of Lower California. No. 2. Coleoptera: Cerambycidae. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., ser. 4, vol. 24, pp. 21-96, pls. 1-4. 87 BuLLetin. So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 LIFE HISTORIES OF TWO SOUTHERN ARIZONA MOTHS OF THE GENUS CARIPETA By Joun AbdAMs COMSTOCK Del Mar, California During the summer of 1956 the Entomological Department of the Los Angeles County Museum sponsored a field operation in southern Arizona, with which the writer was privileged to be associated. A considerable portion of our time was spent collecting in Pinery, Canyon, Chiricahua Mountains, Cochise County, at an elevation of 7200 feet. The public camp ground which served as our headquarters is in the Douglas fir — ponderosa pine association, with a few intrusions in the canyon from the pinyon —juniper belt. Particularly noted were the large number of species of Quercus, of which four grew in close association. These were Arizona white oak, Gambel oak, netleaf oak and whiteleaf oak. This plant association was particularly favorable for the occurrence of geometrid moths. Two species in particular, which had formerly been considered very rare, were taken at light in long series. These were Caripeta hilumaria Hlst. and Caripeta macularia, B. & McD. Gravid females were taken at light, and laid readily in cap- tivity, which made possible the following records. Caripeta hilumaria Hlst. A female of this species was captured July 3, and laid nu- merous eggs July 4. Ecc. — Elongate-oval. Both ends are well rounded. The side walls taper slightly towards one end. The eggs are laid singly, each one being deposited on its side. The color is, at first, a leaf green, changing to a rich brown just before hatching. Size,— .S mm. long by .5mm. wide. There are approximately 12 slightly raised longitudinal nod- ular ridges. The spaces between the ridges are finely striated. There are about 25 of these striations or ‘grills’, each one running transversely from nodule to nodule of the approximated ridges. The form and texture of this beautiful egg are clearly shown in the accompanying plate No. 17, fig. B. 88 BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 A B EV NAN, 17/ Fig. A. Egg of Caripeta macularia B. & McD., enlarged approximately X 36. Fig. B. Egg of Caripeta hilumaria Hlst., enlarged approximately X 50. Reproduced from painting by the author. The eggs hatched July 15, 1956. It was suspected that the larvae were pine feeders. They steadfastly refused both pine and fir, however, and they also turned up their noses at juniper. They were then offered, Prunus, and oak of several species, without results. Starvation began to take its toll, so, in desperation, they were given black walnut, and willow. Much to our surprise they accepted willow. Probably however, this is not their food plant of choice, as they did not thrive on it, and only one example was finally carried through to maturity. FIRST INSTAR LARVA. — Length, 3.5 mm. In form, it is a typical elongate cylindrical ‘looper’ with a single pair of prolegs, and anal prolegs. Head, dull orange, with black ocelli, and mouth parts edged with brown. It is wider than any body segment. Body. — A wide longitudinal brownish black band extends the length of the dorsum. Laterally, the body is light yellow. The ventral surface is brownish black. INTERMEDIATE INSTAR. — A single larva remained, in apparent- ly healthful condition on July 30. It measured 19 mm. in length. 89 BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Head, — width, 1.1 mm., which was slightly narrower than the tirst segment. In color, it is mottled light brown, shading to light gray-green marginally. Antennae, white on proximal segments, and dark on the tips. Ocelli, black. Body, — cylindrical, tapering slightly towards the head on the first three segments, and relatively uniform from the fourth segment to cauda. The last segment is triangulate. The dorsal area is a dull olive green, with a middorsal darker stripe edged with light olive, lateral to which is a dark olive band. From the fifth segment to the cauda these bands widen later- ally to form elongate triangles on each segment, then narrow and fuse at each segmental juncture. Slightly anterior to each segmental juncture, from the fourth to ninth, the white margins of the triangles send a narrow line transversely for a short distance, then this line turns abruptly and runs caudally for about .7 mm. forming a cross with dropped arms on each segment. The dorsal triangles narrow progressively from the tenth segment to the caudal tip. Stigmatally there is a wide longitudinal band of olive-gray. The ventral surface is a mottled olive-brown. Legs, olive-brown. The single pair of prolegs and anal pro- legs are light olive-gray on their outer surfaces, and olive-brown on inner surfaces. The spiracles are black, with light olive-gray margins. When resting, the larva spins a single strand of silk from the food plant to its spinnerets. FINAL instar. — On August 9 the larva measured 28 mm. in length. Head. — Width, 3 mm. Heart-shaped and relatively flat. The color is mottled brown with lighter stippling around the margin. Ocelli; first two (anterior), dark brown, the remainder tending toward hyaline, placed on a white base. The clypeus is white, and mandibles, dark brown. Antenna. — The basal segment is white, and more than twice the width of the middle segment. The terminal two segments are brown. Setae, short and black. Body. — The surface is completely covered with minute, slightly elevated nodules, which give it a frosted appearance. The predominant color is various shades of brown, with geometric patterns in brownish black or cream. The area below the stigmatal line is a mottled dark brown. Dorsally the first four segments above the stigmata are a light mottled brown with no definite pattern. From the fifth to ninth segments there is an irregular light creamy band forming a series of longitudinally placed triangles, connected at their ends, each expanding in the 90 BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 PLATE 18 Mature larve and pupa of Caripeta hilumaria Hlst. Fig. A. Pupa, dorsal aspect, x 3%. Fig. B. Mature larva, dorsal aspect, x 4%. Fig. C. Pupa, ventral aspect, x 3%. Reproduced from painting by the author. el BuLLeTIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY or SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 center of a segment. This band is margined by a narrow black stripe. The caudal segments lack the middorsal triangles and are of a more uniform mottled brown. Latero-inferior to the aforementioned band of triangles there occurs a longitudinal row of large comma-like figures, one to a segment on each side. These begin on the fourth segment and extend to the seventh. The corresponding figure on the eighth segment is irregular and darker than the others. These several markings are difficult to describe, but they are adequately shown on the drawing of the larva on Plate 18, fig. B. Legs, brown, with cream colored segmental rings. The single pair of prolegs are large, each having a mottled brown ground color, and a longitudinal line of large yellow spots on the lateral surface. The anal prolegs are mottled brown. Spiracles, cream centered, narrowly rimmed with black. The short brown setae arise, for the most part, from brown papillae. As the larva goes into the prepupal period it becomes a more uniform brown throughout. The white areas nearly disappear, becoming light brown or tan. The triangulate marks on the dorsum become less distinct. Pupation occurred on top of the soil in the rearing cage, on August 26, 1956. Pura. — Length, 18 mm. Greatest width, 6 mm. Color, nearly black on cephalothorax and wings, shading into dark reddish brown on abdominal segments. The movable parts of the segmen- tal junctures are a contrasting red-brown. The surface texture is predominantly rugose, but on the cephalothorax and wings it is rugo-striated. The eyes are not prominent, and are placed relatively close together. The antennae and maxillae extend to the edge of the wings. The cremaster is an elongate cone, terminating in a pair of stout hooks .5 mm. long, the tips recurved dorsally. Half way between the base and tip of the cremasteric cone, and placed laterally thereon, are two pairs of small hooklets, only half the length of the terminal pair. These extend outwardly, almost at right angles to the long axis of the body. Their tips are recurved caudally. These, and other structural features of the pupa are shown in figures A. and C. of Plate 18. The drawing of the larva on this plate (fig. B) seems forshortened, owing to the fact that it was resting in an arched posture at the time that the drawing was made. The single pupa gave forth a fully developed and perfect female on March 30, 1957. 92 Seepeekg 75... BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Caripeta macularia B. & McD. A female of this species taken at light laid a quantity of eggs on July 6, 1956. Ecc. — 1.2 mm. long by .6 mm. wide. The shape is a regular oval, the color, a delicate whitish cream, and the surface texture, finely granular, without ridges or sculpturing. There is no in- dication of a micropyle. See Plate 17, fig. A. The eggs hatched on July 19, 1956, with each young larva exiting from one end, leaving the shell intact. They were offered pine, cypress, willow, Rhus and oak, and immediately took to the oak. FIRST INSTAR LARVA. — Length, 4.25 mm. Cylindrical, except for the head and first three segments, which are considerably larger and wider. The head is widest, and the succeeding three segments taper progressively to their juncture with the fourth. From there to the cauda, the width is uniform. Head. We were unable to obtain measurements. The color is a delicate rosy straw, with black ocelli, and mouth parts edged with brown. Body. The first three segments are tinged with light rose, but this gradually fades into the translucent light straw ground color of the remaining portion of the body. There is an indefinite shaded patch of light gray, placed mid- dorsally on each segment from the fourth to about the eleventh, becoming slightly more pronounced caudally. Similar patches occur ventrally on each segment, where, however, they are more clearly defined. The legs are light straw, tinged with rose, and the pair of pro- legs and anal prolegs are concolorous with the body. Short colorless setae occur sparingly over the body surface. MATURE LARVA. —Examples measured Sept. 10, 1956; length, 39 to 40 mm. Cylindrical, with a twig-like appearance, both in color and form. Head, width, 4 mm. Strongly bilobed, the surface rugose, and heavily blotched with spots and patches of tan, red-brown and chocolate. The front is depressed, the upper half speckled tan and red- brown, and the lower half uniform brown. The adfrontal sutures are dark brown, the clypeus is streaked ivory and brown, and the mouth parts are mottled brown. The antennae are dark brown, and the ocelli are black, with one being placed on a white field. Body, cylindrical, with a warty ridge topping the fourth seg- ment transversely, and a dorsally placed prominence on the tenth segment. 93 Butvetin, So. CaAuie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 PLATE 19 Mature larva of Caripeta macularia B & McD. Fig. A. Larva, lateral aspect, enlarged approximately X 2%. Fig. B. Head and first five segments of larva, dorsal aspect, enlarged approx- imately X 6. Fig. C. Caudal segments of larva, dorsal aspect, enlarged approximately X 6. Reproduced from painting by the author. 94 BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 The prevailing color seems to be a gray-brown, but is actually produced by numerous dots, dashes, short crenulated lines and blotches in various shades of yellow, gray-tan, brown and choc- olate. These combine to form indefinite geometric patterns, more noticeable at the cephalic and caudal portions than on the middle segments. The widest segment is the second, due to a lateral bulge on each side. Ths segment is 4 mm. wide. The dorsal prominence on the fourth segment is mottled chocolate and gray-brown. A warty prominence, placed substigmatally on the sixth seg- ment is yellow-brown. The first pair of legs are relatively short; the second pair, intermediate in length, and the third pair markedly protruded owing to a heavy basal expansion of the body on which they are placed. All are mottled gray-brown and yellow-brown, as are also the pair of prolegs, and anal prolegs. Between the prolegs and anal prolegs there are several branching excrescences, which are somewhat hyaline, and dull pink. Numerous small yellow papillae occur over the body, each topped by a short black seta. The spiracles are dull yellow, rimmed with dark brown circlets. The pattern and markings of this larva are too complicated to be described, and are best set forth in the accompanying Plate 19. [Special note. The description and drawing of the mature larva must, at present, be considered tentative, for the reason that in the final emergence of numerous imagines of C. macularia, two examples of Phaeoura cristifera Hlst. appeared. These must have been introduced as young larvae on the foodplant. It is very un- likely that the single larva chosen at random from among the many Caripetas for illustrating was a Phaeoura, but an additional rearing must be made to eliminate any doubt. There is, however, no uncertainty as to the egg, first instar larva, and pupa. |] The first larva pupated Sept. 18, 1956 in a loosely woven cocoon formed in the debris at the bottom of the rearing cage. Pupa.—Length, 16 mm. Greatest width through center 5.2 mm. The anterior portions including the wings are heavily rugose, and dark chocolate in color. The abdominal segments are a lighter red-brown, with the edges of all movable segments slightly tinged with green. The surface of these segments is finely rugose. 95 BuLLetTInN, So, Catir, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 PLATE 20 t‘upa of Caripeta macularia B. & McD., ventral aspect, enlarged X 57%, Reproduced from painting by the author. The head is narrow, and well rounded. The antennae extend to the edge of the wing cases, and the tips of the maxillae reach a point 1 mm. short of this. The cremaster ends in a pair of brownish black spines, .4 mm. long, which are recurved outwardly. Lateral thereto is a pair of short yellowish hooklets. The pupa is illustrated on Plate 20. The first imago emerged March 15, 1957. Subsequent emer- gences were on March 31, May 3, 4 and 29. Numerous viable pupae on hand will probably give forth imagines in June. By comparing the differences between the eggs, and pupae of the two species herein discussed, it will be noted that there is such marked disparity in these stages as to suggest that they may not belong to the same genus. 96 BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 SCIENTIFIC NOTES THE PRAIRIE RATTLESNAKE AT GRAN QUIVIRA NATIONAL MONUMENT, NEW MEXICO One of the common animals of the Chupadera Mesa at Gran Quivira, New Mexico, is the prairie rattlesnake, Crotalus viridis viridis ( Rafinesque ). Since August 1954, the senior author has collected data on the occurrence of this snake in a 15 acre area. Intensive surveillance has been maintained over a 4 acre daily working area at 6,650 feet elevation comprising 0.75 miles of unpaved road, 0.5 miles of paved trail and 0.5 miles of unpaved trail. Scattered through the region are mounds of tumbled Chupadera limestone and weed free ruin areas of approximately one acre extent. The entire site covers a large hill with gentle slopes dropping away gradually in every direction except to the east where the terrain is level with the top of the hill. The rounded hilltop receives greatest insolation along the crest and south sides and this is where most rattlesnakes have been found. On a partly cloudy day with scattered light showers, 6-VII-56, one 304 mm juvenile with button was so relaxed in the radiating heat from the macadam trail at 3:15 PM that while guiding visitors, the junior author crushed it under the left foot before noticing the specimen. On a windy, clear day, 25-VIII-56, one 800 mm specimen was observed at 10 AM in a northwest- southeast resting position on a south slope of tumbled pueblo limestone completely quiescent in sun bathing until disturbed by contact with a snake stick. The dominant vegetation is one-seed juniper, Juniperus monosperma, cane cholla cactus, Opuntia imbricata, and salt bush, Atriplex canescens, with scattered smaller shrubs, wild flowers, and grasses varying with the seasons. The physical characteristics of this region suggest a suitable denning area although no actual den or migration of rattlesnakes has been observed. However, there are no prairie dogs here and the burrows available are chiefly kangaroo rat, Dipodomys, or wood rat, Neotoma, plus natural subterranean limestone cavities. From the frequency of rattling, the rapidity of escape movements, the prompt assumption of striking posture, the sensitivity to snake stick contacts and length of time in rattling, a definite impression of aggressiveness was obtained in handling these snakes for removal to safer locations. These observations are similar to = by Klauber (1956, Rattlesnakes, 2 vols., Univ. of Calif. ress ). Since weather data are recorded at this station, some correlations can be made with temperature and rainfall. All temperatures are here recorded in degrees Fahrenheit. Very slight amounts of rainfall preceded all spring appearances. Prior to 1953, observations were recorded by Super- intendent Ray B. Ringenbach. Records of first appearances in the spring with maximum and minimum temperatures for that day are as follows: 13-IV-52, 62-30; 31-III-54, 60-27; 9-IV-55, 64-25; and 5-IV-56, 63-28. Records for last observations for the year are: 14-XII-52, 52-24; 30-XI-53, 63-25; 20-X1-54, 65-20; 26-XI-55, 59-25; and 11-XI-56, 70-30. The average corresponding temperatures for the prior ten day periods were 60.5-29.7 in the spring, and 56.5-24.5 in the fall. The December 14th prairie rattlesnake was observed wriggling through 4 inches of snow. There appear to be no apparent correlations here with rainfall and temperature but 97 BULLETIN, So. Cate, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 insolation may be important in their appearance on the surface of the ground since these occurrences are associated with clear skies. For 25 snakes seen in September, 18 were noted on clear days, 6 on partly cloudy days and 1 on a cloudy day. For 25 snakes observed in October, 9 were found on clear days and 16 on partly cloudy days. For 45 snakes seen in April, 29 were observed on clear days, 10 on partly cloudy days and 6 on cloudy days. Records for 144 rattlesnakes observed from 54 through 756, reveal that 73 were noted during clear weather, 63 during partly cloudy and 8 during cloudy weather. The highest resident contact ratio was recorded by Supt. Ringenbach in April of 1952, when 32 were seen although there is no note that these were all different snakes. The following ratios for 54 through ’56 are known separate individual contacts. In 1954, from March 31st through November 20th, 32 recorded specimens were known plus 6 estimated for November, making a total of 38. Of these, 3 were met by visitors for a contact ratio of 1 to each 1,505 visitors. However, the contact ratio for the resident supervisors was 1 rattlesnake every 5.9 days. In 1955, a total of 56 rattlesnakes were noted including one western diamondback, Crotalus atrox. For the period April 9th through November 26th, 2 prairie rattlesnakes were met by visitors for a contact ratio of 1 to 2,337. The probability for the resident supervisor meeting a rattlesnake was | every 4.3 days. In 1956, 56 prairie rattlesnakes were met from April 5th through November I1th. The visitor contact ratio was 1 to 508, while the resident contact ratio was 1 every 4 days. For the months of greater contact abundance the ratio of POSSIBLE contacts for visitors was 1 in 52 for 754, 1 in 22 for 755, and 1 in 29 for 56 during April, and 1 in 72 for ’55 and 1 in 31 for ’56 during October.— Channing T. Howell, Superintendent, and Sherwin F. Wood, Seasonal Ranger, Gran Quivira National Monument, Gran Quivira, New Mexico. A DELAYED SKIN REACTION TO CONENOSE BUG FEEDING ON MAN On July 3, 1956 two adult Triatoma protracta were obtained from the new residence at Chaco Canyon through the kindness of Superintendent Charles C. Sharp. These bugs were transported in a water cooler (Wood & Wood, 1952, Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 51:108-111) to Gran Quivira National Monument where they were fed on the writer. Both male and female bugs were removed from their culture jar and transferred at 8:54 AM to a plastic box pressed firmly against the tabletop with the left 5th finger. The male Triatoma began probing the skin immediately, stopping exploratory movements with the tip of the proboscis at 8:55 AM about % inch from the finger tip on the lateral surface. The short terminal seg- ment of the proboscis was perpendicular to the skin surface with the other segments bent at about an 80° angle. No sensation of any type was noticed at the finger tip except pressure from contact with the plastic box. The female remained motionless near the male while the latter was feeding. By 9:00 AM the male’s abdomen was beginning to round noticeably from above and the crossed wings were elevating from the posterior dorsal surface of the body. Except for slight motion of the antennae forward and backward at the beginning of feeding, the male held the two sense organs equidistant from and parallel to the skin surface even though the insect’s body was not exactly at right angles to the finger axis. The bug continued proboscis contact without body movement from its original position. At 9:11 AM the male had fed to capacity as evidenced by the well rounded 98 —————— BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 upper surface of the abdomen and distinctly elevated wings and voluntarily drew away from the finger and immediately tried to crawl from the plastic box. Meanwhile at 9:01 AM the female turned toward the finger, backed away and crawled out on the table top being replaced with forceps twice near the finger tip. At 9:02 AM the female stopped with proboscis in contact with a skin crease on the ventral side of the finger out of view of the writer. By 9:05 AM, the wing tips were elevating and abdomen round- ing and at 9:12 AM contact was broken probably by the writer's move- ment of the finger but the bug appeared completely fed. Thus, the male Triatoma fed to capacity in 16 minutes and the female in 10 minutes. Close inspection with a 10 power hand lens revealed no sign of physical change on the skin surface immediately after feeding as previously noted by Wood (1942, Jour. Parasit. 28(1):43-49). Four days after feeding of the bugs, the writer awoke at 6 AM to violent itching at the point of contact where the female had fed and noted a reddened discoloration of a slightly elevated area, 3 mm in diameter. After scratching intermittently for some 30 minutes, the itchiness subsided but the skin discoloration at point of contact with proboscis was. still noticeable 6 days after the bug fed. This skin reaction is similar to the small vesicle response described by Shields & Walsh (1956, Arch. Dermat. 74 (1):14-21) with experimental feeding of Triatoma sanguisuga.—Sherwin F. Wood, Life Sciences Department, Los Angeles City College, Los An- geles 29, California. BRIEF NOTES ON THE LIFE HISTORIES OF TWO ARIZONA GEOMETRID MOTHS During the summer field trip of 1956, while collecting in the Tonto Creek Camp area, near Kohl’s Ranch, Gila County, Arizona, brief notes were made on the life histories of Philobia aspirata Pearson, and -Pero modestus Grossbeck. There is apparently no information available in the literature on the metamorphoses of these two species, and it seems justifiable, therefore, to record the incomplete notes we were able to make at the time. PHILOBIA ASPIRATA Pears. While beating for larvae along the margin of the creek, on June 29, 1956, a number of larvae were secured from black walnut. Four examples were reared to maturity, which made possible the following notes: Mature LARVA. Length, 23 mm. Cylindrical, and relatively long in proportion to width. Heap: Uniform green, of a slightly yellower shade than body; some- what flattened; narrower than first segment. Antennae, green at base, shading to yellow at tip. Mouth parts tinged with yellow-brown. Mandibles margined with black. Ocelli, black. A few short, inconscpicuous, dark setae are scattered over the head. Bopy: Leaf-green, with a few soiled white longitudinal stripes occurring on the dorsum. A pair of these are placed mid-dorsally, and the area between them is of a slightly darker green than the general body color. A narrower longitudinal line parallels these dorso-laterally, and a third discontinuous line is present suprastigmatally. There is a wide yellowish band running stigmatally. The spiracles are small, with yellow centers and brown circlets. They are relatively inconspicuous. The legs are yellow, and the single pair of prolegs, and anal prolegs are a uniform green. Shortly prior to pupation the larva takes on a rose-plum shade over the dorsum, and loses some of the green. 99 BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Pupa: Length, 5 mm. Greatest width, 2.9 mm. ‘Color, brown. The cephalic end is evenly rounded. The antennae extend to the margins of the wings, and the maxillae terminate slightly beyond them. The creamaster is pyramidal, ending in a single stout spur which is very slightly and minutely recurved at the tip. The dorsal surface of the pupa is finely punctate, except for the smooth margins of the movable segments. The wing cases are smooth. The dates of pupation, and emergence of the four larvae were: (1) Pupated July 5, 1956. Emerged July 14, 1956 (2) Pupated July 8, 1956. Emerged July 18, 1956 (3) Pupated July 10, 1956. Emerged July 19, 1956 (4) Pupated July 11, 1956. Emerged July 20, 1956 Pero MopeEstus Grossb. A gravid female of Pero modestus came to light on the night of June 28, and deposited numerous eggs on gauze in the rearing cage. Some of these were laid in straight lines, but the majority were in irregular bunches. The egg is oval in form, and is laid on its side. The top side is slightly concave. Its color is predominantly dull olive green, with irregular cream colored blotches at the ends which sometimes extend onto the sides. The surface texture is granular. No micropyle is apparent. There is marked variation in the size, the average being 1.2 mm. long by .8 mm. wide. All of the eggs hatched July 8, 1956. NEWLY EMERGED LARVA: Length, 4.5 mm. Elongate and _ thread-like. The head is much wider than the body, and is light brown, with black ocelli. The body is dull olive-green on the dorsum, and olive on the venter. The caudal end is tinged with light tan. A whitish line runs longitudinally along the infrastigmatal fold. The legs are olive-green. The single pair of prolegs are light olive, and the anal pair are tinged with light tan. When resting, the larva stands nearly upright. The colony were given oak, and apparently fed on it for a short time, but all had perished by July 20, 1956. Joun A. Comstock FIRST REPORT OF ARGAS REFLEXUS (FABRICIUS), A BIRD TICK, FROM SAN DIEGO COUNTY Robert D. Lee School of Tropical and Preventive Medicine, College of Medical Evangelists Loma Linda, California A large collection of ticks, kindly identified by G. M. Kohls, Rocky Mountain Laboratory, as Argas reflexus (Fabricius), was made by Mr. Fred N. Gallup in August, 1954. The ticks were taken from the nests of Cliff Swallows near Warner’s Hot Springs, San Diego County, California. This species has been reported by Cooley and Kohls (1944) from Ventura, Contra Costa, and Inyo Counties. However, this is the first known report of A. reflexus from San Diego County. Specimens have been cepontcd in the Rocky Mountain Laboratory and in the California Academy of Sciences. LITERATURE CITED Cooley, R. A. and G. M. Kohls. 1944. The Argasidae of North America, Central America and Cuba. American Mid. Nat. Monograph No. 1. 152 pp. 100 a BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Voli565) Barta) LOST ACADEMY PROCEEDINGS 50TH ANNIVERSARY YEAR 1957 marks the fiftieth year of incorporation of the Southern California Academy of Sciences and it seems appropriate to pause and recapitulate on the growth and progress of our organization at this half-century mark. This fiftieth year of the Academy’s existence like the preceding forty-nine years, has been a year of progress and activity. Our monthly meetings have had excellent speakers and have been well attended. Our membership, while not as large as we hope it will be, has nevertheless been an active one, with individual members ranging to many corners of the earth in their scientific pursuits. The editorial program has been a vigorous one throughout the year with the publication not only of the regular issues of the “Bulletin” but of a new “Memoir” as well. The latter was published on September 9, 1956, as Volume 3, No. 3 of the Memoirs, entitled “Mites of Citrus Trees in Southern California,’ by E. A. McGregor. As a special anniversary bonus, a history of the Academy was published in time for distribution at the annual banquet. In 1907 the Academy was granted its corporate charter for a period of fifty vears. It was necessary to apply for a renewal of the charter this year, and in doing so, the Directors of the Academy requested that the organization be granted a corporate charter in perpetuity. The California Department of State has granted our request and it will no longer be necessary to renew the charter each fifty years. The treasurer’s report shows that our investments have been sound and that our finances are in excellent shape. This anniversary year has seen the election of four members to the rank of pelle. These are Dr. Walter Ebeling, Dr. John Garth, Dr. Floyd Parks and . Fred S. Truxal. At the annual dinner meeting in May, the Academy gave recognition to its oldest member by electing Mr. Theodore Payne to honorary life membership in the organization he has served so faithfully and well. Mr. Payne joined the Academy in 1898. The committee on awards for research grants from the American Association _ for the Advancement of Science. after careful deliberation, awarded the grant of 1955-56 to Dr. Sherwin F. Wood whose research concerns the distribution _ of Chagas Disease trypanosome in insect vectors in New Mexico, and the 1956- _57 to Dr. John D. Soule whose research project will be, “a clarification of the classification of the marine Bryozoa through a study of post-larval develop- ment and morphology.” | As the year ends, our membership stands at 225 members with a gain of 15 new members and a loss of one by death. The membership in the Academv should grow more rapidly than it has. We are proud of our organization and are careful as to whom we admit to membership. We should, however, find an increasing number of worthwhile persons and encourage them to share the privileges and satisfactions we gain as members in this organization. _ The fiftieth anniversary year has been a good year from my standpoint as out-going president, for I have had the task made easy by able and loyal help from many members whenever a problem arose. KENNETH E. STAGER 101 BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Annual Report of the Treasurer for the Fiscal Year 1956-1957, ending April 23, 1957. GENERAL FUND Receipts Bank carry over 4/27/56....$1196.12 Disbursements Printing & engraving.......... $3394.51 Membership dues................ 655.10 Annual meeting.................... 155.40 Sale of publications.........-.... 586.84 Monthly meetings................ 82.28 Investment returns................ 2467.83 Office expense & postage... 306.33 Annual banquet.................... 116.50 Portfolio investment............ 769.57 For memorial fund.............. 137227 | (Memorial fundsees eee 187.27 Borrowed from memorial AAAS ‘dues... 23 =) ee 8.00 Furic it See ises fe 28s 200.00 Corporation fees.................- 15.20 Refunds ates ee ee 6.50! Balance in bank 497.60 $5366.16 $5366.16 MEMORIAL FUND Receipts Disbursements Bank carry OVereccccce--e---2 $1099.74 Lent to General fund.......... $ 200.00 Memorial Mrs. Hector Balance in bank................- 1037.01 FA Otte ae een e ss 100.00 Interest on deposits............ Ot .27 $1237.01 $1237.01 ASSETS LIABILITIES Cash in General Fund.....$ 497.60 Memorial Fund.................. 1037.01 Postage account cash_...... 20.20 Postage on hand................ 15.97 Securities, market value... 52,450.31 Inventory (approximate)-. 14,403.31 Accounts payable.............. 33.67 $68,422.09 102 Publications in press........ $ 700.00 Banquet receipts to date___. 84.00 Safe deposit box................ 5.50 $ 789.50 Networth aa $67,632.59 $68,422.09 W. Dwicut PIERCE Treasurer BULLETIN, So. CauiF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY of SCIENCES Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California Subscription—$3.50 per year Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00) Publications of the Southern California Academy of Sciences The Academy has published to date the following: PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6. MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri- cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers. All issues of the above are now out of print. Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sciences Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 — one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) {n 1920. The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August; Vol. XX, No. 8, December. The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September. The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July. The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March- April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October; No. 6, November-December. From 1925 to 1956, including volumes XXIV to 55, three numbers were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2, May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume. MEMOIRS Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1, 1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949. Vol. 3, Part 3, 1956. 103 ButLetin, So, Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 Publications of the Southern California Academy of Sciences For Sale at the Appended Prices To To Non- BULLETIN Members Members VOL SANOn (aL O04) poe ee $ .50 1.00 ASD O05: Pek ie Sethe On ae 50 1.00 Si AO ee QO aR Re ae 50 1.00 Sts. cee OL SO ee a rae Ue ee 1.50 3.00 Bee a G09) ea ee a 1.00 2.00 FAO aD GIO ae ae oe a) ee en 75 1.50 salt Raia a] een (Lis, net ee eae a ee 1.50 3.00 SOR See Que ok een he) Be a) 2.00 4.00 Saige Beata Ae 1 US) 6 aiid ea RR ORL a hk, ake oe 1.50 PTE 0 ORIG TI Ss pe cad 2 OE ee ee 1.50 3.00 TQ EG D0) ieee eri ee i Lene Pi ad ea 50 1.00 OPO) NANA GOO) ) soxion viet nna a ewe te ne 50 1.00 Pee BONIS pee BID, ee Mes et sare. ele i es Ure Oe 1.00 2.00 28, LOS SANG Sl 9245 (each) pees ee 35 75 OAR Seles s el O95 (each: ace oo ace vn eee 35 75 Oe etl OD Giese eee ee eh eee 35 15 OG OOO (each) eevee eens ane 2 eee 35 ie OTe ext 33 199.8) (each) es. 2-ai a eee 135 75 TRIGA eID TOOON (each) iss ee aes Sere eee 35 vfs S230) Sy 1.32.3) OST Céach) =) ee 135 Tes Berlei WO Ot OSD (each) eee ot ee hae LOD 75 FIO ON MeO M1983. each.) sso ee 35 75 ViSBeNee PSO 84a (Gach) erat hot eee ee 35 .75 eo 4 sine wile tO" Or aliO35u(each) 2 .30 75 GON ey lee Se OSG a (eaChy) pees cc eae 35 wD oESOrees, aly 2G 0193T Geach) 2-2) ee 35 75 Si Anee ol O384 (each) == = aaa eee .30 he OO me le 23nd 939) (each!) pes en ee 35 75 BOO re ee tl OF Oe eee ee 35 75 7p eA0 Ne eles 3 G4 (each) pel. a 35 75 SAS ee OMe 94D a Ceach) ee ee eee 35 75 SAD ee MOM CEG 43 (each!) a ee ee ae ee .35 15 eA See le 3 1 O44 (each!) tae ae eee .30 15 SASS TO 3h 9455 (each) sai: Ace EOD Wo << eT SUsTGAGH (Catchy) eee 35 15 SAG ey 1D 35 1947 (each) es 815 wo AT, SAls2530 19485 (each) :2... 2s Loo 79 SCAG Ne Die Sr 1GA9u (each) BE 75 SAG es oli 3 1950) (each) ee: 5) ae 35 75 SOs e283: L951 eiVeach) es eee .60 1.25 5 OOo 341959) (each) 2a. - al ee .60 1.25 SUB Oe So 9-3" 1953 (each) vo Ss .60 1.25 EG D8. Gn4a(eachy)i2-t2 eee ees .60 1.25 $54. oe ae D8: O55 (leach) sie ee .60 1,25 Se Bae ES ole D3: 31 956: (each) habeas eer ee oe .60 125 (Continued on next page) 104 BuLLeTin, So. Carir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 56, Part 2, 1957 PUBLICATIONS (continued) To To Non- MEMOIRS Members Members Wo lBplemlO 38 paper, (COVEN). .2222.2..2cie<-coececce ccs ecces-asccsoee ee: $2.00 $4.00 “<< “printed on one side of paper.................. 3.00 5.00 Vol. 2, No. 1, 1939—paper covet.......-....--------00::0220000-- 1.25 2.50 nls printed: on one side of page:....-. 1.75 8.50 nme cL O44 wWaper COVER <:2.2222..2.sssce-0..28-60ee-ds 75 1.50 eet ee BOAT — paper COVElee ee 1.00 2.00 amma el OA9— paper COVED <22.22..-2cs-.-¢-5.s-ecesec00e: 1.00 2.00 een S05 O—D AMEN :COVET:....-<.-2<.<.022 se: 2e-aehetes- 1.50 3.00 Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or Co-operating Organizations Eorquinia—Vols, 1, 2 (all published) .....-.........---.2.02-..--.... unbound $1.00 Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published), chiefly Entomological, 1 color plate............0000022.202222--.1e.2e----- 1.00 Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall................ 1.00 A List of North American Lepidoptera in the Los Angeles County Museum. Part I Butterflies (Suborder Rhopalocera), Lloyd M. Martin and Fred S. Truxal. L.A. County Museum Science Ser. #18. Zool. #8, 1955. Price $1.00 (add 15 cents for tax and mailing). Reprints: Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfamilies Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed on one side of page only, to allow of additional notes), Wm. Barnes ancetiosterads Benjamins OQ 2 $ 50 The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County, New | IMexicomlO Sih ube RevMosbengs 2 <<. ee en 25 | Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United | State of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938 printed on | white bristol board, one side of page (without index) suitable for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-members..... 3.00 A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes of their habits and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis.............. 50 A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA, 32 | pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm. M. VSGWOA PROT, cc se les ee Nari eee AR tale en (ee eS Mot CE .00 Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum — CHANNEL ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers I to 38.................. 3.00 Fauna and Flora of E] Segundo Sand Dunes. Papers 1-16............ 1.50 ADDRESS ALL INQUIRIES TO SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A. 105 a Aa 5 > 7 : : ieee * j ‘ ‘ : ‘ REPRINTS: Contributors of articles accepted for publication in the Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return galley proof to the Editor. They may be ordered through the Editor at the following rates, from the Commonwealth Press, 1140 Venice Blvd., Los Angeles, Calif., the contributor paying for all his reprints. PRICE EISi OR REPRINTS (WITHOUT COVERS) 4pp. Spp. 12pp. 16pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp. 50 copies -..----- $5.00 $ 7.00 $10.25 $12.50 $14.25 $16.25 $19.25 $21.00 SN eae ceaeoaees Poo Om al 2a 50 ohii> —20:50' . 24:00)" 26.25 Been fe ee SO ieOO Bells 25) 138-50 22. 250524.75 928.75) 93 1):50 22) ee Se eS OO Miki oy 21250) 25.75" §2900)° 33.50 36715 Beek Bes Oem arOO 2025) 124250) 29:25) 33:25 7938.25 42.00 2 SS oeee Pe eOO 22.50 2i50 32.75. 37-50) 43:00) 47.25 Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1 Y2c each. California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state. Classes of Membership in the Southern California Academy of Sciences Membership is open to all scientists of all branches and to any person interested in the advancement of science. LIMITED ANNUAL MEMBERS: privileged to vote and attend allt ma@GQR GS cca Oe ae ele ee eee annually $3.00 UNLIMITED ANNUAL MEMBERS: also receive all publications..$5.00 LIMITED JUNIOR MEMBERS: privileged to attend all meetings..$2.00 UNLIMITED JUNIOR MEMBERS: also receive all PRE HccH RIC Speen ee em on ee ata eae Ui ae annually $3.00 LIFE MEMBERS: have all privileges and receive all publications HEAP OLNEY 2a ain alle ea A lit NE Ss Te mh Ae a $100.00 FELLOWS: elected by the Board of Directors for meritorious services. oe S LIBRA A KEW YOR BOTAIVIC! GRRDER BULLETIN OF THE Southern California Academy of Sciences LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA : esta ued un IDs Vou. 56 SEPTEMBER-DECEMBER, 1957 Part 3 CONTENTS Descriptions of New Species of Marine Mollusks from West BM rater PCO) Ges SELECT TLCUD, ooo 2o upon coe su seen cee ecicanececccncovapuoqscent~ceeseest 107 On Cyclophorid Snail Shells and Spccne from Guerrero and Naeatan, Mexico. “Robert J) Drake....:.. 0.2.00. -.seccecece ncbeceese 118 Notes on the Amphipod Genus Orchestoidea on the Pacific Coast of North America. E. L. Bousfield..........-........--0000-0--0--+ 119 A New Genus of Dexaminid Amphipod (Marine Crustacea) from California. J. Laurens Barnavd.....................-...-..00----00++- 180 The Act of Molting in the California Xanthidae, the Pebble Crabs, APS MAN VMUIR TERE SOTO oe Scale Diese ncsaseesbecete 1838 An Undescribed Shore-bug from Manitoba (Hemiptera, Saldide ). Carl J. Diake SIRE on Ta MN Raa reg SOMA ee dere tN. 142 Notes on the Cicindela praetextata-californica Tiger Beetle Complex. Description of a New Subspecies from Death Valley, California. Norman L. Rumpp..........--..1-..2+--s.0000------ 144 Australian Leaf-eating Ladybird Beetle, Epilachna virgin- tioctopunctata Fabr., as a Possible Agricultural Pest in the U~ MEG ILITICS OE PDI ce a Re Uk, oa ee eo 155 The Status of Two Geometrid Names, Carl W. Kirkwood................ 167 The Habits and Life Histories of Cochisea sinuaria B. & McD. and Cochisea scnomensis B. & McD. John A. Comstock, Christopher Henne and Frank Sala........-...2.....-..2-.2000.----------- 169 Scientific Notes: Life History Briefs; Aemilia ambigua Stkr., and Dasylophia seriata Druce. J. A. Comstock...............-......+-- 178 MMRECCOTPEE OF CE WACACEMY.....-2.2..5.-c25e40sse-cecendecencdeweactt cacndncecbesccecsee 179 Issued Jan. 15, 1958 Southern California Academy of Sciences OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS Dr.) HiEDEGARDE, HOWARD. 0.062 coc: -nultecesfe eee cee fence President Dr. (PRED *?S., URUSAM A 2 cast.s chit t.. Sennen. eee First Vice-President Drs THEODORE: DOWNS. 55, 5. cb-otscssnet-c